task conditions: 1. you are the unit 1 nso. · sim-102 page 1 of 6 job performance measure task...

SIM-102 of 6

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS: 1. You are the Unit 1 NSO. 2. Unit 1 is at 100% power. 3. Maintenance was performed last shift to repair shutdown bank C rod control. INITIATING CUES: 1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, Unit One Movable Control

Assemblies Surveillance, for shutdown bank C rods. 2. All Prerequisites Precautions, Limitations & Actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 have been met. 3. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms as

necessary. 4. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor when you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C

rods.

SIM-102 of 6

TASK TITLE: Perform Movable Control Assemblies Surveillance JPM No.: SIM-102 Rev: 2013 NRC Task No.: R-RD-004 K&A No.: 00100A4.03 Objective: 4.C.GP-04 K&A IMP: 4.0/3.7 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 5, 6, 7, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 30 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES QUARTERLY SURVEILLANCE, Rev 23.

MATERIALS: 1. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES QUARTERLY

SURVEILLANCE, Rev 23. TASK STANDARDS:

1. Perform rod movement verification of shutdown bank C rods.

TASK CONDITIONS: 1. You are the Unit 1 NSO. 2. Unit 1 is at 100% power. 3. Maintenance was performed last shift to repair shutdown bank C rod control.

INITIATING CUES: 1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, Unit One Movable

Control Assemblies Surveillance, for shutdown bank C rods. CUE: Hand examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2.

2. All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations & Actions of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 have been met. 3. Another NSO will monitor the remainder of the Main Control Board panels and address alarms

as necessary. 4. Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor when you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown

bank C rods.

SIM-102 of 6

RECORD START TIME: NOTE: As examiner, role play peer check and concur with any recommendations from the examinee.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE 1. Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2.

• VERIFY all applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed (step F.2.1).

CUE: All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.

Refer to 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2. • VERIFY all applicable

Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions are satisfactorily addressed.

SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

2. Transfer Rod Control to Manual and Verify Tave is matched to Tref (step F.2.2).

Perform the following at 1PM05J: • Place the Rod Bank Select

switch to the MAN position. • Verify Tave matched to

Tref.


*3. Select Shutdown Bank C with Rod Bank Select Switch.

• Place rod bank select

switch in SBC.


4. Record initial rod data. Record initial group step counter readings (ARO park 228) and DRPI readings (228) for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2).


*5. Insert SBC one step CUE: As Unit Supervisor, acknowledge reports of annunciators due to rod motion as they occur (for 1-10-A7 ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT provide cue that the SER point 2153 Computer Rod Deviation Sequence is printed). (Failure: if examinee moves any other bank)

Place rod motion control switch to in and insert SBC to (ARO park 228 -1 = 227) steps on group step counter.


*6. Withdraw SBC to step 231 Informational Note: 1BwGP 100-8 p. 34 limits outward rod motion to 3 continuous steps at a time.

• Place rod motion control switch to out and withdraw SBC to 231 steps on group step counter.

o Verify DRPI indicates >222.


SIM-102 of 6

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE *7 Insert SBC 10-15 steps

(Failure criteria: DRPI 210 light lit)

• Place rod motion control switch to in and insert SBC 10-15 steps as indicated on the group step counter (far enough to cause a DRPI change of > 10 steps).

o Record the group step

counter reading and the DRPI readings for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2).

o Verify each rod in SBC

indicates movement > 10 steps and record by checking the appropriate box.


*8 Withdraw SBC to original position Note: If asked, COLR limit is > 224 steps. CUE: It examinee checks table

4-1 in curve book, inform examinee that the park position is 228 steps in table 4-1.

• Place rod motion control switch to out and withdraw SBC to ARO park 228 steps on group step counter.

o Record the final group step counter reading (ARO park 228) and DRPI readings (228) for SBC on Table 1 (Page D-2).

o Verify SBC DRPI > 222 steps.

o Verify that all rods of SBC are at the initial position recorded on Table 1 (Page D-2).

o Verify the SBC is within the limits specified in the COLR.

o Complete Table 1 for the SBC within the insertion limits of the COLR by checking the appropriate box.


SIM-102 of 6

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE

9. Rod Control Restoration. (step F.4). CUE: If asked, the Bank

Overlap Counter has not changed since commencing this surveillance.

NOTE: If examinee desires to N/A step F.4.1, give concurrence to do so.

NOTE: If asked to perform independent verifications in the following steps, provide the following cue as asked:

CUE: Verification has been provided.

NOTE: If asked for desired alignment of rod control systems, provide the following cue:

CUE: Unit Supervisor desires

automatic rod control. CUE: All ductwork has been

reinstalled.

Restore Rod Control as follows: • Verify controlling Control

Bank is in its original position.

• Place the Rod Bank Select Switch to MANUAL.

• Verify Low Power Interlock C-5 NOT LIT.

• Obtain Independent Verification of C-5 NOT LIT.

• Verify Tave/Tref deviation < 1 °F.

• Verify the following Annunciators are clear: • 1-10-A6, ROD BANK

LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT.

• 1-10-A7, ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT.

• 1-10-B6, ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT.

• Obtain Independent Verification that the above annunciators are clear.

• Place the Rod Bank Select Switch to AUTO.

• Obtain Independent Verification of Rod Bank Select Switch in AUTO.

• Verify all required RD cabinet ductwork has been reinstalled.


10. Acknowledge completion of surveillance, and terminate the JPM.

Inform the Unit 1 Unit Supervisor that you have completed 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 for shutdown bank C rods

CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM. RECORD STOP TIME: COMMENTS:

SIM-102 of 6

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS • Verify/perform TQ-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION

SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST. • Establish the conditions of IC 21, 100% power, steady state, equilibrium xenon. • Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist. • Place simulator in RUN. • Verify CBD at 220 steps. • Record ARO park position in body JPM where ARO park ___ designated (see JPM steps 4, 5, 8) IF NOT

ALREADY FILLED IN FOR THE JPM. COMMENTS • Provide examinee copy of 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2, UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES

SURVEILLANCE. (Final)

WC-AA-111 Revision 4

Page 25 of 61

ATTACHMENT 10

SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID-WEST SITES ONLY)

Page 1 of 1

Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2____ 123456____ Work Order #: __ N/A

PMID/RQ Title: ____________

MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLY SURVIELLANCE

PMID/RQ Due Date: ___________

N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A

Signature/Authorization Approval Review: Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work: __

Time _Joe Supervisor ______ Today

Work Started __________________________ ________ ________

5 min ago

Work Stopped: __________________________ ________ ________

Supv Review of Work Completion: __________________________ ________ ________

ANI Review of work package: __________________________ ________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO

(“Work Started” date (above shall beComplete one of the following:

the credit date unless otherwise explained)

Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# Below: If crediting ‘per another WO’, verify credit date

_______

is ‘Work Started’ date of referenced WO.

_________ Complete Sat – Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat – Credit Surveillance No Work Performed – Credit Surveillance Failed – Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance) No Work Performed – Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance) Comments (partial surveillance) PMT for Shutdown Bank C

ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED) ____________________ ____________________________________ ________ ____________________ ____________________________________ ________ ____________________ ____________________________________ ________ Title Signature Date


Page 25 of 61

BRAIDWOOD STATION

PROCEDURE NO. 1BwOSR 3.1.4.2

UNIT NO. 1

REVISION NO. 23

PROCEDURE TITLE:

UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES

SURVEILLANCE

Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 23

Remove EC 368959 requirements from procedure (EC was closed but procedure revisions never reflected the removal of the EC.)

PCRA 1230957-30

1BwOSR 3.1.4.2 Revision 23 Continuous Use

1

UNIT ONE MOVABLE CONTROL ASSEMBLIES

SURVEILLANCE A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY

This procedure outlines the steps necessary to verify the OPERABILITY of each Movable Control Assembly by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction and is applicable in MODES 1 and 2. This procedure SHALL be performed either: 1. As scheduled, 2. Non-routinely in conjunction with a Reactor Startup or Rod Malfunction or, 3. To align the rods to a new ARO park position as determined by Reactor

Engineering.

B. REFERENCES 1. Tech Spec LCOs:

a. 3.1.4. b. 3.1.5. c. 3.1.6.

2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: 3.1.4.2. 3. Station Procedures:

a. 1BwGP 100-2, Reactor Startup b. 1BwGP 100-8, Generic Reactor Control Guidance c. 1BwOL 3.1.4, LCOAR - Reactivity Control Systems - Movable Control

Assemblies - Group Height


2

C. PREREQUISITES 1. Receive permission to perform this surveillance from the Shift Manager or

designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover Sheet signed and dated.

NOTE

The following Prerequisite may require MMD support to remove and re-install interfering ductwork at the RD Power Supply Cabinets.

2. A visual inspection inside of all 5 RD power cabinets has been performed

ensuring no blown fuse indicators tripped (reference Attachment D for blown fuse illustration).

3. The Reactor is operating in steady state conditions, if this surveillance is being

performed with the Unit in Mode 1. 4. BwCB-1 Table 4-1 has been revised to indicate the ARO park position, if

necessary. 5. A visual inspection outside of all 5 RD power cabinets indicates that one GROUP

SELECT light is LIT per cabinet. 6. Prior to initiating rod motion, refer to the Rod Control Operation section of

1BwGP 100-8.


3

D. PRECAUTIONS NOTE

All of the following precautions are only applicable for performance of Subsection 2.0.

1. Prior to transferring Rod Control to the automatic MODE, VERIFY:

a. Permissive C-5 is extinguished. b. VERIFY Tave/Tref deviation ≤ 1°F.

2. Avoid variations in plant load, Reactor Coolant temperature, and Boron

concentration. 3. DO NOT allow Tave changes of greater than -4°F or +1°F. Compensate by

intermittent rod movement to match Tave/Tref.

4. If any control rod group (except Control Bank D) is withdrawn past 231 steps, STOP the surveillance. PERFORM Attachment A, Rod Bank Realignment to return the affected bank to the ARO position and resume testing of the remaining rods as required. If Control Bank D is withdrawn past 231, STOP the surveillance. PERFORM Attachment A, Rod Bank Realignment, to return Control Bank D to initial position.


4

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS 1. As stated in Tech Spec LCOs 3.1.4, 3.1.5 and 3.1.6. 2. If the Acceptance Criteria (¢) is not met during the performance of this

surveillance, IMMEDIATELY notify the Shift Manager or designee to initiate LCOAR 1BwOL 3.1.4 if in MODES 1 or 2.

3. Each Rod Bank tested must be returned to the rod insertion limits specified in the

COLR (for Shutdown Rods) and to its original or new ARO park position (for Control Rods) to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 and 3.1.6 are not exceeded prior to proceeding to the next Rod Bank (N/A if performing Subsection 1.0).

4. Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", 1-10-B6, "ROD

BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-12-C1, “PZR PRESS CONT DEV LOW HTRS ON”, may alarm during movement of the Control Banks.

5. Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" may alarm during

movement of the Shutdown Banks or Control Banks. 6. It is permissible to place DRPI in Half Accuracy MODE, as required, if data

failures prohibit performing this surveillance. Prior to placing DRPI in Half Accuracy, an evaluation shall be performed to verify loss of both A & B Channels to individual rods will not occur. (Sections 1.0 and 2.0 only)

7. Annunciator 1-10-A7, SER point 2153, should be considered inoperable during

the performance of Section 3.0. If this section can not be completed, the computer points reset and the alarm cleared within 4 hours, then 1BwOS RD-2 should be completed within 4 hours of the alarm condition.

8. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a

withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.


5

F. MAIN BODY NOTE

Initial each step in the space provided adjacent to the procedure step number AFTER the step has been successfully completed. Person(s) performing VERIFICATIONS SHALL initial in the space provided following the step.

0.0 SURVEILLANCE OVERVIEW 0.1 Parallel Subsections 1.0, 2.0, and 3.0 are independent of one another so that

either Subsection may be performed. 0.2 Performance of either Subsection 1.0, or 2.0 fully satisfies the surveillance

requirement. 0.3 Performance of the steps in either Subsections 1.0 or 2.0 for less than all

Movable Control Assemblies is acceptable if a partial surveillance is required. The Shift Manager or designee SHALL determine the steps to be performed. The Data Package Cover Sheet must indicate that a partial surveillance was performed, which rod(s) were exercised, and the reason(s) why stated in the comments section.

0.4 Subsection 3.0 will establish a new ARO park position. This subsection may be

performed after the rods have been exercised in Subsection 2.0 or independently to establish a new ARO park position. Performance of this Subsection is optional.


6

F. 0.5 The Subsections perform the following:

F.1.0 Takes credit for the movement of the Shutdown and Control Banks during a Reactor Startup.

F.2.0 Actually moves the Shutdown and Control Banks when the UNIT is at

power and restores the rods to their original position. F.3.0 Established a new ARO park position. F.4.0 Restores rod control and must always be performed after Subsections

F.2.0 or F.3.0.

Rod Movement Verification During Startup

Restoration

Establishes a new ARO Park Position

Rod Movement Verification During Operation

START

1.0

2.0 3.0

4.0

END


7

F. 1.0 ROD MOVEMENT VERIFICATION DURING STARTUP

_____ 1.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

¢ ____ 1.2 During the withdrawal of the Shutdown Banks as directed in 1BwGP 100-2,

VERIFY each rod moved at least 10 steps. ¢ ____ 1.3 During the withdrawal of the Control Banks as directed in 1BwGP 100-2, VERIFY

each rod moved at least 10 steps.

NOTE The following step may be marked N/A at the discretion of the SM/Designee if the RD cabinet ductwork is required to remain removed for additional surveillances of other RD work.

_____ 1.4 VERIFY all required RD cabinet ductwork has been re-installed.


8

F. 2.0 ROD MOVEMENT VERIFICATION DURING OPERATION

_____ 2.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

2.2 VERIFY/TRANSFER rod control to MANUAL and ESTABLISH Tave/Tref match:

_____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position.

_____ b. MAINTAIN Tave matched with Tref. NOTE

As long as the Shutdown Bank is above 224 steps, as indicated by the bank demand step counters and verified by DRPI, indicating ≥222 steps, the rod insertion limits are met as specified in the COLR. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.

2.3 PERFORM the rod movement verification for the Shutdown Rods as follows: NOTE

The Bank order of the Shutdown Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Shutdown Bank E, D, C, B, A.

Shutdown Bank E

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank E on the Rod Bank Select. 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1. 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank E one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 Shutdown Bank E. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE

Annunciator 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT", may alarm in the following step.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank E to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counter.


9

F. 2.3 5) RECORD the “withdrawn to 231” Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank E on Table 1.

6) VERIFY DRPI indicates ≥ 222 steps withdrawn.

7) INSERT Shutdown Bank E 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the

associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings

for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank E indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank E to the initial Group Step Counter

reading. 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank E DRPI reading ≥222 steps.

NOTE DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank E are at the initial

position recorded TABLE 1. 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank E is within the insertion limits specified in

the COLR. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank E.


10

F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank D

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1. 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank D one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank D. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE


4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank D to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counter. 5) RECORD the “withdrawn to 231” Group Step Counter reading and

the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank D on Table 1.


7) INSERT Shutdown Bank D 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).


for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank D indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank D to the initial Group Step Counter


readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank D DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


11

NOTE

DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank D are at the initial

position recorded TABLE 1. 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank D is within the insertion limits specified in

the COLR. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank D.


12

F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank C

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1. 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank C one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank C. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE


4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank C to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counter. 5) RECORD the “withdrawn to 231” Group Step Counter reading and

the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank C on Table 1.


7) INSERT Shutdown Bank C 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).


for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank C indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank C to the initial Group Step Counter


readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank C DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


13

NOTE


F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank C are at the initial

position recorded TABLE 1.

14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank C is within the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank C.


14

F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank B

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1. 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank B one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank B. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE


4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank B to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counters. 5) RECORD the “withdrawn to 231” Group Step Counter readings and

the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank B on Table 1.


7) INSERT Shutdown Bank B 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank B indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank B to the initial Group Step Counter

reading. 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank B DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


15

NOTE


F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank B are at the initial

position recorded TABLE 1. 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank B is within the insertion limits specified in

the COLR. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank B.


16

F. 2.3 Shutdown Bank A

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1. 3) INSERT Shutdown Bank A one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank A. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps).

NOTE


4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank A to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counters. 5) RECORD the “withdrawn to 231” Group Step Counter readings and

the DRPI readings for the Shutdown Bank A on Table 1.


7) INSERT Shutdown Bank A 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.

¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Shutdown Bank A indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Shutdown Bank A to the initial Group Step Counter

reading. 11) RECORD the final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 1.

12) VERIFY Shutdown Bank A DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


17

NOTE


F. 2.3 13) VERIFY that all rods in the Shutdown Bank A are at the initial

position recorded TABLE 1. 14) VERIFY Shutdown Bank A is within the insertion limits specified in

the COLR. 15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 1 for Shutdown Bank A.


18

F. 2.4 PERFORM the rod movement verification for the Control Rods as follows: NOTE

The Control Banks may be moved in or out at the discretion of the Shift Manager or Designee to meet the requirements of this surveillance. Monitor Tave and Rx Power closely and correct as needed to minimize plant transients.

NOTE

If a Control Bank is fully inserted, RECORD only the Group 1 & 2 Initial Step Counter readings and MARK any other columns on the Data Table for the fully inserted Control Bank "N/A". DO NOT perform the rod exercise for that Bank. The surveillance is still considered "Complete" as Tech Specs require testing only those rods NOT fully inserted in the core.

NOTE

The Bank order of the Control Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Control Bank A, B, C, D to facilitate final Tave adjustment.

NOTE

Based on the RIL figure in the COLR the sequence, overlap, and rod insertion limits are satisfied as long as the Control Bank is above 224 steps as indicated by the bank demand step counters and verified by DRPI. Westinghouse has suggested that performing an insertion step, as opposed to a withdraw step, as the first step may minimize the probability of a dropped rod during rod movement.

Control Bank A

1) SELECT Control Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI

readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.


19

NOTE Annunciators 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT", and 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT", may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE

If failures associated with DRPI do not allow verification of 10 steps indicated movement, insertion up to 21 steps is allowed, provided DRPI vs. demanded position remains within ± 12 steps.

F. 2.4 3) INSERT Control Bank A one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank A. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank A to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counters.

5) RECORD the “withdrawn to 231” Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.



20

F. 2.4 7) INSERT Control Bank A 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).

8) RECORD the Inserted Group Step Counter reading(s) and the

DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2. ¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod

in Control Bank A indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

10) WITHDRAW Control Bank A to the Initial Group Step Counter

reading.

11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 2.

12) VERIFY Control Bank A DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank A are at the initial position

recorded on TABLE 2.


21

F. 2.4 14) PERFORM the following:

a) VERIFY/RECORD that the following annunciators are CLEAR:

1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT" 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT" 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT"

b) IF one or more of the annunciators listed above have not

cleared, PERFORM the following corrective actions, (otherwise N/A):

(1) With Reactor Engineering concurrence, WITHDRAW

rods a maximum of 2 additional steps, not to exceed 231 steps, in an attempt to clear the alarm(s).

(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter

reading.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank A.


22

F. 2.4 Control Bank B

1) SELECT Control Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI

readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.


NOTE


3) INSERT Control Bank B one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank B. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank B to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counters.



7) INSERT Control Bank B 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the

associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).


DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2. ¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod

in Control Bank B indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.


23

F. 2.4 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank B to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

11) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 2.

12) VERIFY Control Bank B DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank B are at the initial position

recorded on TABLE 2. 14) PERFORM the following:








reading.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank B.


24

F. 2.4 Control Bank C

1) SELECT Control Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI

readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.


NOTE


3) INSERT Control Bank C one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank C. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank C to 231 steps on the Group

Step Counters.



7) INSERT Control Bank C 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the

associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).


DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2. ¢ 9) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod

in Control Bank C indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.


25

F. 2.4 10) WITHDRAW Control Bank C to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.


readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 2.

12) VERIFY Control Bank C DRPI reading ≥222 steps.


13) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank C are at the initial position









reading.

15) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank C.


26

F. 2.4 Control Bank D

1) SELECT Control Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch. 2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI

readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.


NOTE


3) INSERT Control Bank D one step from the initial Group Step

Counter reading recorded on TABLE 2 for Control Bank D. (This step N/A if Group Step Counter already at 231 steps.)

NOTE Control Bank D should NOT be withdrawn past 231 steps. It is desired to withdraw Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps, if possible.

4) VERIFY/WITHDRAW Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps, not to exceed

231 steps on the Group Step Counters.

a) RECORD the target CBD position _________ for withdrawal. b) WITHDRAW Control Bank D to the target value.

5) RECORD the “withdrawn” Group Step Counter readings and the

DRPI readings for the selected Control Bank on TABLE 2.

6) INSERT Control Bank D 10 to 15 steps as indicated on the associated Group Step Counter(s) (ensure the insertion is sufficient to result in a DRPI change of greater than or equal to 10 steps indicated).


DRPI readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.


27

¢ F. 2.4 8) VERIFY/RECORD (by checking the appropriate box), that each rod in Control Bank D indicates movement greater than or equal to 10 steps.

9) WITHDRAW Control Bank D to the Initial Group Step Counter

reading. 10) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Control Bank D on TABLE 2.


11) VERIFY that all rods in Control Bank D are at the initial position








(2) RESTORE rods to the Initial Group Step Counter reading.

13) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 2 for Control Bank D.


28

F. 3.0 ESTABLISHING NEW ARO PARK POSITION _____ 3.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS

AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed.

3.2 VERIFY/TRANSFER rod control to MANUAL and ESTABLISH Average Tave/Tref within ± 1°F:

_____ a. VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the MAN position. _____ b. ESTABLISH Tave within ± 1°F of Tref using control rods, as needed. _____ c. RECORD the new ARO park position from BwCB-1, Table 4-1 or Reactor

Engineering _______________ steps.

3.3 PERFORM the following to establish the ARO park position for the Shutdown Rods:

NOTE

Annunciator 1-10-A7, “ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT”, may alarm in the following steps.

NOTE

The Bank order of the Shutdown Rod movement verifications may be done in any order. The preferred order is Shutdown Bank E, D, C, B, A.

Shutdown Bank E:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank E on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 3.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park

position, INSERT Shutdown Bank E one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank E.


29

F. 3.3 4) MOVE Shutdown Bank E to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank E on TABLE 3. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in

Shutdown Bank E are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank E.

Shutdown Bank D:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank D on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 3.


position, INSERT Shutdown Bank D one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded per TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank D to the ARO park position listed in

BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter. 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank D on TABLE 3. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in

Shutdown Bank D are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank D.


30

F. 3.3 Shutdown Bank C:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 3.


position, INSERT Shutdown Bank C one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank C to the ARO park position listed in

BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counter. 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank C on TABLE 3. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in

Shutdown Bank C are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank C.

Shutdown Bank B:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 3.


position, INSERT Shutdown Bank B one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank B to the ARO park position listed in

BwCB-1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counters.

5) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank B on TABLE 3. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in

Shutdown Bank B are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank B.


31

F. 3.3 Shutdown Bank A:

1) SELECT Shutdown Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 3. 3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park

position, INSERT Shutdown Bank A one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 3.

4) MOVE Shutdown Bank A to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-

1, Table 4-1 on the Group Step Counters. 5) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 6) RECORD the Final Group Step Counter reading(s) and the DRPI

readings for Shutdown Bank A on TABLE 3. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in

Shutdown Bank A are at the ARO position recorded on TABLE 3. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 3 for Shutdown Bank A.


32

F. 3.4 PERFORM the following to establish the new ARO park position for the Control Rods:

NOTE

The Bank order to establish the ARO park position should be Control Bank A, B, and then C (if at the ARO position).

Control Bank A

1) SELECT Control Bank A on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 4.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank A one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.

4) MOVE Control Bank A to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1.


readings for Control Bank A on TABLE 4. 6) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control

Bank A are at the ARO position. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank A.


33

F. 3.4 Control Bank B

1) SELECT Control Bank B on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 4.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank B one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.

4) MOVE Control Bank B to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1.


readings for Control Bank B on TABLE 4. 6) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control

Bank B are at the ARO position. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank B.


34

F. 3.4 Control Bank C

1) SELECT Control Bank C on the Rod Bank Select switch.

2) RECORD the Initial Group Step Counter readings and the DRPI readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 4.

3) If the new ARO park position is above the current ARO park position, INSERT Control Bank C one step from the Initial Group Step Counter reading recorded on TABLE 4.

4) MOVE Control Bank C to the ARO park position listed in BwCB-1, Table 4-1.


readings for Control Bank C on TABLE 4. 6) VERIFY DRPI indicated ≥ 222 steps withdrawn. 7) VERIFY using Group Step Counter or DRPI, that all rods in Control

Bank C are at the ARO position. 8) VERIFY/COMPLETE TABLE 4 for Control Bank C.

_____ 3.5 VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch in MANUAL. _____ 3.6 PERFORM Attachment B, Thumbwheel Switch Setting and Checkout for the new

ARO park position:

_____ 3.7 NOTIFY Site IT to ADJUST the computer points as required for the new ARO position.


35

F. 4.0 ROD CONTROL RESTORATION NOTE

The following step is performed to ensure that the Bank Overlap Unit reflects the proper control bank position. If the controlling bank cannot be restored to its original position due to plant conditions, then RESET the Bank Overlap Unit to match the present controlling bank position prior to continuing with step 4.1

_____ 4.1 VERIFY the controlling Control Bank has been returned to its original position,

using any of the following methods (N/A if rods cannot be restored due to plant conditions):

Tave within ± 1°F of Tref , no adjustment required.

Boration. Dilution. Turbine load changes.

_____ 4.2 VERIFY/PLACE Rod Bank Select switch to the MANUAL position. _____ 4.3 VERIFY Low Power Interlock C-5 NOT LIT.

VERIFICATION _____

_____ 4.4. VERIFY Tave/Tref deviation ≤ 1°F, if returning Rod Bank Select switch to AUTO.

4.5 VERIFY the following annunciators are CLEAR:

_____ a. 1-10-A6, "ROD BANK LO-2 INSERTION LIMIT".

VERIFICATION _____ _____ b. 1-10-A7, "ROD DEV POWER RNG TILT".

VERIFICATION _____ _____ c. 1-10-B6, "ROD BANK LOW INSERTION LIMIT".

VERIFICATION _____


36

F ____ 4.6 VERIFY/PLACE the Rod Bank Select switch to the AUTO or MANUAL position as directed by Shift Manager or designee based on plant conditions. AUTO/MANUAL VERIFICATION _____

NOTE

The following step may be marked N/A at the discretion of the SM/Designee if the RD cabinet ductwork is required to remain removed for additional surveillances of other RD work.

_____ 4.7 VERIFY all required RD cabinet ductwork has been reinstalled.

G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA 1. For a complete surveillance, all Rods required to be tested have been

determined OPERABLE by movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction. 2. For a partial surveillance, each Rod tested has been determined OPERABLE by

movement of at least 10 steps in any one direction.


37

ATTACHMENT A

ROD BANK REALIGNMENT

NOTE The following steps are to be used in the event a group of control rods is withdrawn past 231 steps. If the affected rod is in Shutdown Banks C, D, or E, GO TO Step 10.

1. RECORD the following information:

Affected Bank: ________________________ Group 1 step counter reading: ________________________ Group 2 step counter reading: ________________________

2. RECORD the As Found condition of the Master Cycler (Card A 105 1RD07J):

DS1 light status: ON/OFF (circle status) DS2 light status: ON/OFF (circle status) DS3 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)


38

ATTACHMENT A (cont.)


NOTE DS 1 and DS 2 light status is irrelevant in the following step. DS 3 light lit is sufficient to VERIFY Master Cycler Status.

3. PERFORM either of the following:

VERIFY the Master Cycler is set for Group 2 to move inward next.

DS 3 light LIT on Card A 105 at 1RD07J

ADJUST the Master Cycler using the MC+1 pushbutton so that Group 2 will move inward next.

DS 3 light LIT on Card A 105 at 1RD07J

4. RECORD the As Left condition of the Master Cycler:

DS1 light status: ON/OFF (circle status) DS2 light status: ON/OFF (circle status) DS3 light status: ON/OFF (circle status)

5. SET both group step counters for the affected Bank to 231 steps. 6. RECORD the following information:

Affected Bank: ______________________ Group 1 step counter reading: ______________________ steps Group 2 step counter reading: ______________________ steps


39


ROD BANK REALIGNMENT 7. VERIFY/ADJUST the affected bank computer point to match the affected bank step

counters:

Rod Bank Step Counter on 1PM05J Computer Point

CONT A Grp 1 ______________ Grp 2 ______________ U0049 _______________

CONT B Grp 1 ______________ Grp 2 ______________ U0050 _______________

CONT C Grp 1 ______________ Grp 2 ______________ U0051 _______________

CONT D Grp 1 ______________ Grp 2 ______________ U0052 _______________

SHUTDOWN A Grp 1 ______________ Grp 2 ______________ U0053 _______________

SHUTDOWN B Grp 1 ______________ Grp 2 ______________ U0054 _______________


40


ROD BANK REALIGNMENT 8. PERFORM the following:

a. MANUALLY insert the affected bank to 228 steps. b. VERIFY Group 2 of the affected bank inserts before Group 1. c. MAUALLY INSERT/WITHDRAW the affected bank to the ARO position

(BwCB-1 Table 4-1)

9. IF the affected group was in a control bank, PERFORM the following at 1RD08J:

a. PLACE the P/A Display switch to the affected bank position. b. IF required, ADJUST the setting for the affected bank to actual rod position:

1) HOLD the MANUAL/AUTO switch in the MANUAL position. 2) MOMENTARILY DEPRESS the UP/DOWN pushbutton to match the

actual position of the affected bank. 3) RELEASE the MANUAL/AUTO switch. 4) RETURN to Main Body step in effect.


41



NOTE The following steps are used to align Shutdown Banks C, D, or E only.

10. RECORD the following As Found information:

Affected Bank: ______________________ Step counter reading: ______________________ steps

11. VERIFY the affected bank step counter greater than 231 steps. 12. SET the step counter to 231 steps for the affected bank. 13. MANUALLY insert the affected bank to 228 steps. 14. VERIFY proper operation of the affected bank. 15. MANUALLY INSERT/WITHDRAW the affected bank to the ARO position

(BwCB-1 Table 4-1). 16. RECORD the following As Left information:

Affected Bank: ______________________ Step counter reading: ______________________ steps

17. RETURN to Main Body step in effect.


42

ATTACHMENT B

THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT This section sets the thumbwheel switches to the desired full out axial park position. This section also verifies the correct setting of these switches by simulation Bank Overlap.

1. The REM or designee will RECORD the desired full out axial park position of the control

rods and the desired As Left thumbwheel switch settings below. See Attachment C as a guide for required switch settings.

Full out axial park position: _________ steps. S1- _______ S2- _______ S3- _______ S4- _______ S5- _______ S6- _______

________/________ Initial Date

2. RECORD the As Found thumbwheel switch settings for the Bank Overlap in 1RD07J.

S1- _______ S2- _______ S3- _______ S4- _______ S5- _______ S6- _______

________/________ Initial Date

3. SELECT/ENSURE the Bank Selector Switch is in MANUAL (to allow Bank Overlap to

function). ________/________ Initial Date

CAUTION The thumbwheel switches are designed for best operation by rotating the switches down.

4 CYCLE the thumbwheel switches S1 through S6 through complete rotation.

This should include the units, tens, and hundreds positions for all switches.

________/________ Initial Date


43

ATTACHMENT B (cont.)

THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT 5. SET the thumbwheel switches S1 through S6 to the positions listed in step 1.

________/________ Initial Date

6. RECORD the As Found value of Bank Overlap step counter in Logic Cabinet.

AS FOUND ______________ ________/________ Initial Date

7. RESET the Step Counter in the Logic Cabinet by DEPRESSING the reset button on the

Bank Overlap Panel. ________/________ Initial Date

a. OBSERVE the step position indication resets to '000'.

________/________ Initial Date

NOTE

Steps 8 and 9 are performed simultaneously.

8. Using the "+1 Step" pushbutton in the Logic Cabinet, SIMULATE the rods being

stepped out by DEPRESSING the "+1 Step" pushbutton as needed.

________/________ Initial Date


44

ATTACHMENT B (cont.)

THUMBWHEEL SWITCH SETTING AND CHECKOUT 9. OBSERVE the indications of proper bank start and step positions. This may be done by

observing DS1, DS2, DS3, and DS4 indicators on the Bank Overlap Decoder card A206 in the Logic Cabinet

a. The control bank select lights on the Bank Overlap Display (BOD) card (A206 in

1RD07J show proper selection.

0 ≤ BOU < S1 DS1 only S1 ≤ BOU < S2 DS1 and DS2 S2 ≤ BOU < S3 DS2 only S3 ≤ BOU < S4 DS2 and DS3

S4 ≤ BOU < S5 DS3 only S5 ≤ BOU < S6 DS3 and DS4 S6 ≤ BOU DS4 only

________/________ Initial Date

10. RETURN the step counter in the Logic Cabinet to its As Found value from step 6 using

the “+1 step” push button.

AS FOUND ___________ AS LEFT ___________

________/________ Initial Date


45

ATTACHMENT C

ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE 225 Step Full Out Axial Park Position

S1 - 115 S2 - 225 S3 - 230 S4 - 340 S5 - 345 S6 - 455

(Bank Overlap - 110 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps) 226 Step Full Out Axial Park Position

S1 - 115 S2 - 226 S3 - 230 S4 - 341 S5 - 345 S6 - 456


S1 - 115 S2 - 227 S3 - 230 S4 - 342 S5 - 345 S6 - 457


S1 - 115 S2 - 228 S3 - 230 S4 - 343 S5 - 345 S6 - 458


S1 - 115 S2 - 229 S3 - 230 S4 - 344 S5 - 345 S6 - 459

(Bank Overlap - 114 steps Bank Separation - 115 steps)


46

ATTACHMENT C (cont.)

ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE Directions and Formulas for calculating Bank Overlap unit Switch Settings: 1. Obtain the desired Bank Separation and Bank Overlap values from Reactivity/Nuclear

Engineering, as supported in the applicable COLR. 2. Bank Separation must be at least one greater than Bank Overlap; these values may

never be equal. 3. Bank Separation must be at least (Full out axial park position)/2+1). 4. S1 (CBB start) = Bank Separation value. 5. S2 (CBA stop) = S1 + Bank Overlap value = Full out axial park position. 6. S3 (CBC start) = 2(S1). 7. S4 (CBB stop) = S1 + S2. 8. S5 (CBD start) = 3(S1) 9. S6 (CBC stop) = S1 + S4


47

ATTACHMENT C (cont.)

ROD WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION BANK OVERLAP SEQUENCE 231 Step Full Out Axial Park Position

S1 - 116 S2 - 231 S3 - 232 S4 - 347 S5 - 348 S6 - 463

(Bank Overlap - 115 steps Bank Separation - 116 steps) Thumbwheel Switch Setting/Function CBA CBB CBC CBD

WIT

HD

RA

W

-- - 000 Start CBA Out 0 0 0 0 S1 - 116 Start CBB Out 116 0 0 0 S2 - 231 Stop CBA Out 231 115 0 0 S3 - 232 Start CBC Out 231 116 0 0 S4 - 347 Stop CBB Out 231 231 115 0 S5 - 348 Start CBD Out 231 231 116 0 S6 - 463 Stop CBC Out 231 231 231 115 -- - ≥464 Moving CBD ≥116 steps 231 231 231 ≥116

INS

ERT

S6 - 463 Start CBC In 231 231 231 115 S5 - 348 Stop CBD In 231 231 116 0 S4 - 347 Start CBB In 231 231 115 0 S3 - 232 Stop CBC In 231 116 0 0 S2 - 231 Start CBA In 231 115 0 0 S1 - 116 Stop CBB In 116 0 0 0 -- - 000 Stop CBA at 0 steps 0 0 0 0


48

ATTACHMENT D

Blown Fuse Illustration

Blown Fuse Indicator pictured on the left provides an indication of a blown fuse (indicator is extended). Blown Fuse Indicator pictured on the right provides a normal view (indicator is not extended, fuse is not blown).

(Final)


D-2

TABLE 1 – SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS

ROD BANK

ROD NO.

Initial Position Withdrawn to 231 Steps Inserted DRPI > 10 Steps Final Position

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

S/D E

H4 ________

E-1

________

E-1

________

E-1

________

E-1

D8 H12 M8

EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ##

¢ Y N ## Y N

ROD BANK ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

S/D D

C5 _____

D-1

_____

D-1

_____

D-1

_____

D-1

E13 N11 L3


¢ Y N ## Y N

ROD BANK ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

S/D C

E3 _____

C-1

_____

C-1

_____

C-1

_____

C-1

C11 L13 N5


¢ Y N ## Y N

ROD BANK

ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

S/D B

G3 _____

B-1

_____

B-1

_____

B-1

_____

B-1

C9 J13 N7 C7

_____ B-2

_____

B-2

_____

B-2

_____

B-2

G13 N9 J3


¢ Y N ## Y N

## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.


D-3

TABLE 1 – SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS (Cont.)

ROD BANK

ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

S/D A

D2 _____

A-1

_____

A-1

______

A-1

_____

A-1

B12 M14 P4 B4

_____ A-2

_____

A-2

_____

A-2

_____

A-2

D14 P12 M2


¢ Y N ## Y N

## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position.

Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.


D-4

TABLE 2 – CONTROL ROD BANKS

ROD BANK ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

CONT A

H6 ________ A-1

________ A-1

________ A-1

________ A-1

H10 F8 ________

A-2 ________

A-2 ________

A-2 ________

A-2

K8 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?

¢ Y N ** ## Y N

ANNUNCIATORS 1-10-A6, 1-10-A7 and 1-10-B6 ARE CLEAR? Or corrective action taken?

Y N N/A Y N

ROD BANK ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

CONT B

F2 _____

B-1

_____

B-1

_____

B-1

_____

B-1

B10 K14 P6 B6

_____ B-2

_____

B-2

_____

B-2

_____

B-2

F14 P10 K2

EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?

¢ Y N ** ## Y N


Y N N/A Y N

ROD BANK ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

CONT C

H2 _____

C-1

_____

C-1

______

C-1

_____

C-1

B8

H14 P8 F6

_____ C-2

_____

C-2

_____

C-2

_____

C-2

F10 K10 K6

EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?

¢ Y N ** ## Y N


Y N N/A Y N

## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

** Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.


D-5

TABLE 2 – CONTROL ROD BANKS (Cont.)

ROD BANK ROD NO.


GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

GROUP STEP

COUNTER DRPI

CONT D

D4 _____ D-1

_____ D-1

_____ D-1

_____ D-1

M12 D12 M4 _____

D-2 _____

D-2 _____

D-2 _____

D-2

H8 EACH ROD MOVED AT LEAST 10 STEPS? RODS RETURNED TO ORIGINAL POSITION?

¢ Y N ## Y N


Y N N/A Y N

## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils. This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

** Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied.

COMMENTS:


D-6

TABLE 3 – SHUTDOWN ROD BANKS

ROD BANK ROD NO. INITIAL POSITION FINAL POSITION GROUP DEMAND DRPI GROUP DEMAND DRPI

Shutdown E

H4 _____

E-1

_____

E-1

D8 H12 M8

EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1, Table 4-1? ¢ Y N Shutdown Bank within insertion limits of COLR? ## ** ## Y N

Shutdown D

C5 _____

D-1

_____

D-1

E13 N11 L3


Shutdown C

E3 _____

C-1

_____

C-1

C11 L13 N5


Shutdown B

G3 _____

B-1

_____

B-1

C9 J13 N7 C7

_____ B-2

_____

B-2

G13 N9 J3


Shutdown A

D2 _____

A-1

_____

A-1

B12 M14 P4 B4

_____ A-2

_____

A-2

D14 P12 M2


## “YES” REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Shutdown Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils.

This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.5 are satisfied is required for any “NO”

response. COMMENTS:


D-7

TABLE 4 – CONTROL ROD BANKS

ROD BANK ROD NO. INITIAL POSITION FINAL POSITION GROUP DEMAND DRPI GROUP DEMAND DRPI

CONT A

H6 _____ A-1

_____ A-1

H10 F8 _____

A-2 _____

A-2

K8

EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ## Y N

CONT B

F2 _____

B-1

_____

B-1

B10 K14 P6 B6

_____ B-2

_____

B-2

F14 P10 K2

EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ** ## Y N

CONT C

H2 _____

C-1

_____

C-1

B8

H14 P8 F6

_____ C-2

_____

C-2

F10 K10 K6

EACH ROD MOVED TO ARO PARK POSITION per BwCB-1 Table 4-1? ** ## Y N (N/A if a controlling bank.)

## "YES" REQUIRED prior to continuing to another Control Rod Bank or completing this surveillance. DRPI indication may vary by one position from the initial reading if the control rod is between coils.

This is acceptable if the deviation is off by only one position. Corrective action to ensure the limits of Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied is required for any "NO" response.

** Not Required if this is the controlling Control Rod Bank. Ensure the Rod insertion limits of

Tech Spec 3.1.6 are satisfied. COMMENTS:

(Final)

SIM-223 1

TASK CONDITIONS: 1. You are an Assist NSO. 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5. 3. Maintenance has recently completed packing adjustment of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv. 4. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 is required to be performed to verify operability of 1SI8806.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance for 1SI8806, steps F.1 and F.3.

2. Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance. 3. Applicable LCOs have been entered.

SIM-223 2

TASK TITLE: 1SI8806 SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance JPM No.: SIM-223 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4E.AM-23 K&A No.: 006000A4.07 TASK No.: R-AM-068 K&A IMP: 4.4/4.4 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4, 5 JPM TIME: ___ MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES: 1. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, Rev. 5 MATERIALS:

1. Marked up copy of 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, Rev 5. 2. Digital stopwatch.

TASK STANDARDS: 1. 1SI8806 stroke tested per surveillance.

TASK CONDITIONS: 1. You are an Assist NSO. 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5. 3. Maintenance has recently completed packing adjustment of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol

Vlv. 4. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 is required to be performed to verify operability of 1SI8806.

INITIATING CUES: 1. The Unit 1 US has directed you to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5, SVAG Valve Stroke Surveillance

for 1SI8806, steps F.1 and F.3. (Cue: Hand examinee copy of surveillance). 2. Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance. 3. Applicable LCOs have been entered.

SIM-223 3

RECORD START TIME_____________ Note: Stroke times are determined using the dual valve indications on the MCB. Note: If examinee mis-operates stopwatch and realizes it, allow re-performance of applicable step. PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable 1. Verify initial conditions

(steps F.1.1 through F.1.3) CUE: If asked, it is not desired to perform 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-6

• Review Prerequisites Precautions Limitations and Actions.

• Verify IST coordinator listed on cover sheet

• Obtain digital stopwatch.


2. Record as found position of 1SI8806 (step F.3.1)

• Determines and records 1SI8806 as Open


*3. Perform CLOSED stroke of 1SI8806 (in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment B). Note: Close stroke time for 1SI8806 during this JPM should be within the alert and operable limits, (i.e. 6.9-11.5 sec.). If the examinee determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue. Cue: If asked, the Unit Supervisor directs you to perform the Open Stroke Timing Step when opening 1SI8806.

Perform the following: o Verify open 1SI8806 • Simultaneously start the

stopwatch and close 1SI8806.

• Stop the stopwatch when 1SI8806 indicates closed.

• Record the Stroke Closed Test Time.

o Record 1SI8806 MLB status light indication.

o Verify 1SI8806 indicates closed on 1PM06J.


SIM-223 4

*4. Perform OPEN stroke of 1SI8806 (in accordance with steps outlined in Attachment A). Note: First open stroke time for 1SI8806 during this JPM should be between the alert and operable limits, (i.e. 11.8-14.1 sec.). If the examinee determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue. Cue: When informed as US, acknowledge valve stroke time exceeds alert limit (when informed)

Perform the following: o Verify close 1SI8806 • Simultaneously start the

stopwatch and open 1SI8806.

• Stop the stopwatch when 1SI8806 indicates open.

• Record the Stroke Open Test Time.

o Record 1SI8806 MLB status light indication.

o Verify 1SI8806 indicates open on 1PM06J.

• Determine the open test time is within the OPERABLE Limits.

o Check the YES block in the VER OPER section to indicate that 1SI8806 has been verified operable.


Note: Alternate path begins here *5. Determine 1SI8806 open stroke

time is NOT within alert limit and perform valve stroke retest. Cue: When informed as US, acknowledge valve stroke time exceeds alert limit (when informed) Note: Second open stroke time for 1SI8806 during this JPM should be within the alert and operable limits, (i.e. 6.9-11.5 sec.). If the examinee determines a stroke time outside this band then give the following cue. Cue : As US acknowledge need for generating IR and ER-AA-321 to document first open stoke test time.

Perform the following: • Determine the opening

test time is within the operability limits, but not within ALERT for min time limit

o May inform US of problem at this point.

• Re-CLOSES valve. • Simultaneously starts

the stopwatch and opens 1SI8806.

• Stop the stopwatch when 1SI8806 indicates open.

• Record the stroke open retest time.

• Determine the open retest time is within the alert and operability (OPER) Limits.

o Inform US that an IR needs to be generated to the IST coordinator documenting the initial open test results.


6. Acknowledge completion of surveillance.

Inform the Unit 1 US when you have completed the surveillance.


SIM-200 5

(CUE:) THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM. RECORD STOP TIME ___ _____________

SIM-223 6

SIMULATOR SETUP GUIDE: Verify/perform TQ-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST. Establish the conditions of IC-4, mode 5. Close SVAG valve MCC Feed Breakers Copy file “sim223.cae” to s:\opensim\monitor\examadmin (this must be done since the “cae” file will not run properly from a pen drive) Run “sim223setup.cae” from disk Complete items on Simulator Ready for Training Checklist Place simulator in RUN. COMMENTS: Provide copy of 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Ensure stop watch is available

(Final)


Page 25 of 61

ATTACHMENT 10

SURVEILLANCE WO DISPOSITION SHEET (APPLICABLE TO MID-WEST SITES ONLY)

Page 1 of 1

Unit: _1__ Procedure: PMID/RQ: ______

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5____ 123456____ Work Order #: __ N/A

PMID/RQ Title: ____________

UNIT ONE SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEM SVAG VALVE STROKE SURV

PMID/RQ Due Date: _______

N/A________ PMID/RQ Late Date: N/A

Signature/Authorization Approval Review: Name Date Shift Authorization to Start Work: __

Time _Joe Supervisor ______ Today

Work Started __________________________ ________ ________

5 min ago

Work Stopped: __________________________ ________ ________

Supv Review of Work Completion: __________________________ ________ ________

ANI Review of work package: __________________________ ________ ________ Surveillance Found Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO Surveillance Left Within Acceptance Criteria YES NO

(“Work Started” date (above shall beComplete one of the following:

the credit date unless otherwise explained)

Verify Credit Surveillance Credit Date per another WO# Below: If crediting ‘per another WO’, verify credit date

_______

is ‘Work Started’ date of referenced WO.

_________ Complete Sat – Credit Surveillance Complete w/ Portions Unsat – Credit Surveillance No Work Performed – Credit Surveillance Failed – Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance) No Work Performed – Do Not Credit (Surv Due/Late Dates will NOT advance) Comments (partial surveillance) PMT 1SI8806

ADDITIONAL REVIEW OF RESULTS (IF REQUIRED) __ IST Coordinator ____________________ ____________________________________ ________

__ ____________________________________ ________

____________________ ____________________________________ ________ Title Signature Date


Page 25 of 61

1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-5 Revision 5 Continuous Use

1

COMMON TRAIN UNIT ONE SAFETY INJECTION SYSTEM SVAG VALVE STROKE SURVEILLANCE

A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY

The purpose of this procedure is to verify that the Safety Injection System (SVAG) valves stroke within their specified time when tested pursuant to Tech Spec 5.5.8. Testing will be performed after any maintenance affecting valve operability and is applicable for MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4.

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Spec LCOs:

a. 3.4.6 d. 3.4.3 b. 3.4.7 e. 3.5.2 c. 3.4.8 f. 3.5.3

2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: 5.5.8 3. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP RH-6, Placing the RH System in Shutdown Cooling. b. ER-AA-321, Administrative Requirements for Inservice Testing. c. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-3A, Unit One SI System SVAG Valve Stroke

Surveillance. d. 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-6, Common Train SI System Isolation Valve Indication

Surveillance. e. BwOP SI-100, Energizing and De-Energizing SVAG Valve MCCs and SI

Accumulator Outlet Valves in Modes One Through Four 4. Station Drawings: M-61 5. In Service Testing Program Plan for Valves (IST Program). 6. EC350458, LCOAR Entry During Testing of 1SI8804B and 1CV8804A during

surveillance testing.


2

B. 7. AT 562197-03, Regulatory Commitment (Regarding the implementation of administrative controls to ensure that one complete ECCS train can be actuated automatically must be maintained when a logic train is INOPERABLE.)

C. PREREQUISITES

1. Receive permission to perform the surveillance from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performance by having the Data Package Cover sheet signed and dated.

2. This surveillance must be performed in MODE 5, 6 or defueled. A partial

surveillance may be performed in any MODE per the discretion of the Shift Manager or designee.

3. A digital stopwatch will be necessary to perform this surveillance.

4. The applicable Safety Injection Pump must not be operating.

5. Execution of this procedure in Modes 1-4 may require the use of BwOP SI-100.

SVAG valve MCCs will be energized/de-energized per BwOP SI-100.

6. If the Unit is in Mode 4, the 1CV8804A cannot be stroked.

7. If the Unit is in Modes 1-3, both trains of ECCS pumps (SI, CV, and RH) must be operable prior to testing the 1CV8804A.

8. If the Unit is in Modes 1-4, THEN the OPPOSITE train of SSPS and Reactor Trip

Breaker (RTB) train must be OPERABLE prior to performing any actions that renders an ECCS train INOPERABLE in order to ensure the regulatory commitments of License Amendment No. 148 are maintained.

D. PRECAUTIONS

1. VERIFY that all requirements of the applicable RWP have been met. 2. Monitor for potential leak/sneak paths prior to stroking valves. 3. If the Unit is in Modes 1-3, OPENING 1CV8804A renders both trains of ECCS

inoperable due to the potential impact on RH pump ECCS flow. E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. As stated in Tech Spec LCOs 3.4.6, 3.4.7, 3.4.8, 3.4.3, 3.5.2, and 3.5.3. 2. In the event a valve fails to change position, or the stroke time exceeds the

Operability (Oper) Limit during surveillance performance, IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY the Shift Manager or designee to declare the valve inoperable and initiate corrective actions.


3

E. 3. In the event a valve stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the Operability (Oper) Limit, the following should be performed: a. The Shift Manager or designee must be notified b. The valve should be stroked a second time. c. INITIATE an IR for the IST Coordinator to analyze and document the initial

stroke and the cause of the deviation (per ER-AA-321). d. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the

Operability (Oper) Limit, then INITIATE an IR for the IST Coordinator to perform a valve evaluation with a 96 hour time clock per ER-AA-321. N/A if second stroke is within Alert Limits. The valve is considered operable until the evaluation is complete. The Dequip program is an acceptable tracking method.

4. For any valve declared inoperable demonstrate acceptable operation after

required corrective action has been taken but before returning the valve to service.

5. IF ALARA concerns permit, THEN local stroke timing and local examination of

the valve should be performed if Operability Acceptance Criteria (Oper Limit) is not met.

6. Per the requirements of the IST Program, Tech Spec 5.5.8, valve stroke time

limits SHALL be set up which accurately reflect the way the valve strokes. These times, in some instances, may be more limiting than other Tech Spec values. Per the IST Program requirements, Tech Spec 5.5.8, these stroke times SHALL be the basis on which the valve is declared inoperable.

7. If possible, PERFORM 1BwOSR 5.5.8.SI-6 (when required) concurrently with this

procedure to obtain both valve stroke timing data and indication check documentation.

8. EM Department assistance will be required to install jumpers during performance

of this surveillance. (Section F.2) 9. EC 350458 has determined that 1SI8804B should not be opened if the Unit is in

Mode 4 due to the potential impact on the RH train that is operable for LCO 3.5.3. Therefore, the 1SI8804B SHALL not be tested when the Unit is in Mode 4.


4

F. MAIN BODY

0.0 SURVEILLANCE OVERVIEW 0.1 The parallel subsection strings are independent of one another so that they may

be performed in any order or individually if performance of a partial surveillance is required.

0.2 Parallel subsections SHALL NOT be performed simultaneously without the

permission of the Shift Manager or designee. 0.3 Steps for timing the valve strokes (Attachments A and B) are repeated for each

valve being stroked. Record data from the valve strokes in the appropriate blocks of the table.

0.4 The timing valve strokes may be performed in any order to minimize the number

of needless valve strokes. 0.5 The subsections of this surveillance perform the following.

F.1.0 Establish Initial Conditions F.2.0 Stroke test of 1CV8804A, RH Hx 1A PPs Isol Vlv. F.3.0 Stroke test of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv. F.4.0 Stroke test of 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv. F.5.0 Stroke test of 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Lets Isol Vlv. F.6.0 Stroke test of 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv.

START

1.0

2.0 3.0

END

5.0 6.0 4.0


5

F. 1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS

NOTE Initial each step in the space provided adjacent to the procedure step number AFTER the step has been SUCCESSFULLY completed. Person(s) performing VERIFICATIONS SHALL initial in the space provided following the step.

NOTE

"Valve stroke time" is defined as the time duration from the instant of handswitch (or manual relay) actuation until the instant of indication of the valve's intended final position.

_____ 1.1 VERIFY all applicable PREREQUISITES, PRECAUTIONS, and LIMITATIONS

AND ACTIONS are satisfactorily addressed. _____ 1.2 VERIFY the IST Coordinator is listed on the Data Package Cover Sheet to review

the results. _____ 1.3 OBTAIN a digital stopwatch.


6

F. 2.0 STROKE TEST OF 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A TO CV PPS ISOL VLV.

NOTE VERIFY the 1A RH Pump discharge pressure is below 220 psig to prevent lifting the CV pump suction relief while stroking 1CV8804A.

2.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of the following equipment (CIRCLE as

appropriate): _____ 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED _____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED _____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED _____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED _____ 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A & D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J. OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 1RH01PA, 1A RHR Pump

NAC/NAT/PTL

NOTE Verify the 1A RH Pump discharge pressure is below 200 psig to prevent lifting the CV pump suction relief while stroking 1CV8804A.

_____ 2.2 VERIFY/PLACE the Train B Residual Heat Removal System in operation to fulfill

the shutdown cooling function as requested by the Shift Manager (N/A if shutdown cooling is not required).

_____ 2.3 VERIFY/STOP 1RH01PA, 1A Residual Heat Removal Pump.

2.4 IF the Unit is in Modes 5, 6, or DEFUELED, perform the following: _____ a. VERIFY the 1A RH Train is NOT REQUIRED to be OPERABLE.

_____ b. PLACE 1RH01PA C/S in PTL.


7

NOTE

Closing 1RH8701A or 1RH8701B will isolate the "A" Train RH suction relief valve. PRIOR to performing this action in Modes 4, 5, and 6, with the reactor head installed, verify the requirements of Tech Spec 3.4.9.3 are met

F. 2.5 VERIFY/CLOSE the following: _____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.

One of the following: (Mark "N/A" for valve not manipulated) _____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv. _____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv. _____ 1CV8804A, RH Hx 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.

NOTE The jumper PLACED in the next step will simulate the 1SI8811A OPEN and 1SI8813 CLOSED.

_____ 2.6 IF the Unit is in Modes 1, 2, or 3, ENTER LCO 3.5.2 Condition A. _____ 2.7 NOTIFY EMD to PLACE a Jumper between Terminal 3 in the FRONT

compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5 and Terminal 28 in the REAR of compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5.

INSTALLED BY ___________________ DATE/TIME _______/_______ VERIFICATION _____ DATE/TIME _______/_______


8

CAUTION Immediately CLOSE 1CV8804A in the event a safety injection actuates during the stroke test.

CAUTION Prior to opening 1CV8804A, verify there are no flow paths created to allow gravity fill of the RWST or VCT to the cavity. (i.e.; RH Discharge Lines)

F ____ 2.8 IF the Unit is in Modes 1, 2, or 3, ENTER LCO 3.5.2 Condition B.

NOTE 1SI8809A is REQUIRED to remain OPEN and DEENERGIZED in MODES 1-4.

NOTE

Mark Step 2.9 N/A if BOTH RH Trains are REQUIRED to be OPERABLE and it is desired to stroke 1CV8804A with 1SI8809A and 1RH8716A open.

2.9 IF the Unit is in Modes 5, 6, or DEFUELED, perform the following:

_____ a. VERIFY BwOP RH-6, Attachment A or Attachment B is NOT in progress.

_____ b. CLOSE 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J. _____ c. CLOSE 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A and D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.

_____ 2.10 PERFORM an OPEN Valve Stroke Test of 1CV8804A at 1PM05J. (PERFORM in

accordance with steps outlined in Attachment A, and RECORD in Data Table). Valve: 1CV8804A Panel: 1PM05J

Stroke @ Oper Limits ¢

@ Alert Limits ¢

Status Lights

@ Test Time ¢

@ Retest Time ¢

Ver Oper Init

OPEN Max 10.0 Min 7.0 Max N/A

LIT DARK

YES NO

@ All limits and times are in seconds.


9

F. 2.11 RESTORE the following to the "AS FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate):

_____ 1CV8804A, RH HX 1A to CV PPs Isol Vlv.

OPEN/CLOSED VERIFICATION _____

_____ 1SI8809A, RH to Cold Legs A & D Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.


_____ 1RH8716A, RH Discharge Hdr X-Tie Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J.


_____ 1SI8811A, Cnmt Sump Isol Vlv.


_____ 1RH8701A, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.


_____ 1RH8701B, 1A RHR PP Loop Suction Vlv.


_____ 1RH01PA, 1A RHR Pump

NAC/NAT/PTL VERIFICATION _____

_____ 2.12 EXIT LCO 3.5.2 Condition B, if entered due to the performance of this procedure. _____ 2.13 NOTIFY EMD to REMOVE the Jumper that was installed between Terminal 3 in

the FRONT compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5 and Terminal 28 in the REAR of compartment of MCC 131X1 cub J5.

REMOVED BY ___________________ DATE/TIME _______/_______ VERIFICATION _____ DATE/TIME _______/_______

_____ 2.14 EXIT LCO 3.5.2 Condition A, if entered due to the performance of this procedure. _____ 2.15 RETURN the Residual Heat Removal System to operation as requested by the

Shift Manager.


10

F. 3.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8806, SI PPS SUC FROM RWST ISOL VLV.

Valve: 1SI8806 Panel: 1PM06J Stroke @ Oper

Limits ¢ @ Alert Limits ¢

Status Lights

@ Test Time ¢

@ Retest Time ¢

Ver Oper Init

OPEN Max 14.1 Min 7.1 Max 11.8

LIT DARK

YES NO

CLOSE Max 13.8 Min 6.9 Max 11.5

LIT DARK

YES NO

_____ 3.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv,

at 1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate): OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 3.2 PERFORM an OPEN and CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8806 at 1PM06J.

(PERFORM in accordance with steps outlined in Attachments A and B and RECORD in the Data Table).

_____ 3.3 RESTORE 1SI8806, SI PPs Suc from RWST Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS

FOUND" position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate). OPEN/CLOSED

VERIFICATION _____

4.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8813, SI PPS MINIFLOW ISOL VLV.



Status Lights

@ Test Time ¢

@ Retest Time ¢

Ver Oper Init

CLOSE Max 10.0 Min 6.4 Max N/A

LIT DARK

YES NO

_____ 4.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv, at

1PM06J, (Circle as appropriate): OPEN/CLOSED

_____ 4.2 VERIFY/OPEN 1SI8813 (verify OPEN light indication). _____ 4.3 PERFORM a CLOSED Valve Stroke Test of 1SI8813 at 1PM06J. (PERFORM in

accordance with steps outlined in Attachment B and RECORD in the Data Table). _____ 4.4 RESTORE 1SI8813, SI PPs Miniflow Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND"

position or as directed by the Shift Manager or designee (Circle as appropriate). OPEN/CLOSED

VERIFICATION _____



11

F. 5.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8835, SI PP TO COLD LEGS ISOL VLV.



Status Lights

@ Test Time ¢

@ Retest Time ¢

Ver Oper Init


LIT DARK

YES NO


LIT DARK

YES NO

_____ 5.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Legs Isol Vlv, at




_____ 5.3 RESTORE 1SI8835, SI PP to Cold Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND"


VERIFICATION _____

6.0 STROKE TEST OF 1SI8840, RH TO HOT LEGS ISOL VLV.



Status Lights

@ Test Time ¢

@ Retest Time ¢

Ver Oper Init


LIT DARK

YES NO


LIT DARK

YES NO

_____ 6.1 RECORD the "AS FOUND" position of 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv, at




_____ 6.3 RESTORE 1SI8840, RH to Hot Legs Isol Vlv, at 1PM06J, to the "AS FOUND"


VERIFICATION _____



12

G. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

1. Each valve must have been verified to stroke within the Operability (OPER) Limits.

2. Each valve must have been verified in accordance with one of the following:

a. The valve stroke time was within the Alert Limits. b. The valve stroke time exceeded the Alert Limits, but was within the

Operability (Oper) Limits and the following criteria have been met: 1) The valve was stroked a second time. 2) The IST Coordinator has been NOTIFIED to PERFORM an

evaluation to document valve operability per ER-AA-321 and attach it to this surveillance.

3) The second valve stroke time exceeded the Alert Limits, but was

within the Operability (Oper) Limits and the valve is being tracked with a 96 hour clock to complete the ER-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.) (The Dequip program is an acceptable tracking method.)


13

ATTACHMENT A

TIMING VALVES IN THE OPEN DIRECTION 1. VERIFY/CLOSE the valve. 2. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and OPEN the valve with its handswitch. 3. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates OPEN.

¢ 4. RECORD the stroke OPEN TEST TIME.

5. RECORD the MLB status light indication associated with the valve. 6. VERIFY the valve indicates OPEN on the control panel.

¢ 7. VERIFY the OPEN TEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS. (If

not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

8. If the valve is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS, but is not within ALERT LIMITS, PERFORM the following (otherwise N/A): a. VERIFY/CLOSE the valve (May be performed in conjunction with a close

stroke timing step). b. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and OPEN the valve with its

handswitch. c. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates OPEN.

¢ d. RECORD the stroke OPEN RETEST TIME. ¢ e. VERIFY the OPEN RETEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER)

LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

f. Attach ER-AA-321 to this surveillance for the IST Coordinator to evaluate. g. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the

Operability (Oper) Limit, then TRACK the valve with a 96 hour clock to complete the ER-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.)

9. RETURN the valve to the "AS FOUND" position or as designated by the Shift

Manager or designee (May be performed in conjunction with a close stroke timing step).


14

ATTACHMENT B

TIMING VALVES IN THE CLOSE DIRECTION 1. VERIFY/OPEN the valve. 2. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and CLOSE the valve with its

handswitch. 3. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates CLOSED.

¢ 4. RECORD the stroke CLOSED TEST TIME.

5. RECORD the MLB status light indication associated with the valve. 6. VERIFY the valve indicates CLOSED on the control panel.

¢ 7. VERIFY the CLOSED TEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS.

(If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

8. If the valve is within the OPERABILITY (OPER) LIMITS, but is not within ALERT LIMITS, PERFORM the following (otherwise N/A):

a. VERIFY/OPEN the valve (May be performed in conjunction with an open

stroke timing step).

b. SIMULTANEOUSLY START the stopwatch and CLOSE the valve with its handswitch.

c. STOP the stopwatch when the valve indicates CLOSED.

¢ d. RECORD the CLOSED RETEST TIME. ¢ e. VERIFY the CLOSED RETEST TIME is within the OPERABILITY (OPER)

LIMITS. (If not, DECLARE the valve INOPERABLE and initiate appropriate actions.)

f. Attach ER-AA-321 to this surveillance for the IST Coordinator to evaluate. g. If the second stroke time exceeds the Alert Limit, but is less than the

Operability (Oper) Limit, then TRACK the valve with a 96 hour clock to complete the ER-AA-321 evaluation. (Valve is considered operable until evaluation is complete.)

9. RETURN the valve to the "AS FOUND" position or as designated by the Shift

Manager or designee (May be performed in conjunction with an open stroke timing step).

(Final)

SIM-305A 1

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 NSO. 2. Unit 1 has recently returned to full power following power ascension. 3. PRZ B/U HTR GRP A was placed in “ON” to facilitate proper chemical mixing in the pressurizer

during the unit ramp. INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to place the PRZ B/U HTR GRP A to “AUTO” per BwOP RY-11. 2. Inform the US when the evolution is complete.

SIM-305A 2

TASK TITLE: Place PZR B/U Heater Group from “ON” to “AUTO” JPM No.: SIM 305A REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4E.AM-18 K&A No.: 010000A4.02 TASK No.: R-AM-022, Use Operating Department Procedures K&A IMP: 3.6/3.4 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One)

ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 4, 5, 6 JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 20 MINUTES EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. BwOP RY-11, Rev. 2, PRESSURIZER HEATER OPERATION . MATERIALS:

1. BwOP RY-11 TASK STANDARDS:

1. Place PRZ B/U heater group in auto per BwOP RY-11. 2. Recognize inability of variable heaters to maintain pressurizer pressure 3. Re-energize B/U heater group.

TASK CONDITIONS:

SIM-305A 3

1. You are the Unit 1 NSO. 2. Unit 1 has recently returned to full power following power ascension. 3. PRZ B/U HTR GRP A was placed in “ON” to facilitate proper chemical mixing in the pressurizer

during the unit ramp. INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to place the PRZ B/U HTR GRP A to “AUTO” per BwOP RY-11. 2. Inform the US when the evolution is complete.

SIM-305A 4

RECORD START TIME

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable 1. Refer to BwOP RY-11. CUE: Prerequisites, precautions,

limitations and actions are met.

CUE: Another NSO will monitor the

computer points in step 2. Pressurizer Pressure is 2235 psig on lowest computer point.

CUE: If asked, the SM and System

Engineer have concurred with performance of this evolution. (see caution prior to step 3)

• Refer to BwOP RY-11. • Verify all applicable

prerequisites, precautions limitations and actions are addressed.

• Verify Pressurizer

Pressure is approximately 2235 psig from the lowest computer point indication P0480, P0481, P0482, P0483.


2. At 1PM05J, places 1PK-455A in “Manual”

• Depresses “Manual” pushbutton on 1PK-455A.


3. Raise PZR pressure to approx. 2250 psig.

• Perform the following: • Lower 1PK-455A

demand until pressurizer pressure is approx. 2250 psig. (2245-2260)


* 4. Place B/U HTR GRP A to “AUTO” • Perform the following: • Place control switch

for B/U HTR GRP “A” CONTACTOR in “AUTO”


SIM-305A 5

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable *5. Maintain RY pressure in desired

band by manually controlling PZR pressure controller.

CUE: (provide cue after examinee

has stabilized PZR pressure to his/her satisfaction and is waiting for 10 minutes to elapse) 10 minutes has elapsed.

• Perform the following: • Adjust 1PK-455A o Monitor pressurizer

pressure. o Maintains pressure

between 2235 and 2250 psig by adjusting the master PZR pressure controller in manual.

• STABILIZE PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig (2230-2240 psig).

o IF PZR spray valve demand > 0, or variable heater load < 100 amps, THEN take other backup heaters to the AUTO position, by repeating step 3.


* ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS*

SIM-305A 6

NOTE: The auto portion of the master pressurizer pressure controller failed when the controller was placed in manual. The controller output will cause sprays to open and lower PZR pressure. Additionally, lowering controller demand at this point will activate alarm 1-12-C1, PZR PRESS CONT DEV LOW HTRS ON. Critical step successful completion requires stabilizing RCS pressure without allowing pressure to drop below 2185 psig.

*6. Determines PZR Master Pressure Controller does not function in AUTO and maintains manual PZR pressure control.

Place the PZR Master Pressure Controller in AUTO as follows:

o VERIFY/SET the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK-455A, potentiometer to maintain 2235 psig.

• VERIFY/PLACE the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK-455A, in AUTO.

• VERIFY that the PZR Master Pressure Controller, 1PK-455A, is controlling PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig in Auto. Examinee notes that the controller is causing reduced PZR Pressure and places the controller back in manual and stabilizes PZR pressure at 2235 psig (2230-2240 psig).


(CUE:) THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM. RECORD STOP TIME __________ COMMENTS:

SIM-305A 7

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS

JPM NO: SIM-305 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): 100% power steady state. Place B/U HTRS GRP A CONTACTOR to “ON” Insert malfunction below Allow pressurizer pressure to stabilize in auto. MALFUNCTION #’S: Activate CAE sim305A and verify the following: trgset 1 "ZLO1PK455A(2)==1" IMF RX15 (1 0) 2270 to trigger Malfunction RX15 to 2270 psig when the controller is placed in manual. This fails the auto portion of the controller to a higher output value. COMMENTS:

BwOP RY-11 Revision 2 Continuous Use

1

PRESSURIZER HEATER OPERATION A.

STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY

The purpose of this procedure is to provide direction for operating with the least amount of PZR heaters required to maintain pressure and provide adequate mixing of the Pressurizer in MODES 1, 2, and 3.

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Spec LCO 3.4.9 and 3.4.1. 2. Tech Spec Surveillance Requirement: SR 3.4.9.2 3. Station Procedure: BwOL 3.4.9, LCOAR, Reactor Coolant System -Pressurizer. 4. UFSAR 15.0.1.1 Condition 1 Normal Operation and Operational Transients, and

4.4.2.2.1 Departure from Nucleate Boiling Technology

C. PREREQUISITES

1. Receive permission from the Shift Manager or designee prior to performing this procedure.

2. Perform a pre-job briefing with all personnel involved covering the performance

of this procedure and expected results. 3. The Unit is stable at Normal Operating Pressure and Normal Operating

Temperature.

D. PRECAUTIONS

1. At least 2 groups of Pressurizer heaters shall be operable, each with a capacity of at least 150

KW, in Modes 1-3.

2. If PZR pressure starts to drop below 2229 psig on the lowest reading channel/computer point with both PZR spray valves indicating ZERO demand, IMMEDIATELY turn on Back-up Heaters as necessary to avoid PZR pressure decreasing below 2209 psig.


2

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. As stated in Tech Spec LCO 3.4.9 2. Do NOT exceed Pressurizer Pressure of 2260 PSIG. 3. Do NOT allow Pressurizer Pressure to drop below 2209 PSIG. If Pressurizer

Pressure decreases below 2209 PSIG, then LCOAR _BwOL 3.4.1 must be entered.

4. If any primary or secondary manipulations need to be performed, do NOT

proceed with this procedure until all Unit conditions are stable. Do NOT perform any primary or secondary manipulations while this procedure is in progress.


3

CAUTION If any primary or secondary manipulations need to be performed, do NOT proceed with this procedure until all unit conditions are stable. Do NOT perform any primary or secondary manipulations while this procedure is in progress.

F.

MAIN BODY

1. VERIFY Pressurizer pressure is at approximately 2235 psig from the lowest computer point indication P0480, P0481, P0482, P0483.

2. VERIFY the following computer points can be monitored:

PZR Pressure P0480 PZR Pressure P0481 PZR Pressure P0482 PZR Pressure P0483 PZR Spray Water A Inlet Temp T0483 PZR Spray Water B Inlet Temp T0484 PZR Spray Cont 1 F0483 PZR Spray Cont 2 F0484 PZR Steam Temp T0481


4

CAUTION If PZR spray demand is zero, and the variable heaters are drawing current less than 100 amps, cautiously perform the next step with the concurrence of the Shift Manager and System Engineer. If PZR spray demand is zero and the variable heaters are drawing current greater than 100 amps, then Step 3 is N/A.

NOTE

Perform the following step while monitoring PZR pressure. The NSO may make any adjustments to the PZR and/or unit to stabilize parameters.

F. 3. To place a B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTOR in the AUTO position from the ON

position, PERFORM the following: a. VERIFY/PLACE in MANUAL Master PZR Pressure Controller, _PK-455A. b. SLOWLY DECREASE the Master PZR Pressure Controller, _PK 455A,

demand until PZR pressure increases to approximately 2250 psig.

CAUTION If PZR pressure starts to drop below 2229 psig on the lowest reading channel/computer point with both PZR spray valves indicating zero demand, immediately turn on back-up heaters as necessary to avoid PZR pressure decreasing below 2209 psig.

c. PLACE the desired B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTOR C/S into AUTO. d. MAINTAIN pressure between 2235 and 2250 psig by adjusting master

PZR pressure controller _PK-455A as required until variable heaters energize and/or spray valves are closed.


5

CAUTION When a B/U heater is deenergized, it will take some time to dissipate it’s latent heat. PZR pressure should be monitored at least 10 minutes before the pressure is considered stable.

F. 3. e. STABILIZE PZR pressure at approximately 2235 psig.

f. IF PZR spray valve demand is greater than zero, or variable heater load is

less than 100 amps, THEN CONTINUE to take other backup heaters to the AUTO position as directed by Unit Supervisor, by repeating Step 3 for the other desired B/U HTRS GRP_ CONTACTORS (Otherwise proceed to next Step).

4. VERIFY/SET the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK-455A, potentiometer to

maintain 2235 psig. 5. VERIFY/PLACE the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK-455A , in AUTO. 6. VERIFY that the PZR Master Pressure Controller, _PK-455A, is controlling PZR

pressure at approximately 2235 psig in Auto.

(Final)

SIM-410S

Page 1 of 5

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO. 2. Both Units are in Mode 5.

3. Yesterday, a fire in the MCR required implementation of 1/2BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM

INACCESSIBLITY.

4. The fire is now extinguished. Individual systems and components are being evaluated by Engineering and then released to Operations to transfer control to the MCR from the RSDP. Engineering has just released the 1B SX pump for transfer of control back to the MCR.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to coordinate with the NSO at the RSDP for Unit 1 to restore remote control of the 1B SX pump from the MCR per 1BwOA PRI-5 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM step 5.

2. NO switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel for the event.

SIM-410S

Page 2 of 5

TASK TITLE: Restore Remote Control of 1B SX Pump from MCR JPM No.: SIM-410S REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.SX-03 K&A No.: 076000A4.01 TASK No.: R-SX-002/003, Startup/shutdown an Essential K&A IMP: 2.9/2.9 Service Water pump TRAINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) EVALUATOR: DATE: The Trainee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*)4, 6 COMPLETION TIME: 22 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: N/A ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR CONTROL ROOM GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106. MATERIALS:

1. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.

2. 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Rev. 106 Attachment A, REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP.

3. BwAR 1-2-A1 SX PUMP TRIP, Rev. 7. TASK STANDARDS:

1. Restore control of 1B SX pump to MCR. 2. Respond to 1B SX pump trip and start 1A SX pump.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Assist NSO. 2. Both Units are in Mode 5. 3. Yesterday, a fire in the MCR required implementation of 1/2BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM

INACCESSIBLITY.

4. The fire is now extinguished. Individual systems and components are being evaluated by Engineering and then released to Operations to transfer control to the MCR from the RSDP. Engineering has just released the 1B SX pump for transfer of control back to the MCR.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit 1 Unit Supervisor has directed you to coordinate with the NSO at the RSDP for Unit 1 to restore remote control of the 1B SX pump from the MCR per 1BwOA PRI-5 Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM step 5.

2. NO switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel for the event. (Examiner hand trainee copy of Attachments A and D of 1BwOA PRI-5)

SIM-410S

Page 3 of 5

RECORD START TIME:

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable 1. Refer to 1BwOA PRI-5,

CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM. Copy of 1BwOA PRI-5 Attachments A and D provided with initiating cue.

Refer to 1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM INACCESIBILITY, Attachment D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM.


2. Review logs for all local actions taken. CUE: Logs were previously

reviewed and there are no issues related to the pump control transfer.

Review logs for all local actions taken.


3. Restore indications to MCR by

placing Fire Hazards Panel switches to - NORMAL. INITIATING CUE: No

switches were repositioned at the Fire Hazards Panel.

Restore indications to MCR by placing Fire Hazards Panel switches to – NORMAL. • Switches are in normal.


*4. Transfer controls listed in Attachment A back to the MCR one at a time. CUE: When asked, report 1B

SX pump control switch position at RSP is after-start.

CUE: Acknowledge as the

NSO at the remote shutdown panel to place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch for 1B SX pump to remote.

NOTE: Cue the Simulator

operator to initiate the pre-established commands to model placing the LOCAL/REMOTE switch in remote. Shortly after restoring control to the MCR, the 1B SX pump will trip.

Transfer controls listed in Attachment A back to the MCR one at a time. • At 1PM06J places C/S for

1SX01PB in normal after-close.

• Place LOCAL/REMOTE switch at RSP in remote.


SIM-410S

Page 4 of 5

**ALTERNATE PATH START** 5. Respond to 1B SX pump Trip Respond to 1B SX pump trip

using BwAR 1-2-A1 At 1PM06J pulls BwAR


*6. Verify/Align SX flowpath to meet 1A SX pump start interlocks and Start 1A SX Pump

Perform the following at 1PM06J: o Verify/OPEN 1SX001A (is

OPEN). o Verify/OPEN 1SX016A (is

open) • Verify/OPEN 1SX027A

(currently closed) (must be performed, valve is CLOSED, examinee must OPEN the valve)

• Places C/S for 1A SX pump to START and starts pump (initially in standby, RUNNING at completion of action).


7. Verify voltage on ALL 3 phases of 4KV bus > 3990 volts. CUE: ALL 3 phases are > 3990

Volts.

Verify voltage on ALL 3 phases of 4KV bus (141) > 3990 volts.


CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM. RECORD STOP TIME COMMENTS:

SIM-410S

Page 5 of 5


JPM NO: SIM-410S REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): Any mode with SX available. MALFUNCTION #’S:

1. Verify/place the 1B SX pump in service and secure the 1A SX pump. 2. Secure the 1A and 1C RCFCs completely. 3. Swap to 1B Containment Chiller then CLOSE 1SX027A.

Perform Items 4-6 or run CAE SIM-410S SETUP then continue with item 7. 4. Override Annunciator 1-2-E1 SX PUMP LOCAL CONT IMF PB2271 ON. 5. Override the 1B SX pump control switch to Normal After-close IOR ZDI1SX01PB NAC. 6. Override the lights for the 1B SX Pump off using the following:

a. IOR ZLO1SX01PB1 OFF (overrides STOP light to off) b. IOR ZLO1SX01PB3 OFF (overrides RUN light off)

7. Place the physical control switch for 1B SX pump in PTL.

The simulator is now ready for the start of the JPM. You (Simulator Operator) will be required to monitor the progress of the JPM, and when cued by the examiner to perform the NSO action at the RSDP to place the LOCAL/REMOTE switch for the 1B SX pump in REMOTE, perform the following: Perform the following (set on a trigger or run CAE SIM-410S RSDP switch to REMOTE): 8. DMF PB2271 (clears Annunciator 1-2-E1) 9. DOR ZDI1SX01PB (restores control of 1B SX C/S to the physical switch) 10. DOR ZLO1SX01PB1 (restores STOP light indication) 11. DOR ZLO1SX01PB3 (restores RUN light indication) 12. IMF SW01B 3 (trips 1B SX pump with 3 second delay)

COMMENTS:

1. This JPM requires that the Simulator Operator be available to perform action as the NSO at the Unit 1 RSDP in restoring control of the 1B SX pump to the MCR.

REV. 106REV. 106REV. 106 CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITYCONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY 1BwOA1BwOA1BwOAUNIT 1UNIT 1UNIT 1 PRI-5PRI-5PRI-5

A.A. PURPOSEPURPOSE

This procedure provides actions required to take the plant to ColdThis procedure provides actions required to take the plant to ColdShutdown in the event that the Main Control Room must be evacuated.Shutdown in the event that the Main Control Room must be evacuated.

B.B. SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONSSYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS

This procedure is entered from 0BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOMThis procedure is entered from 0BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOMINACCESSIBILITY when the MCR must be evacuated.INACCESSIBILITY when the MCR must be evacuated.

Page 1 of 88Page 1 of 88

STEPSTEP ACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSEACTION/EXPECTED RESPONSE RESPONSE NOT OBTAINEDRESPONSE NOT OBTAINED


(PG 1 OF 1) (PG 1 OF 1)TABLE OF CONTENTSTABLE OF CONTENTS

111 SECTIONSECTIONSECTION: TITLE:: TITLE:: TITLE:

MAIN BODYMAIN BODY ATTACHMENT A (Page 49) REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUPATTACHMENT A (Page 49) REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP ATTACHMENT B (Page 53) LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONSATTACHMENT B (Page 53) LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS ATTACHMENT C (Page 57) INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATICATTACHMENT C (Page 57) INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS JUMPERS ATTACHMENT D (Page 58) RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCRATTACHMENT D (Page 58) RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) ESF MANUAL BLOCK ATTACHMENT E (Page 61) ESF MANUAL BLOCK OROR RESET RESET ATTACHMENT F (Page 78) SI TERMINATIONATTACHMENT F (Page 78) SI TERMINATION ATTACHMENT G (Page 86) *MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SIATTACHMENT G (Page 86) *MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI

-END--END-




111 VERIFY REACTOR TRIPVERIFY REACTOR TRIPVERIFY REACTOR TRIP:::

a.a. Trip ReactorTrip Reactor

b.b. Check reactor trip and bypassCheck reactor trip and bypass b.b. Locally trip the breakers.Locally trip the breakers.breakers - breakers - OPENOPEN::

RTA and BYARTA and BYARTB and BYBRTB and BYB

c.c. Check rod bottom lights - Check rod bottom lights - LITLIT c.c. IFIF TWOTWO OROR more rods are more rods areNOTNOT fully inserted, fully inserted, THENTHEN initiate boration: initiate boration:

1)1) Start the Boric AcidStart the Boric Acidtransfer pump.transfer pump.

2)2) Open the emergencyOpen the emergencyboration valve, 1CV8104.boration valve, 1CV8104.

d.d. Check Neutron Flux - Check Neutron Flux - DROPPPINGDROPPPING

222 CHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATIONCHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATIONCHECK IF IMMEDIATE MCR EVACUATIONREQUIREDREQUIREDREQUIRED:::

a.a. Fire in the MCR requires -Fire in the MCR requires - a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 3. Step 3.IMMEDIATE EVACUATIONIMMEDIATE EVACUATION

b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 7 (Page 5) Step 7 (Page 5)

333 VERIFY TURBINE TRIPPEDVERIFY TURBINE TRIPPEDVERIFY TURBINE TRIPPED::: Manually trip the turbine.Manually trip the turbine.

All Turbine throttle valves - All Turbine throttle valves - IFIF any throttle any throttle ANDAND any anyCLOSEDCLOSED governor valve are open, governor valve are open,

THENTHEN locally trip the turbine locally trip the turbineAll Turbine governor valves - All Turbine governor valves - at the pedestal.at the pedestal.CLOSEDCLOSED

444 VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSESVERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSESVERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES::: Locally restore at least Locally restore at least ONEONE4KV ESF bus per:4KV ESF bus per:

ESF buses - ESF buses - BOTH ENERGIZEDBOTH ENERGIZED::1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV

Bus 141Bus 141 ESF BUS:ESF BUS:Bus 142Bus 142

oo ATTACHMENT B (1A DG)ATTACHMENT B (1A DG)

oo ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)




555 VERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATIONVERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATIONVERIFY FEEDWATER ISOLATION:::

a.a. Feedwater isolation monitorFeedwater isolation monitor a.a. Manually close theManually close thelights - lights - LITLIT valve(s).valve(s).

IFIF any feedwater reg valve any feedwater reg valvewill will NOTNOT close, close, THENTHEN close the associated close the associated1FW006 valve.1FW006 valve.

b.b. Trip Feedwater pumps:Trip Feedwater pumps: b.b. Locally trip the pumps.Locally trip the pumps.

FW pump 1AFW pump 1AFW pump 1BFW pump 1BFW pump 1CFW pump 1CStartup Feedwater pumpStartup Feedwater pump

c.c. Trip HD pumps:Trip HD pumps: c.c. Locally trip the pumps.Locally trip the pumps.

HD pump 1AHD pump 1AHD pump 1BHD pump 1BHD pump 1CHD pump 1C




666 PREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONSPREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONSPREPARE FOR RSP OPERATIONS:::

a.a. Verify letdown divert valveVerify letdown divert valvein - in - AUTOAUTO::

1CV112A1CV112A

b.b. Establish - Establish - 45 GPM LETDOWN45 GPM LETDOWN

c.c. Place PZR PRESSURE CONTROLPlace PZR PRESSURE CONTROLCHANNEL SELECTOR to - CHANNEL SELECTOR to - 457/458457/458

d.d. Place PZR LEVEL CONTROL CHANNELPlace PZR LEVEL CONTROL CHANNELSELECTOR to - SELECTOR to - 461/460461/460

e.e. Pick up radioPick up radio

f.f. Open RCS loop sampleOpen RCS loop samplecontainment isolation valves:containment isolation valves:

1PS9356A (1PM11J)1PS9356A (1PM11J)1PS9356B (1PM11J)1PS9356B (1PM11J)

g.g. Open PZR liquid sampleOpen PZR liquid samplecontainment isolation valves:containment isolation valves:


h.h. Open PZR steam sampleOpen PZR steam samplecontainment isolation valves:containment isolation valves:


777 DISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORMDISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORMDISPATCH OPERATOR TO PERFORM ATTACHMENT B (Page 53) ATTACHMENT B (Page 53) ATTACHMENT B (Page 53)




CAUTIONCAUTIONTaking Taking ANYANY control switch on the control switch on theFire Hazards Panel to the Fire Hazards Panel to the FIREFIREposition:position: Removes Removes ALLALL indications from the indications from the RSP and MCR. RSP and MCR. Feeds a low signal to the Feeds a low signal to the

affected loop. affected loop. May cause ESF actuations if May cause ESF actuations if

another channel is already another channel is already tripped tripped OROR in test. in test.

888 ACTIVATE RSPACTIVATE RSPACTIVATE RSP:::

a.a. Unit Supervisor and NSO go toUnit Supervisor and NSO go toRSPRSP

b.b. Align RSP per ATTACHMENT AAlign RSP per ATTACHMENT A(Page 49)(Page 49)

c.c. Check following indications -Check following indications - c.c. Dispatch an operator toDispatch an operator toAVAILABLEAVAILABLE:: the Fire Hazards Panelthe Fire Hazards Panel

(426' S12 CWA) to align(426' S12 CWA) to alignSource Range NISource Range NI needed instrumentation.needed instrumentation.Intermediate Range NIIntermediate Range NISG pressuresSG pressuresSG wide range levelsSG wide range levelsPZR pressurePZR pressurePZR levelPZR levelRCS hot leg temperaturesRCS hot leg temperaturesRCS cold leg temperaturesRCS cold leg temperatures

d.d. Maintain log of:Maintain log of:

All jumpers installedAll jumpers installed

All local actions takenAll local actions taken




999 MCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIREMCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIREMCR EVACUATED DUE TO FIRE::: GO TOGO TOGO TO STEP 10. STEP 10.

a.a. Open the following breakers:Open the following breakers:

MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)

b.b. Locally check CNMT sumpLocally check CNMT sump b.b. Perform the following:Perform the following:isolation valves - isolation valves - CLOSEDCLOSED::

1)1) Open the followingOpen the following1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA)1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA) breaker(s):breaker(s):1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA)1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA)

oo MCC 131X1A Q1MCC 131X1A Q1(1SI8812A)(1SI8812A)

oo MCC 132X4A M2MCC 132X4A M2(1SI8812B)(1SI8812B)

2)2) Locally close RH pumpLocally close RH pumpsuction from RWSTsuction from RWSTisolation valve(s):isolation valve(s):

oo 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump1SI8812A (1A CS PumpRm)Rm)

oo 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump1SI8812B (1B RH PumpRm)Rm)

101010 CHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELSCHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELSCHECK STEAM GENERATOR LEVELS:::

a.a. AF pumps - AF pumps - AT LEAST ONE RUNNINGAT LEAST ONE RUNNING a.a. Start an AF pump per:Start an AF pump per:

oo BwOP AF-5, MOTOR DRIVENBwOP AF-5, MOTOR DRIVENAUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMPAUXILIARY FEEDWATER PUMP_A STARTUP ON RECIRC_A STARTUP ON RECIRC

oo BwOP AF-7, AUXILIARYBwOP AF-7, AUXILIARYFEEDWATER PUMP _BFEEDWATER PUMP _B(DIESEL) STARTUP ON(DIESEL) STARTUP ONRECIRCRECIRC

b.b. Control AF flow to maintain Control AF flow to maintain ALLALL b.b. Locally fail air andLocally fail air andSG wide range levels - SG wide range levels - BETWEENBETWEEN throttle the 1AF005 flowthrottle the 1AF005 flow65% AND 70%65% AND 70% control valves. control valves.

(364' P10 HANDWHEEL)(364' P10 HANDWHEEL)




111111 CHECK SI STATUSCHECK SI STATUSCHECK SI STATUS:::

a.a. Following equipment - Following equipment - NOT AUTONOT AUTO a.a. Dispatch an operator toDispatch an operator toSTARTEDSTARTED:: verify SI actuation byverify SI actuation by

checking status of checking status of BOTHBOTH SI SICV Pumps - CV Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNINGONLY ONE RUNNING pump breakers.pump breakers.

SX Pumps - SX Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNINGONLY ONE RUNNING IFIF EITHEREITHER SI pump breaker SI pump breakeris CLOSED, is CLOSED,

CC Pumps - CC Pumps - ONLY ONE RUNNINGONLY ONE RUNNING THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO ATTACHMENT F ATTACHMENT F(Page 78).(Page 78).

Diesel Generators - Diesel Generators - NONENONERUNNINGRUNNING

121212 CHECK MODECHECK MODECHECK MODE:::

a.a. Unit in - Unit in - MODE 3MODE 3 a.a. IFIF the unit is in Mode 4, the unit is in Mode 4, THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 31 Step 31(Page 36).(Page 36).

IFIF the unit is in Mode 5 the unit is in Mode 5or 6, or 6, THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 38b Step 38b(Page 45).(Page 45).

b.b. RCS cooldown - RCS cooldown - NOT PREVIOUSLYNOT PREVIOUSLY b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 14 (Page 10). Step 14 (Page 10).IN PROGRESSIN PROGRESS




131313 CHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURECHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURECHECK RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE:::

a.a. Determine Tave using Determine Tave using EITHEREITHER of of a.a. Calculate Tave using theCalculate Tave using thethe following:the following: following:following:

oo Process computer points:Process computer points: oo Saturation temperatureSaturation temperaturefor SG pressure in placefor SG pressure in place

oo T0400 RCL1 1 TAVGT0400 RCL1 1 TAVG of cold leg wide rangeof cold leg wide rangeoo T0420 RCL2 1 TAVGT0420 RCL2 1 TAVG temperature.temperature.oo T0440 RCL3 1 TAVGT0440 RCL3 1 TAVGoo T0460 RCL4 1 TAVGT0460 RCL4 1 TAVG oo RCS hot leg and cold legRCS hot leg and cold leg

temperatures from thetemperatures from the-OR--OR- Fire Hazards Panel.Fire Hazards Panel.

oo Calculate using hot leg andCalculate using hot leg andcold leg wide rangecold leg wide rangetemperaturestemperatures

b.b. RCS Tave - RCS Tave - LESS THAN 561LESS THAN 561 FF b.b. Reduce Tave to Reduce Tave to 561561 FF::

oo Manually open SGManually open SGPORV(s).PORV(s).

-OR--OR-

oo Locally open SG PORV(s)Locally open SG PORV(s)per BwOP MS-6, LOCALper BwOP MS-6, LOCALOPERATION OF THE SGOPERATION OF THE SGPORVs.PORVs.

GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 14 (Next Step 14 (NextPage).Page).

c.c. RCS Tave - RCS Tave - STABLESTABLE c.c. IFIF RCS Tave drops less RCS Tave drops lessthan than 557557 FF, , THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

1)1) Close Close ALLALL MSIVs. MSIVs.

2)2) IFIF cooldown continues, cooldown continues, THENTHEN control AF flow. control AF flow. Maintain flow greaterMaintain flow greaterthan than 500 GPM500 GPM until wide until widerange level is greaterrange level is greaterthan than 59%59% in at least in at least ONEONESG.SG.




************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** The jumpers installed in Step 14aThe jumpers installed in Step 14a **** RNO also defeat the PZR heater levelRNO also defeat the PZR heater level **** interlocks.interlocks. ************************************************************************************

141414 MONITOR PZR PRESSUREMONITOR PZR PRESSUREMONITOR PZR PRESSURE:::

a.a. PZR pressure - PZR pressure - GREATER THANGREATER THAN a.a. Perform the following:Perform the following:2220 PSIG2220 PSIG

1)1) IFIF PZR pressure is PZR pressure isdropping, dropping, THENTHEN trip RCP(s) as trip RCP(s) asrequired to stop PZRrequired to stop PZRpressure drop:pressure drop:

RCP 1DRCP 1DRCP 1CRCP 1CRCP 1BRCP 1BRCP 1ARCP 1A

2)2) IFIF PZR pressure is still PZR pressure is stilldropping, dropping, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

a)a) Place thePlace theLOCAL/REMOTE switchLOCAL/REMOTE switchat the breaker inat the breaker inLOCAL:LOCAL:

1RY8000A (1RY455A)1RY8000A (1RY455A)MCC 131X2B A5MCC 131X2B A51RY8000B (1RY456)1RY8000B (1RY456)MCC 132X2 C4MCC 132X2 C4

b)b) Locally close PORVLocally close PORVblock valves:block valves:

1RY8000A (1RY455A)1RY8000A (1RY455A)1RY8000B (1RY456)1RY8000B (1RY456)

Step continued on next pageStep continued on next page




Step 14 (continued)Step 14 (continued)

3)3) IFIF any PORV block valve any PORV block valvecan can NOTNOT be closed, be closed, THENTHEN locally remove the locally remove thePORV control power fusesPORV control power fusesto fail its associatedto fail its associatedPORV closed:PORV closed:

oo 1RY455A (at 1DC10J):1RY455A (at 1DC10J):

FU-11FU-11FU-12FU-12

oo 1RY456 (at 1DC11J):1RY456 (at 1DC11J):

FU-46FU-46FU-47FU-47

4)4) IFIF a controlled a controlleddepressurization was indepressurization was inprogress, progress, THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 15 Step 15(Page 14).(Page 14).

5)5) Verify PZR backupVerify PZR backupheaters are ON:heaters are ON:

Group AGroup AGroup BGroup B






IFIF ANY backup heater can ANY backup heater canNOTNOT be energized be energized ANDAND PZR PZRlevel is greater thanlevel is greater than17%17%, , THENTHEN jumper the control jumper the controlcontactor to energizecontactor to energizethe heater:the heater:

oo Group A contactor:Group A contactor:

Install jumper inInstall jumper in1PL06J from1PL06J fromTerminal Board 1,Terminal Board 1,point 104, topoint 104, toTerminal Board 1,Terminal Board 1,point 99.point 99.

oo Group B contactor:Group B contactor:

Install jumper inInstall jumper in1PL06J from1PL06J fromTerminal Board 3,Terminal Board 3,point 113, topoint 113, toTerminal Board 3,Terminal Board 3,point 107.point 107.

b.b. PZR pressure - PZR pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN b.b. Perform the following:Perform the following:2260 PSIG2260 PSIG

1)1) Verify PZR heaters areVerify PZR heaters areOFF:OFF:

Group AGroup AGroup BGroup B

2)2) Control pressure withControl pressure withthe PZR aux spray valve:the PZR aux spray valve:

1CV81451CV8145






c.c. PZR pressure - PZR pressure - STABLE AT ORSTABLE AT OR c.c. Manually control PZRManually control PZRTRENDING TO 2235 PSIGTRENDING TO 2235 PSIG pressure with PZR heaterspressure with PZR heaters

and the PZR aux sprayand the PZR aux sprayvalve.valve.

IFIF manual pressure control manual pressure controlis is NOTNOT available, available, THENTHEN perform the following perform the followingwhile continuing with thiswhile continuing with thisprocedure:procedure:

1)1) Fill the PZR solid.Fill the PZR solid.

2)2) Control charging flow toControl charging flow tocontrol PZR pressure.control PZR pressure.




151515 VERIFY RCP SEAL COOLINGVERIFY RCP SEAL COOLINGVERIFY RCP SEAL COOLING:::

a.a. Check following computerCheck following computer a.a. Perform the following:Perform the following:points - points - AVAILABLEAVAILABLE::

1)1) Locally monitor RCP sealLocally monitor RCP sealSeal water outletSeal water outlet injection flow:injection flow:temperature:temperature:

1FIT-0145 (1A RCP)1FIT-0145 (1A RCP)T0181 (RCP 1A)T0181 (RCP 1A) (383' V17)(383' V17)T0182 (RCP 1B)T0182 (RCP 1B) 1FIT-0142 (1D RCP)1FIT-0142 (1D RCP)T0183 (RCP 1C)T0183 (RCP 1C) (383' V17)(383' V17)T0184 (RCP 1D)T0184 (RCP 1D) 1FIT-0144 (1B RCP)1FIT-0144 (1B RCP)

(364' U17)(364' U17)Lower bearing temperature:Lower bearing temperature: 1FIT-0143 (1C RCP)1FIT-0143 (1C RCP)

(364' U17)(364' U17)T0417 (RCP 1A)T0417 (RCP 1A)T0437 (RCP 1B)T0437 (RCP 1B) 2)2) IFIF seal injection flow seal injection flowT0457 (RCP 1C)T0457 (RCP 1C) is indicated on all RCPs,is indicated on all RCPs,T0477 (RCP 1D)T0477 (RCP 1D) THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 15d Step 15d

(Page 17).(Page 17).

3)3) IFIF any RCP with no any RCP with noindicated seal injectionindicated seal injectionflow also has noflow also has noindication of sealindication of sealleakoff leakoff OROR lower radial lower radialbearing temperature, bearing temperature, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

a)a) Trip affected RCP(s).Trip affected RCP(s).

b)b) Close associated RCPClose associated RCPseal injection manualseal injection manualflow control valve:flow control valve:

oo 1CV8369A (391' CWA1CV8369A (391' CWAP-33)P-33)

oo 1CV8369B (387' CWA1CV8369B (387' CWAP-53)P-53)

oo 1CV8369C (387' CWA1CV8369C (387' CWAP-53)P-53)

oo 1CV8369D (391' CWA1CV8369D (391' CWAP-33)P-33)






4)4) Check CC flow to RCPCheck CC flow to RCPthermal barriers betweenthermal barriers between150 GPM150 GPM and and 231 GPM231 GPM::

1FIS-685A (383' U18)1FIS-685A (383' U18)

5)5) IFIF no CC flow is no CC flow isindicated to the RCPindicated to the RCPthermal barriers, thermal barriers, THENTHEN locally close CC locally close CCfrom RCPs thermalfrom RCPs thermalbarrier isolation valve:barrier isolation valve:

1CC6851CC685(395' CWA P-24)(395' CWA P-24)

6)6) IFIF no CC flow is no CC flow isindicated indicated ANDAND a fire has a fire hasoccurred in the plant, occurred in the plant, THENTHEN locally close the locally close thefollowing valve tofollowing valve toprovide double isolationprovide double isolationof CC from the thermalof CC from the thermalbarrier:barrier:

1CC9438 (395' R7)1CC9438 (395' R7)

7)7) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 15c (Next Step 15c (NextPage).Page).






b.b. Check RCP temperatures - Check RCP temperatures - LESSLESS b.b. Perform the following:Perform the following:THAN LIMITSTHAN LIMITS::

1)1) Trip affected RCP(s).Trip affected RCP(s).Seal water outletSeal water outlettemperatures - temperatures - LESS THANLESS THAN 2)2) Close associated RCPClose associated RCP235235 FF seal injection manualseal injection manual

flow control valve:flow control valve:Lower bearing temperatures -Lower bearing temperatures -LESS THAN 225LESS THAN 225 FF oo 1CV8369A (391' CWA1CV8369A (391' CWA

P-33)P-33)oo 1CV8369B (387' CWA1CV8369B (387' CWA

P-53)P-53)oo 1CV8369C (387' CWA1CV8369C (387' CWA

P-53)P-53)oo 1CV8369D (391' CWA1CV8369D (391' CWA

P-33)P-33)

3)3) Locally close CC fromLocally close CC fromRCPs thermal barrierRCPs thermal barrierisolation valve:isolation valve:

1CC6851CC685(395' CWA P-24)(395' CWA P-24)

4)4) IFIF a fire has occured in a fire has occured inthe plant, the plant, THENTHEN locally close the locally close thefollowing valve tofollowing valve toprovide double isolationprovide double isolationof CC from the RCPof CC from the RCPthermal barriers:thermal barriers:

1CC9438 (395' R7)1CC9438 (395' R7)

c.c. Check CENT CHG pumps - Check CENT CHG pumps - AT LEASTAT LEAST c.c. WHENWHEN CENT CHG pump suction CENT CHG pump suctionONE RUNNINGONE RUNNING has been aligned to thehas been aligned to the

RWST, RWST, THENTHEN start one CENT CHG start one CENT CHGpump.pump.






d.d. Throttle 1CV121 to maintainThrottle 1CV121 to maintainseal injection flow - seal injection flow - BETWEENBETWEEN10 GPM AND 15 GPM PER PUMP10 GPM AND 15 GPM PER PUMP(UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ISOLATED)(UNLESS PREVIOUSLY ISOLATED)::

1FIT-0145 (1A RCP) (383' V17)1FIT-0145 (1A RCP) (383' V17)1FIT-0142 (1D RCP) (383' V17)1FIT-0142 (1D RCP) (383' V17)1FIT-0144 (1B RCP) (364' U17)1FIT-0144 (1B RCP) (364' U17)1FIT-0143 (1C RCP) (364' U17)1FIT-0143 (1C RCP) (364' U17)

e.e. Monitor RCP seal status:Monitor RCP seal status:

oo Computer pointsComputer points

oo Local seal injection flowLocal seal injection flow




161616 CHECK PZR LEVELCHECK PZR LEVELCHECK PZR LEVEL:::

a.a. Check charging flow - Check charging flow - INDICATEDINDICATED:: a.a. Establish charging flowEstablish charging flowusing 1CV121.using 1CV121.

oo 1FI-121B (1PL06J)1FI-121B (1PL06J)IFIF manual control of manual control of

oo F0128 Charg Pump Disch HdrF0128 Charg Pump Disch Hdr 1CV121 is 1CV121 is NOTNOT available, available, FlowFlow THENTHEN locally bypass locally bypass

1CV121:1CV121:

1)1) Open the charging headerOpen the charging headerflow control bypassflow control bypassvalve for the running CVvalve for the running CVpump:pump:

oo 1CV8387A (364' U151CV8387A (364' U151A CV pump room)1A CV pump room)

oo 1CV8387B (364' Y141CV8387B (364' Y141B CV pump room)1B CV pump room)

2)2) Close at least Close at least ONEONEcharging header flowcharging header flowcontrol valve manualcontrol valve manualisolation:isolation:

oo 1CV8483A (364' +10'1CV8483A (364' +10'U13 CWA)U13 CWA)

oo 1CV8483B (364' +8'1CV8483B (364' +8'U13 CWA)U13 CWA)

3)3) Throttle the chargingThrottle the chargingheader flow controlheader flow controlbypass valve to maintainbypass valve to maintainPZR level.PZR level.






4)4) IFIF charging flow can charging flow can NOTNOTbe established withbe established with1CV121, 1CV121, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

a)a) Locally throttle openLocally throttle openone CENT CHG pump toone CENT CHG pump tocold leg isolationcold leg isolationvalve:valve:

oo 1SI8801A1SI8801A(395' CWA P-26)(395' CWA P-26)

oo 1SI8801B1SI8801B(395' CWA P-26)(395' CWA P-26)

b)b) IFIF the PZR is the PZR is NOTNOTbeing maintainedbeing maintainedwater solid, water solid, THENTHEN maintain PZR maintain PZRlevel between level between 25%25% and and31%31%..

c)c) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 17 Step 17(Page 23).(Page 23).

b.b. Dispatch an operator to bypassDispatch an operator to bypass1CV182:1CV182:

1)1) Throttle open charging headerThrottle open charging headerflow control bypass valve:flow control bypass valve:

1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA1CV8403 (364' V13 CWAP-71)P-71)

2)2) Close charging header flowClose charging header flowcontrol manual isolationcontrol manual isolationvalves:valves:

1CV8402A (364' V13 CWA1CV8402A (364' V13 CWAP-71)P-71)1CV8402B (364' V13 CWA1CV8402B (364' V13 CWAP-71)P-71)






c.c. Check PZR level - Check PZR level - GREATER THANGREATER THAN c.c. Perform the following:Perform the following:17%17%

1)1) Verify letdown isolationVerify letdown isolationvalves closed:valves closed:

1CV4591CV4591CV4601CV4601CV8149A1CV8149A1CV8149B1CV8149B1CV8149C1CV8149C

2)2) Verify group A and B PZRVerify group A and B PZRheaters are OFF.heaters are OFF.

3)3) Raise charging flow toRaise charging flow torestore PZR level torestore PZR level togreater than greater than 17%17%..

4)4) Continue with Step 17Continue with Step 17(Page 23), (Page 23), WHENWHEN PZR level is PZR level isgreater than greater than 17%17%, , THENTHEN restore letdown per restore letdown perStep 16d RNO.Step 16d RNO.






d.d. Check letdown - Check letdown - IN SERVICEIN SERVICE:: d.d. IFIF normal charging is in normal charging is inservice, service,

oo Letdown orifice isolationLetdown orifice isolation THENTHEN perform the following perform the followingvalves - valves - ANY OPENANY OPEN:: to restore letdown:to restore letdown:

oo 1CV8149A1CV8149A 1)1) Manually open theManually open theoo 1CV8149B1CV8149B letdown isolationletdown isolationoo 1CV8149C1CV8149C valves:valves:

-OR--OR- 1CV4591CV4591CV4601CV460

oo F0134 Ltdn Hx Ltdn OutletF0134 Ltdn Hx Ltdn OutletFlowFlow 2)2) Manually open theManually open the

letdown orificeletdown orificeisolation valve(s) toisolation valve(s) toestablish establish 45 GPM45 GPM::

oo 1CV8149A1CV8149Aoo 1CV8149B1CV8149Boo 1CV8149C1CV8149C

IFIF letdown can letdown can NOTNOT be berestored, restored, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

1)1) Verify CC flow to RCPVerify CC flow to RCPthermal barriers betweenthermal barriers between150 GPM150 GPM and and 231 GPM231 GPM(unless previously(unless previouslyisolated):isolated):

1FIS-685A (383' U18)1FIS-685A (383' U18)

2)2) Locally close chargingLocally close chargingheader flow controlheader flow controlbypass valve:bypass valve:

1CV8403 (364' V13 CWA1CV8403 (364' V13 CWAP-71)P-71)






3)3) Throttle 1CV121 toThrottle 1CV121 tomaintain seal injectionmaintain seal injectionflow between flow between 6 GPM6 GPM and and8 GPM8 GPM per pump to per pump tominimize PZR level riseminimize PZR level rise(unless PZR is being(unless PZR is beingmaintained water solid):maintained water solid):

F0131 RCP 1 SealF0131 RCP 1 SealInjection Wtr FlowInjection Wtr FlowF0129 RCP 2 SealF0129 RCP 2 SealInjection Wtr FlowInjection Wtr FlowF0127 RCP 3 SealF0127 RCP 3 SealInjection Wtr FlowInjection Wtr FlowF0125 RCP 4 SealF0125 RCP 4 SealInjection Wtr FlowInjection Wtr Flow

4)4) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 16f. Step 16f.

e.e. Check letdown orifice isolationCheck letdown orifice isolation e.e. Establish at least Establish at least 45 GPM45 GPMvalves aligned to establish -valves aligned to establish - letdown.letdown.45 GPM LETDOWN45 GPM LETDOWN::

oo 1CV8149A1CV8149Aoo 1CV8149B1CV8149Boo 1CV8149C1CV8149C

f.f. Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEINGBEING f.f. IFIF pressure is being pressure is beingMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROLMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solidcontrolled with a solid

PZR, PZR, THENTHEN maintain the PZR maintain the PZRsolid. solid. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 17 (Next Step 17 (NextPage).Page).

g.g. Adjust 1CV121 to maintain PZRAdjust 1CV121 to maintain PZRlevel - level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%BETWEEN 25% AND 31%




171717 CHECK RCP STATUSCHECK RCP STATUSCHECK RCP STATUS:::

a.a. RCPs - RCPs - AT LEAST ONE RUNNINGAT LEAST ONE RUNNING a.a. Verify naturalVerify naturalcirculation:circulation:

RCS subcoolingRCS subcoolingacceptable per:acceptable per:

oo Computer point X0190,Computer point X0190,Degrees of SubcoolingDegrees of Subcooling

-OR--OR-

oo Iconic DisplayIconic Display

-OR--OR-

oo FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1(Page 48) using:(Page 48) using:

PZR pressurePZR pressure

RCS temperatureRCS temperaturefrom RCS hot legfrom RCS hot legtemperaturetemperatureindicationindication

SG pressure stable SG pressure stable ORORdropping.dropping.

RCS hot leg temperatureRCS hot leg temperaturestable stable OROR dropping. dropping.

Average of ten highestAverage of ten highestcore exit TCs stable core exit TCs stable ORORdropping per:dropping per:

oo Computer point X0113,Computer point X0113,Core Exit T Avg 10Core Exit T Avg 10HottestHottest

-OR--OR-

oo Iconic DisplayIconic Display

RCS cold leg temperatureRCS cold leg temperatureat saturation for SGat saturation for SGpressure.pressure.

IFIF natural circulation can natural circulation canNOTNOT be verified, be verified, THENTHEN dump more steam from dump more steam fromSGs.SGs.




181818 CHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORSCHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORSCHECK IF SOURCE RANGE DETECTORSSHOULD BE ENERGIZEDSHOULD BE ENERGIZEDSHOULD BE ENERGIZED:::

a.a. IR current - IR current - LESS THANLESS THAN a.a. Continue with Step 19Continue with Step 191010-10-10 AMPS AMPS:: (Next Page), (Next Page),

WHENWHEN IR current is less IR current is less1NI-NR003 (N35)1NI-NR003 (N35) than than 1010-10-10 AMPS AMPS, , 1NI-NR004 (N36)1NI-NR004 (N36) THENTHEN do Step 18b. do Step 18b.

b.b. SR detectors - SR detectors - ENERGIZEDENERGIZED:: b.b. Verify P10 Verify P10 ANDAND P6 reset by P6 reset bychecking the followingchecking the following

1NI-NR001 (N31)1NI-NR001 (N31) computer points indicatecomputer points indicate1NI-NR002 (N32)1NI-NR002 (N32) RESET:RESET:

ND0011 Nucl Pwr 1 RE TRND0011 Nucl Pwr 1 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0012 Nucl Pwr 2 RE TRND0012 Nucl Pwr 2 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0013 Nucl Pwr 3 RE TRND0013 Nucl Pwr 3 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0014 Nucl Pwr 4 RE TRND0014 Nucl Pwr 4 RE TR P10 Part Perm P10 Part PermND0032 Interm Rng 1 REND0032 Interm Rng 1 RE TR P6 Part Block TR P6 Part BlockND0033 Interm Rng 2 REND0033 Interm Rng 2 RE TR P6 Part Block TR P6 Part Block

IFIF P10 P10 OROR P6 are P6 are NOTNOT RESET, RESET,THENTHEN reset per reset per ATTACHMENT E (Page 61).ATTACHMENT E (Page 61).




191919 MAINTAIN STABLE PLANTMAINTAIN STABLE PLANTMAINTAIN STABLE PLANTCONDITIONSCONDITIONSCONDITIONS:::

a.a. Check controlled cooldown andCheck controlled cooldown and a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 19c. Step 19c.depressurization - depressurization - NOTNOTPREVIOUSLY IN PROGRESSPREVIOUSLY IN PROGRESS

b.b. Maintain RCS Tave - Maintain RCS Tave - BETWEENBETWEEN550550 F AND 561F AND 561 FF

c.c. Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEINGBEING c.c. IFIF pressure is being pressure is beingMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROLMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solidcontrolled with a solid

PZR, PZR, THENTHEN throttle 1CV121 to throttle 1CV121 tocontrol PZR pressure. control PZR pressure. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 19f. Step 19f.

d.d. Maintain PZR pressure - Maintain PZR pressure - BETWEENBETWEEN2220 PSIG AND 2260 PSIG2220 PSIG AND 2260 PSIG

e.e. Maintain PZR level - Maintain PZR level - BETWEENBETWEEN25% AND 31%25% AND 31%

f.f. Maintain SG wide range levels -Maintain SG wide range levels -BETWEEN 65% AND 70%BETWEEN 65% AND 70%

g.g. Check VCT level - Check VCT level - LESS THAN 95%LESS THAN 95% g.g. Perform the following:Perform the following:

1)1) Verify primary waterVerify primary waterpump 0A and boric acidpump 0A and boric acidtransfer pump are OFF.transfer pump are OFF.

2)2) Contact Contact UNIT 2UNIT 2UNIT 2 to toverify primary waterverify primary waterpump 0B is OFF.pump 0B is OFF.

h.h. Check current RCS boronCheck current RCS boron h.h. Borate until shutdownBorate until shutdownsample - sample - GREATER THAN SHUTDOWNGREATER THAN SHUTDOWN margin requirements aremargin requirements areMARGIN REQUIREMENTMARGIN REQUIREMENT per: per: met.met.

1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWNMARGIN VERIFICATION DURINGMARGIN VERIFICATION DURINGSHUTDOWNSHUTDOWN

i.i. Complete applicable actions ofComplete applicable actions of1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN ANDCOOLDOWNCOOLDOWN






j.j. Dispatch operators to completeDispatch operators to completeshutdown procedures for trippedshutdown procedures for trippedFW pumps and HD pumpsFW pumps and HD pumps

k.k. Dispatch an operator to propDispatch an operator to propopen room door for running CENTopen room door for running CENTCHG pump - CHG pump - IF NECESSARY TOIF NECESSARY TOMAINTAIN ROOM TEMPERATUREMAINTAIN ROOM TEMPERATURENORMALNORMAL

l.l. STA implement Status TreeSTA implement Status Treemonitoring for both unitsmonitoring for both units

202020 CHECK RCFC STATUSCHECK RCFC STATUSCHECK RCFC STATUS:::

a.a. RCFCs - RCFCs - AT LEAST ONE RUNNING INAT LEAST ONE RUNNING IN a.a. Manually start Manually start ONEONE RCFC. RCFC.HI SPEEDHI SPEED

IFIF NONO RCFCs can be RCFCs can bemanually started, manually started, THENTHEN locally start at locally start atleast least ONEONE RCFC: RCFC:

1)1) Verify Verify ALLALL RCFC LO speed RCFC LO speedbreakers are breakers are OPENOPEN::

Bus 131X 4C (1A RCFC)Bus 131X 4C (1A RCFC)Bus 131X 2C (1C RCFC)Bus 131X 2C (1C RCFC)Bus 132X 4C (1B RCFC)Bus 132X 4C (1B RCFC)Bus 132X 2C (1D RCFC)Bus 132X 2C (1D RCFC)

2)2) Close the HI speedClose the HI speedbreaker for at least breaker for at least ONEONERCFC:RCFC:

Bus 131X 5C (1A RCFC)Bus 131X 5C (1A RCFC)Bus 131X 3C (1C RCFC)Bus 131X 3C (1C RCFC)Bus 132X 5C (1B RCFC)Bus 132X 5C (1B RCFC)Bus 132X 3C (1D RCFC)Bus 132X 3C (1D RCFC)

212121 CHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANSCHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANSCHECK CRDM EXHAUST FANS:::

a.a. Exhaust fans - Exhaust fans - RUNNINGRUNNING:: a.a. Manually start the fans.Manually start the fans.

1VP03CA1VP03CA1VP03CB1VP03CB1VP03CC1VP03CC1VP03CD1VP03CD




222222 CHECK CST LEVEL INDICATIONCHECK CST LEVEL INDICATIONCHECK CST LEVEL INDICATION:::

a.a. Check CST level indication -Check CST level indication - a.a. Perform the following:Perform the following:AVAILABLEAVAILABLE::

1)1) Crosstie U-1 CST to U-2Crosstie U-1 CST to U-2oo 0PL01J RADWASTE ROOM0PL01J RADWASTE ROOM CST per BwOP CD-2,CST per BwOP CD-2,oo 0PL11J MUDS0PL11J MUDS RAISING CST LEVEL WITHRAISING CST LEVEL WITH

MAKEUP OR BY CROSSTYINGMAKEUP OR BY CROSSTYING

2)2) Monitor U-1 CST level onMonitor U-1 CST level onU-2 CST levelU-2 CST levelindication:indication:

2LI-CD051B (0PL01J)2LI-CD051B (0PL01J)2LI-CD051C (0PL11J)2LI-CD051C (0PL11J)

232323 DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANTDETERMINE LONG TERM PLANTDETERMINE LONG TERM PLANTSTATUSSTATUSSTATUS:::

a.a. Shift Manager determines:Shift Manager determines: a.a. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 13 Step 13(Page 9).(Page 9).

oo Hot Shutdown - Hot Shutdown - DESIREDDESIRED

oo Cold Shutdown - Cold Shutdown - DESIREDDESIRED




CAUTIONCAUTIONPZR pressure may drop rapidly duringPZR pressure may drop rapidly duringcooldown if the RCS is water solid.cooldown if the RCS is water solid.

************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** SG wide range level is coldSG wide range level is cold **** calibrated. As SG temperaturecalibrated. As SG temperature **** drops, wide range indicated leveldrops, wide range indicated level **** must be raised to maintain actualmust be raised to maintain actual **** level constant.level constant. ************************************************************************************

242424 INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350INITIATE RCS COOLDOWN TO 350 FFF:::

a.a. Check Shutdown Margin -Check Shutdown Margin - a.a. Borate until ShutdownBorate until ShutdownADEQUATE FOR HOT SHUTDOWNADEQUATE FOR HOT SHUTDOWN per: per: Margin requirements areMargin requirements are

met.met.1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN WHENWHEN shutdown margin shutdown marginMARGIN DAILY VERIFICATIONMARGIN DAILY VERIFICATION requirements are met, requirements are met, DURING SHUTDOWN.DURING SHUTDOWN. THENTHEN continue with continue with

Step 24b.Step 24b.

b.b. Stop all but one RCPStop all but one RCP

c.c. Maintain cooldown rate in RCSMaintain cooldown rate in RCScold legs - cold legs - LESS THAN OR EQUALLESS THAN OR EQUALTO 50TO 50 F IN ANY 1 HR PERIODF IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD

d.d. Maintain RCS temperature andMaintain RCS temperature andpressure per 1BwOSR 3.4.3.1,pressure per 1BwOSR 3.4.3.1,RCS PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITRCS PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE LIMITSURVEILLANCESURVEILLANCE

e.e. Dump steam using SG PORVsDump steam using SG PORVs e.e. Locally open SG PORVs perLocally open SG PORVs perBwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATIONBwOP MS-6, LOCAL OPERATIONOF THE SG PORVs.OF THE SG PORVs.

f.f. Control AF flow to maintain Control AF flow to maintain ALLALL f.f. Locally fail air andLocally fail air andSG wide range levels - SG wide range levels - BETWEENBETWEEN throttle the 1AF005 flowthrottle the 1AF005 flow65% AND 70%65% AND 70% control valves. control valves.

(364' P10 HANDWHEELS) (364' P10 HANDWHEELS)




252525 DEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIGDEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIGDEPRESSURIZE RCS TO 1880 PSIG:::

a.a. Turn Group A and B PZRTurn Group A and B PZR a.a. Locally open 480 volt feedLocally open 480 volt feedheaters - heaters - OFFOFF breaker(s):breaker(s):

oo Group A:Group A:

Bus 1RY01EA Cub B2Bus 1RY01EA Cub B2(414' S12 CWA)(414' S12 CWA)

oo Group B:Group B:

Bus 1RY01EB Cub B2Bus 1RY01EB Cub B2(426' S12 CWA)(426' S12 CWA)

b.b. Locally open 480 volt feedLocally open 480 volt feedbreakers to PZR heater breakers to PZR heater groups C and D:groups C and D:

Group C:Group C:

Bus 1RY01EC Cub B2 (426'Bus 1RY01EC Cub B2 (426'S12 CWA)S12 CWA)

Group D:Group D:

Bus 1RY01ED Cub B2 (414'Bus 1RY01ED Cub B2 (414'S12 CWA)S12 CWA)

c.c. Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEINGBEING c.c. Perform the following:Perform the following:MAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROLMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL

1)1) Depressurize by reducingDepressurize by reducingcharging flow.charging flow.

2)2) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 25f. Step 25f.

d.d. Monitor PZR spray waterMonitor PZR spray watertemperature differential pertemperature differential per1BwOS TRM 3.4.c.1, PRESSURIZER1BwOS TRM 3.4.c.1, PRESSURIZERTEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCETEMPERATURE LIMIT SURVEILLANCE






e.e. Depressurize RCS using PZR auxDepressurize RCS using PZR aux e.e. IFIF PZR aux spray can PZR aux spray can NOTNOTspray:spray: be used, be used,

THENTHEN depressurize using a depressurize using a1)1) Check letdown - Check letdown - IN SERVICEIN SERVICE PZR PORV:PZR PORV:

2)2) Check PZR spray waterCheck PZR spray water 1)1) Contact ElectricalContact Electricaldifferential - differential - LESS THANLESS THAN Maintenance to repair aMaintenance to repair a320320 FF:: PZR PORV perPZR PORV per

MA-BR-726-633,MA-BR-726-633,T0126 Regen HX Charg Out TT0126 Regen HX Charg Out T INSTALLATION OFINSTALLATION OFT0481 PZR Steam TT0481 PZR Steam T POST-FIRE COLD SHUTDOWNPOST-FIRE COLD SHUTDOWN

EMERGENCY CABLE.EMERGENCY CABLE.3)3) Open PZR aux spray valve:Open PZR aux spray valve:

2)2) Depressurize using theDepressurize using the1CV81451CV8145 repaired PZR PORV:repaired PZR PORV:

oo 1RY455A1RY455Aoo 1RY4561RY456

f.f. Check RCS pressure - Check RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN f.f. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 25c Step 25c1880 PSIG1880 PSIG (Previous Page).(Previous Page).

g.g. Stop depressurization:Stop depressurization:

oo Close PZR aux spray valveClose PZR aux spray valve

oo Close PZR PORVClose PZR PORV

h.h. Maintain Maintain 1880 PSIG1880 PSIG using: using:

oo PZR heatersPZR heaters

oo PZR aux sprayPZR aux spray

oo Charging flowCharging flow

oo PZR PORVPZR PORV




262626 BLOCK SI ACTUATIONSBLOCK SI ACTUATIONSBLOCK SI ACTUATIONS::: RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 22 (Page 27). Step 22 (Page 27).

a.a. Block following SI signals perBlock following SI signals perATTACHMENT E (Page 61):ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):

PZR LOW PRESS SIPZR LOW PRESS SISTEAMLINE LOW PRESS SISTEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI

b.b. Verify SI signals blocked:Verify SI signals blocked:

Computer points indicate -Computer points indicate -SETSET::

PD0495 PZR LO P SIPD0495 PZR LO P SI TRN A Block TRN A BlockPD0496 PZR LO P SIPD0496 PZR LO P SI TRN B Block TRN B BlockPD0570 SG LO STM LINE PPD0570 SG LO STM LINE P SI TRN 1 BLOK SI TRN 1 BLOKPD0571 SG LO STM LINE PPD0571 SG LO STM LINE P SI TRN 2 BLOK SI TRN 2 BLOK




272727 CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN ANDCONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN ANDCONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN ANDDEPRESSURIZATIONDEPRESSURIZATIONDEPRESSURIZATION:::

a.a. Determine RCS wide rangeDetermine RCS wide range a.a. Locally align pressureLocally align pressurepressure from process computerpressure from process computer indicator 1PI-PS298 (HRSSindicator 1PI-PS298 (HRSSpoints:points: panel 1PS25J) to panel 1PS25J) to EITHEREITHER of of

the following:the following:oo P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IVP0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IVoo P0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIP0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch II oo PZR steam sample line:PZR steam sample line:oo P0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch IP0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch Ioo P0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIIP0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch III a)a) Open PZR steam inletOpen PZR steam inlet

isolation valve:isolation valve:

1PS9350A (HRSS1PS9350A (HRSSpanel 1PS27J)panel 1PS27J)

b)b) Open valve 1.1 (HRSSOpen valve 1.1 (HRSSPanel 1PS25J)Panel 1PS25J)

-OR--OR-

oo PZR liquid sample line:PZR liquid sample line:

a)a) Open PZR liquid inletOpen PZR liquid inletisolation valve:isolation valve:

1PS9350B (HRSS1PS9350B (HRSSpanel 1PS27J)panel 1PS27J)

b)b) Open valve 1.2 (HRSSOpen valve 1.2 (HRSSPanel 1PS25J)Panel 1PS25J)

IFIF NO RCS pressure NO RCS pressureindication is available, indication is available, THENTHEN contact Electrical contact ElectricalMaintenance to repair aMaintenance to repair awide range RCS pressurewide range RCS pressuretransmitter:transmitter:

oo 1PI-4031PI-403oo 1PI-4051PI-405

b.b. Maintain RCS cooldown rate -Maintain RCS cooldown rate -LESS THANLESS THAN5050 F IN ANY 1 HR PERIODF IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD

c.c. Verify Verify ALLALL PZR heaters - PZR heaters - OFFOFF






d.d. Continue depressurization:Continue depressurization:

oo Open PZR aux spray valve:Open PZR aux spray valve:

1CV81451CV8145

oo Open repaired PZR PORVOpen repaired PZR PORV

e.e. Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEINGBEING e.e. IFIF pressure is being pressure is beingMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROLMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solidcontrolled with a solid

PZR, PZR, THENTHEN maintain the PZR maintain the PZRsolid. solid. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 27g. Step 27g.

f.f. Maintain PZR level - Maintain PZR level - BETWEENBETWEEN25% AND 31%25% AND 31%

g.g. Complete applicable actions ofComplete applicable actions of1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN ANDCOOLDOWNCOOLDOWN




CAUTIONCAUTIONSI accumulators should be isolatedSI accumulators should be isolatedwhen RCS pressure is betweenwhen RCS pressure is between1000 PSIG1000 PSIG and and 800 PSIG800 PSIG..

282828 CHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULDCHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULDCHECK IF SI ACCUMULATORS SHOULDBE ISOLATEDBE ISOLATEDBE ISOLATED:::

a.a. RCS pressure - RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN a.a. Continue with Step 29Continue with Step 291000 PSIG1000 PSIG (Next Page), (Next Page),

WHENWHEN RCS pressure is less RCS pressure is lessthan than 1000 PSIG1000 PSIG, , THENTHEN do Steps 28b do Steps 28bthru 28c.thru 28c.

b.b. Close SI accumulator dischargeClose SI accumulator dischargevalves:valves:

Train A (1SI8808A and D):Train A (1SI8808A and D):

a)a) Energize SVAG VALVE MCCEnergize SVAG VALVE MCCper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFESHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT

b)b) Locally close SILocally close SI b)b) Close SI accumulatorClose SI accumulatoraccumulator dischargeaccumulator discharge discharge valve(s):discharge valve(s):valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5,valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5,LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF oo 1SI8808A (412' R151SI8808A (412' R15SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT OMB)OMB)

oo 1SI8808D (412' R91SI8808D (412' R9MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A)MCC 131X2A A3 (1SI8808A) OMB)OMB)(414' S12 CWA)(414' S12 CWA)MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)MCC 131X2A A2 (1SI8808D)(414' S12 CWA)(414' S12 CWA)

Train B (1SI8808B and C):Train B (1SI8808B and C):

a)a) Energize SVAG VALVE MCCEnergize SVAG VALVE MCCper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFESHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT

b)b) Locally close SILocally close SI b)b) Close SI accumulatorClose SI accumulatoraccumulator dischargeaccumulator discharge discharge valve(s):discharge valve(s):valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5,valves per 1BwOA ELEC-5,LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF oo 1SI8808B (412' R181SI8808B (412' R18SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT OMB)OMB)

oo 1SI8808C (412' R51SI8808C (412' R5MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B)MCC 132X2A A3 (1SI8808B) OMB)OMB)(426' S12 CWA)(426' S12 CWA)MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)MCC 132X2A A2 (1SI8808C)(426' S12 CWA)(426' S12 CWA)




292929 CHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSURECHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSURECHECK IF COLD OVERPRESSUREPROTECTION CAN BE PLACED INPROTECTION CAN BE PLACED INPROTECTION CAN BE PLACED INSERVICESERVICESERVICE:::

a.a. RCS temperature - RCS temperature - LESS THANLESS THAN a.a. Continue to cooldown, Continue to cooldown, 380380 FF WHENWHEN RCS temperature is RCS temperature is

less than less than 380380 FF, , THENTHEN do Step 29b. do Step 29b.

b.b. Place Cold OverpressurePlace Cold Overpressure b.b. Refer to Tech Spec 3.4.12.Refer to Tech Spec 3.4.12.Protection in service perProtection in service perATTACHMENT E (Page 61)ATTACHMENT E (Page 61)

303030 CHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BECHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BECHECK IF ECCS PUMPS SHOULD BELOCKED OUTLOCKED OUTLOCKED OUT:::

a.a. RCS temperature - RCS temperature - LESS THANLESS THAN a.a. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 27 Step 27350350 FF (Page 32).(Page 32).

b.b. Locally rack out breakers forLocally rack out breakers forthe following ECCS equipment:the following ECCS equipment:

BOTH SI pumps:BOTH SI pumps:

Bus 141 Cub 3Bus 141 Cub 3(SI Pump 1A)(SI Pump 1A)Bus 142 Cub 3Bus 142 Cub 3(SI Pump 1B)(SI Pump 1B)

Non-running CV pump:Non-running CV pump:

oo Bus 141 Cub 11 Bus 141 Cub 11 (CV pump 1A)(CV pump 1A)

oo Bus 142 Cub 10Bus 142 Cub 10(CV pump 1B)(CV pump 1B)




313131 MAINTAIN STABLE PLANTMAINTAIN STABLE PLANTMAINTAIN STABLE PLANTCONDITIONSCONDITIONSCONDITIONS:::

a.a. RCS average temperature - RCS average temperature - LESSLESSTHAN 350THAN 350 FF

b.b. RCS pressure - RCS pressure - BETWEEN 330 PSIGBETWEEN 330 PSIGAND 360 PSIGAND 360 PSIG

c.c. Check PZR bubble - Check PZR bubble - BEINGBEING c.c. IFIF pressure is being pressure is beingMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROLMAINTAINED FOR PRESSURE CONTROL controlled with a solidcontrolled with a solid

PZR, PZR, THENTHEN throttle 1CV121 to throttle 1CV121 tocontrol PZR pressure. control PZR pressure. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 31e. Step 31e.

d.d. PZR level - PZR level - BETWEEN 25% AND 31%BETWEEN 25% AND 31%

e.e. SG wide range levels - SG wide range levels - BETWEENBETWEEN65% AND 70%65% AND 70%

f.f. Check VCT level - Check VCT level - LESS THAN 95%LESS THAN 95% f.f. Perform the following:Perform the following:

1)1) Verify primary waterVerify primary waterpump 0A and boric acidpump 0A and boric acidtransfer pump are OFF.transfer pump are OFF.

2)2) Contact Contact UNIT 2UNIT 2UNIT 2 to toverify primary waterverify primary waterpump 0B is OFF.pump 0B is OFF.

g.g. Complete applicable actions ofComplete applicable actions of1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN ANDCOOLDOWNCOOLDOWN

323232 DETERMINE LONG TERM PLANTDETERMINE LONG TERM PLANTDETERMINE LONG TERM PLANTSTATUSSTATUSSTATUS:::

a.a. Shift Manager determines - Shift Manager determines - COLDCOLD a.a. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 31. Step 31.SHUTDOWN DESIREDSHUTDOWN DESIRED




************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** Cooldown on SGs is preferable to RHCooldown on SGs is preferable to RH **** cooldown due to lack of RH controlscooldown due to lack of RH controls **** and indications at the RSP.and indications at the RSP. ************************************************************************************

333333 CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200CONTINUE RCS COOLDOWN TO 200 FFF:::

a.a. Check Shutdown Margin -Check Shutdown Margin - a.a. Borate until ShutdownBorate until ShutdownADEQUATE FOR COLD SHUTDOWN perADEQUATE FOR COLD SHUTDOWN per:: Margin requirements areMargin requirements are

met.met.1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN1BwOSR 3.1.1.1-1, SHUTDOWN WHENWHEN shutdown margin shutdown marginMARGIN VERIFICATION DURINGMARGIN VERIFICATION DURING requirements are met, requirements are met, SHUTDOWNSHUTDOWN THENTHEN continue with continue with

Step 33b.Step 33b.

b.b. Maintain RCS pressure - Maintain RCS pressure - BETWEENBETWEEN330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG330 PSIG AND 360 PSIG

c.c. Continue to cool down with SGContinue to cool down with SGPORVsPORVs

d.d. Check RCS temperature -Check RCS temperature - d.d. Align SG blowdown toAlign SG blowdown toDROPPINGDROPPING control RCS temperature.control RCS temperature.

IFIF sufficient cooldown can sufficient cooldown canNOTNOT be obtained with be obtained withSG PORVs SG PORVs ANDAND SG blowdown, SG blowdown, THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 34 (Next Step 34 (NextPage).Page).

e.e. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 32 (Previous Step 32 (PreviousPage)Page)




343434 ALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLINGALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLINGALIGN RH SYSTEM FOR SAMPLING:::

a.a. RH pumps - RH pumps - NONE RUNNING INNONE RUNNING IN a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 38b (Page 45). Step 38b (Page 45).SHUTDOWN COOLING MODESHUTDOWN COOLING MODE

b.b. Refer to BwOP RH-5, RH SYSTEMRefer to BwOP RH-5, RH SYSTEMSTARTUP FOR RECIRC, forSTARTUP FOR RECIRC, forapplicable actionsapplicable actions

c.c. Verify RH hot leg suctionsVerify RH hot leg suctions c.c. Locally verify RH pump hotLocally verify RH pump hotisolated from RCS by checkingisolated from RCS by checking leg suction valves areleg suction valves areRH suction pressure - RH suction pressure - AT LEASTAT LEAST CLOSEDCLOSED::50 PSIG LESS THAN RCS WIDE50 PSIG LESS THAN RCS WIDERANGE PRESSURERANGE PRESSURE:: 1RH8701A1RH8701A

(377' R7 OMB P-68)(377' R7 OMB P-68)RH suction pressure:RH suction pressure: 1RH8702A1RH8702A

(377' R4 OMB P-75)(377' R4 OMB P-75)oo Computer points:Computer points: 1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB1RH8701B (377' R11 IMB

near "D" loop against Rxnear "D" loop against RxP0601 RH Pump 1A SuctP0601 RH Pump 1A Suct cavity wall)cavity wall) Press Press 1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB1RH8702B (377' R3 IMBP0602 RH Pump 1B SuctP0602 RH Pump 1B Suct near "C" loop against Rxnear "C" loop against Rx Press Press cavity wall)cavity wall)

oo Local gauge pressure:Local gauge pressure:

1PI-0601 (RH Pump 1A)1PI-0601 (RH Pump 1A)(346' V16)(346' V16)1PI-0602 (RH Pump 1B)1PI-0602 (RH Pump 1B)(346' W15)(346' W15)

-AND--AND-

RCS wide range pressure:RCS wide range pressure:

oo Computer points:Computer points:

oo P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IVP0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IVoo P0492 RCS Wide RnG Ch IIP0492 RCS Wide RnG Ch II


oo 1PI-402 (at Panel1PI-402 (at Panel1PL66J) (377' R1)1PL66J) (377' R1)

oo 1PI-404 (at Panel1PI-404 (at Panel1PL54J) (377' R11)1PL54J) (377' R11)






d.d. Locally check RH pump miniflowLocally check RH pump miniflow d.d. Locally open any closedLocally open any closedvalves - valves - OPENOPEN:: valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,

LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:of 1A RH HX Room)of 1A RH HX Room)1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner oo MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610)MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610)of 1B RH HX Room)of 1B RH HX Room) oo MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)

e.e. Locally check containmentLocally check containment e.e. Locally close any openLocally close any openrecirc sump valves - recirc sump valves - CLOSEDCLOSED:: valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,

LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA)1SI8811A (364' U13 CWA) SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA)1SI8811B (364' X13 CWA)

oo MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)MCC 131X1 M3 (1SI8811A)oo MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)MCC 132X4 H1 (1SI8811B)

f.f. Locally check RH HX to CV andLocally check RH HX to CV and f.f. Locally close any openLocally close any openSI pumps isolation valves -SI pumps isolation valves - valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,CLOSEDCLOSED:: LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF

SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1CV8804A (364' S13 CWA)1CV8804A (364' S13 CWA)1SI8804B (364' Y13 above 1B1SI8804B (364' Y13 above 1B oo MCC 131X1 J5 (1CV8804A)MCC 131X1 J5 (1CV8804A)SI pump)SI pump) oo MCC 132X4 E1 (1SI8804B)MCC 132X4 E1 (1SI8804B)

g.g. Locally check CS sump suctionLocally check CS sump suction g.g. Locally close any openLocally close any openvalves - valves - CLOSEDCLOSED:: valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,

LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1CS009A (1A CS pump room)1CS009A (1A CS pump room) SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1CS009B (1B CS pump room)1CS009B (1B CS pump room)

oo MCC 131X1 C1 (1CS009A)MCC 131X1 C1 (1CS009A)oo MCC 132X1 G1 (1CS009B)MCC 132X1 G1 (1CS009B)

h.h. Locally check RWST to RH pumpLocally check RWST to RH pump h.h. Locally open any closedLocally open any closedoutlet isolation valves - outlet isolation valves - OPENOPEN:: valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valve using 1BwOA ELEC-5,

LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm)1SI8812A (1A CS Pump Rm) SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm)1SI8812B (1B RH Pump Rm)

oo MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)oo MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)






i.i. Install pneumaticInstall pneumatic i.i. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 32 Step 32jumper/regulator to bypassjumper/regulator to bypass (Page 36).(Page 36).signal converters for selectedsignal converters for selectedRH flow control valves perRH flow control valves perATTACHMENT C (Page 57):ATTACHMENT C (Page 57):

oo RH Pump 1A:RH Pump 1A:

1RH6061RH6061RH6181RH618

oo RH Pump 1B:RH Pump 1B:

1RH6071RH6071RH6191RH619

j.j. Locally close selected RH trainLocally close selected RH train j.j. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 32 Step 32HX flow control valve usingHX flow control valve using (Page 36).(Page 36).pneumatic jumper/regulator:pneumatic jumper/regulator:

oo 1RH6061RH606oo 1RH6071RH607

k.k. Locally verify selected RHLocally verify selected RH k.k. Close valve usingClose valve usingtrain HX bypass flow controltrain HX bypass flow control pneumaticpneumaticvalve - valve - CLOSEDCLOSED:: jumper/regulator.jumper/regulator.

oo 1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RHHX Room)HX Room)

oo 1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RHHX Room)HX Room)

l.l. Separate RH trains:Separate RH trains:

Locally close RH dischargeLocally close RH discharge Open the breaker andOpen the breaker andheader crosstie valve usingheader crosstie valve using separate RH trains byseparate RH trains by1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY locally closing usinglocally closing usingCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN the handwheel:the handwheel:EQUIPMENT, for train EQUIPMENT, for train NOTNOTbeing recirced:being recirced: oo 1RH8716A1RH8716A

(364' +11' S14 CWA)(364' +11' S14 CWA)oo MCC 131X1 F3 (1RH8716A)MCC 131X1 F3 (1RH8716A) oo 1RH8716B1RH8716Boo MCC 132X4 A4 (1RH8716B)MCC 132X4 A4 (1RH8716B) (364' +11' U14 CWA)(364' +11' U14 CWA)




353535 LOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM INLOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM INLOCALLY PLACE RH SYSTEM INOPERATION FOR SAMPLINGOPERATION FOR SAMPLINGOPERATION FOR SAMPLING:::

a.a. Start the selected RH pumpStart the selected RH pump a.a. Continue cooldown on SGContinue cooldown on SGusing 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL PORVs, PORVs, EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFE RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 33 Step 33SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT (Page 37).(Page 37).

b.b. Shift Manager determines recircShift Manager determines recircflowpath:flowpath:

oo Miniflow:Miniflow:

Maintain RH flow - Maintain RH flow - GREATERGREATERTHAN 500 GPMTHAN 500 GPM::

oo F0601 RHR Pump 1AF0601 RHR Pump 1A Minflow Minflow

oo F0602 RHR Pump 1BF0602 RHR Pump 1B Minflow Minflow

-OR--OR-

oo Back to RWST:Back to RWST:

a)a) Obtain key for 1RH8735Obtain key for 1RH8735

b)b) Unlock and open 1RH8735Unlock and open 1RH8735(364' +11' S13)(364' +11' S13)

c)c) Adjust RH bypass flowAdjust RH bypass flowcontrol valve to obtain -control valve to obtain -3300 GPM3300 GPM::

oo 1RH618: 1RH618:

F0626 RHX 1 Coolant F0626 RHX 1 Coolant Disch F Disch F

oo 1RH619:1RH619:

F0627 RHX 2 CoolantF0627 RHX 2 Coolant Disch F Disch F

c.c. Contact Chemistry for boronContact Chemistry for boronsamples:samples:

RCSRCSOperating RH trainOperating RH train

d.d. Locally stop running RH pumpLocally stop running RH pumpper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFESHUTDOWN EQUIPMENTSHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT




363636 ALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWNALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWNALIGN CC SYSTEM FOR SHUTDOWNCOOLINGCOOLINGCOOLING:::

a.a. Align CC for shutdown coolingAlign CC for shutdown coolingper BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CCper BwOP CC-8, ISOLATION OF CCBETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2BETWEEN UNITS 1 AND 2

b.b. Locally open RH HX CC returnLocally open RH HX CC return b.b. Open the breaker andOpen the breaker andvalve for selected RH train pervalve for selected RH train per locally open the valvelocally open the valve1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY using the handwheel:using the handwheel:CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNEQUIPMENT:EQUIPMENT: oo 1CC9412A (364' +10' S17)1CC9412A (364' +10' S17)

oo 1CC9412B (364' +12' V18)1CC9412B (364' +12' V18)oo 1MCC 131X1 K3 (1CC9412A)1MCC 131X1 K3 (1CC9412A)oo 1MCC 132X1 D4 (1CC9412B)1MCC 132X1 D4 (1CC9412B)




373737 ALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FORALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FORALIGN SELECTED RH TRAIN FORSHUTDOWN COOLINGSHUTDOWN COOLINGSHUTDOWN COOLING:::

a.a. Refer to BwOP RH-6, PLACING THERefer to BwOP RH-6, PLACING THERH SYSTEM IN SHUTDOWN COOLING,RH SYSTEM IN SHUTDOWN COOLING,for applicable actionsfor applicable actions

b.b. Check RCS pressure - Check RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN b.b. Depressurize RCS toDepressurize RCS to360 PSIG360 PSIG:: less than less than 360 PSIG360 PSIG..

oo Computer points:Computer points:

oo P0498 RCL System WR LP 3 PP0498 RCL System WR LP 3 Poo P0499 RCL System WR LP 1 PP0499 RCL System WR LP 1 P


oo 1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J)1PI-402 (at Panel 1PL66J)(377' R1)(377' R1)

oo 1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J)1PI-404 (at Panel 1PL54J)(377' R11)(377' R11)

c.c. Close RH pump suction fromClose RH pump suction fromRWST:RWST:

1)1) Energize SVAG VALVE MCC perEnergize SVAG VALVE MCC per1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNEQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT

2)2) Locally close RH pump suctionLocally close RH pump suction 2)2) Open the breaker andOpen the breaker andfrom RWST valve using 1BwOAfrom RWST valve using 1BwOA locally close the valvelocally close the valveELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY using the handwheel:using the handwheel:CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNEQUIPMENT:EQUIPMENT: oo 1SI8812A (1A CS Pump1SI8812A (1A CS Pump

Rm)Rm)oo MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A)MCC 131X1A Q1 (1SI8812A) oo 1SI8812B (1B RH Pump1SI8812B (1B RH Pumpoo MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B)MCC 132X4A M2 (1SI8812B) Rm)Rm)






d.d. Locally open RCS hot leg to RHLocally open RCS hot leg to RH d.d. Open the breaker andOpen the breaker andpump suction valves using 1BwOApump suction valves using 1BwOA locally open the valveslocally open the valvesELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL using the handwheels:using the handwheels:OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

oo RH Pump 1A:RH Pump 1A: oo RH Pump 1A:RH Pump 1A:

MCC 131X2 B1 (1RH8701A)MCC 131X2 B1 (1RH8701A) 1RH8701A1RH8701AMCC 132X2 B3 (1RH8701B)MCC 132X2 B3 (1RH8701B) (377' R7 OMB P-68)(377' R7 OMB P-68)

1RH8701B1RH8701B(377' R11 IMB near(377' R11 IMB near"D" loop against Rx"D" loop against Rxcavity wall)cavity wall)

oo RH Pump 1B:RH Pump 1B: oo RH Pump 1B:RH Pump 1B:

MCC 131X2 B4 (1RH8702A)MCC 131X2 B4 (1RH8702A) 1RH8702A1RH8702AMCC 132X2 B1 (1RH8702B)MCC 132X2 B1 (1RH8702B) (377' R4 OMB P-75)(377' R4 OMB P-75)

1RH8702B (377' R3 IMB1RH8702B (377' R3 IMBnear "C" loop againstnear "C" loop againstRx cavity wall)Rx cavity wall)

e.e. Locally verify RH pump miniflowLocally verify RH pump miniflow e.e. Locally open the valveLocally open the valvevalve - valve - OPENOPEN:: using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL

EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEoo 1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner1RH610 (357' S16 in NW corner SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

of 1A RH HX Room)of 1A RH HX Room)oo 1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner1RH611 (357' V16 in NW corner oo MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610)MCC 131X1 F2 (1RH610)

of 1B RH HX Room)of 1B RH HX Room) oo MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)MCC 132X1 C4 (1RH611)

f.f. Locally verify RH HX flowLocally verify RH HX flow f.f. Close the valve usingClose the valve usingcontrol valve - control valve - CLOSEDCLOSED:: pneumaticpneumatic

jumper/regulator.jumper/regulator.oo 1RH606 (357' +10' S16 1A RH1RH606 (357' +10' S16 1A RH

HX Room)HX Room)oo 1RH607 (357' +10' V16 1B RH1RH607 (357' +10' V16 1B RH

HX Room)HX Room)

g.g. Locally verify RH HX bypassLocally verify RH HX bypass g.g. Close the valve usingClose the valve usingflow control valve - flow control valve - CLOSEDCLOSED:: pneumaticpneumatic

jumper/regulator.jumper/regulator.oo 1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH1RH618 (357' +10' S16 1A RH

HX Room)HX Room)oo 1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH1RH619 (357' +10' V16 1B RH

HX Room)HX Room)




383838 PLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN INPLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN INPLACE SELECTED RH TRAIN INOPERATION FOR COOLDOWNOPERATION FOR COOLDOWNOPERATION FOR COOLDOWN:::

a.a. Locally start RH pump usingLocally start RH pump using a.a. Continue cooldown usingContinue cooldown using1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY SG PORVs, SG PORVs, CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 33 Step 33EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT (Page 37).(Page 37).

b.b. Locally establish cooldown:Locally establish cooldown:

Throttle RH HX bypass flowThrottle RH HX bypass flowcontrol valve using temporarycontrol valve using temporaryregulator to maintain RHregulator to maintain RHflow - flow - GREATER THAN 3300 GPMGREATER THAN 3300 GPM::

oo 1RH618:1RH618:

F0626 RHX 1 Coolant F0626 RHX 1 Coolant Disch F Disch F

oo 1RH619:1RH619:

F0627 RHX 2 CoolantF0627 RHX 2 Coolant Disch F Disch F

Throttle RH HX flow controlThrottle RH HX flow controlvalve using temporaryvalve using temporaryregulator to maintain RCSregulator to maintain RCScooldown rate - cooldown rate - LESS THANLESS THAN5050 F IN ANY 1 HR PERIODF IN ANY 1 HR PERIOD::

oo 1RH6061RH606oo 1RH6071RH607




393939 ESTABLISH RH LETDOWN ATESTABLISH RH LETDOWN ATESTABLISH RH LETDOWN ATDISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGERDISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGERDISCRETION OF SHIFT MANAGER:::

a.a. Refer to BwOP CV-17,Refer to BwOP CV-17,ESTABLISHING AND SECURINGESTABLISHING AND SECURINGNORMAL AND RH LETDOWN FLOW, forNORMAL AND RH LETDOWN FLOW, forapplicable actionsapplicable actions

b.b. Check letdown isolationCheck letdown isolation b.b. Manually open theManually open thevalves - valves - OPENOPEN:: valve(s).valve(s).

1CV4591CV4591CV4601CV460

c.c. Check letdown orifice isolationCheck letdown orifice isolation c.c. Manually open theManually open thevalves - valves - OPENOPEN:: valve(s).valve(s).

1CV8149A1CV8149A1CV8149B1CV8149B1CV8149C1CV8149C

d.d. Obtain key from RSP and locallyObtain key from RSP and locallyopen RH HX outlet to CV letdownopen RH HX outlet to CV letdownHX isolation valve for selectedHX isolation valve for selectedtrain:train:

oo 1RH8734A (364' S14 CWA 25'1RH8734A (364' S14 CWA 25'West of door)West of door)

oo 1RH8734B (364' V14 CWA 6'1RH8734B (364' V14 CWA 6'East of door)East of door)

e.e. Locally open RH to CV letdownLocally open RH to CV letdownvalve using a pneumatic jumper:valve using a pneumatic jumper:

1CV128 (383' U15 1B letdown1CV128 (383' U15 1B letdownHX valve room)HX valve room)






f.f. Locally adjust letdown toLocally adjust letdown tomaintain PZR level:maintain PZR level:

1)1) Monitor charging and letdownMonitor charging and letdownflow on computer points:flow on computer points:

oo F0134 Letdown Hx LetdownF0134 Letdown Hx Letdown Outlet F Outlet F

oo F0128 Charg Pmp DischF0128 Charg Pmp Disch Hdr F Hdr F

2)2) Adjust 1CV131 manual bypassAdjust 1CV131 manual bypassas necessary whenas necessary whenestablishing letdown:establishing letdown:

1CV8409 (364' +29' S131CV8409 (364' +29' S13CWA)CWA)

3)3) Locally isolate 1CV131 byLocally isolate 1CV131 byclosing its manual isolationclosing its manual isolationvalves:valves:

oo 1CV8408A (364' +29' S131CV8408A (364' +29' S13CWA)CWA)

oo 1CV8408B (364' +29' S131CV8408B (364' +29' S13CWA)CWA)

g.g. Locally close letdown lineLocally close letdown linecontainment isolation valve:containment isolation valve:

Fail air to 1CV8152 (364'Fail air to 1CV8152 (364'+27' X13 CWA P-41)+27' X13 CWA P-41)

404040 PROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWNPROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWNPROCEED TO COLD SHUTDOWNCONDITION PERCONDITION PERCONDITION PER:::

1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN ANDCOOLDOWNCOOLDOWN

-END- -END-



200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

RCS Temperature (°F)

RCS Pressure (PSIG)

Normal---

Containment

Conditions:

---Saturation

NOT

ACCEPTABLE

ACCEPTABLE

Normal---

Containment

---Saturation

NOT

ACCEPTABLE

FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1RCS SUBCOOLING MARGINRCS SUBCOOLING MARGINRCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN




ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4)ATTACHMENT A (PG 1 OF 4)REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUPREMOTE SHUTDOWN PANEL LINEUP

CAUTIONCAUTIONSwitching control to LOCAL maySwitching control to LOCAL mayresult in unwanted result in unwanted OROR unexpected unexpectedequipment operation if RSP controlequipment operation if RSP controlswitch positions do switch positions do NOTNOT match matchcurrent equipment conditions.current equipment conditions.

111 PLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCALPLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCALPLACE B TRAIN VC LOCAL/REMOTE SWITCHES IN LOCAL:::

a.a. Dispatch an NSO with the key to 1PL05JA (364' M23) to place theDispatch an NSO with the key to 1PL05JA (364' M23) to place thefollowing switches in - following switches in - LOCALLOCAL::

EPN EQUIPMENT EPN EQUIPMENT 0VC01CB MCR SUPPLY FAN 0B 0VC01CB MCR SUPPLY FAN 0B ** **0VC02CB MCR RETURN FAN 0B 0VC02CB MCR RETURN FAN 0B 0VC02Y, 3Y, 4Y MCR EXH, RETURN 0VC02Y, 3Y, 4Y MCR EXH, RETURN OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS ** **0VC05Y, 6Y, 44Y RECIRC CHAR ABSORB 0VC05Y, 6Y, 44Y RECIRC CHAR ABSORB INLT, OUTLT, BYP DAMPERS INLT, OUTLT, BYP DAMPERS **Check control switch position matches current component **Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position. position.





222 PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04JPLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04JPLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL04J::: EPNEPN EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT 0VC01CA MCR SUPPLY FAN 0A 0VC01CA MCR SUPPLY FAN 0A ** **0VC02CA MCR RETURN FAN 0A 0VC02CA MCR RETURN FAN 0A 0VC18Y, 19Y, 20Y MCR EXH, RETURN, 0VC18Y, 19Y, 20Y MCR EXH, RETURN, OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS OUTSIDE AIR DAMPERS ** **0VC21Y, 22Y, 43Y RECIRC CHAR ABSORB 0VC21Y, 22Y, 43Y RECIRC CHAR ABSORB INLT, OUTLT, BYP DAMPERS INLT, OUTLT, BYP DAMPERS ** **1MS001A & 1MS001D MSIV 1A & 1D CONTROL 1MS001A & 1MS001D MSIV 1A & 1D CONTROL ** **1AF005A SG 1A FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005A SG 1A FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013A SG 1A ISOL VLV 1AF013A SG 1A ISOL VLV 1AF01PA AF PUMP 1A 1AF01PA AF PUMP 1A ** **1AF005B SG 1B FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005B SG 1B FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013B SG 1B ISOL VLV 1AF013B SG 1B ISOL VLV 1CV01PA CENT CHG PUMP 1A 1CV01PA CENT CHG PUMP 1A ** **1AF005C SG 1C FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005C SG 1C FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013C SG 1C ISOL VLV 1AF013C SG 1C ISOL VLV 1VP01CA RCFC 1A HIGH SPEED 1VP01CA RCFC 1A HIGH SPEED ** **1AF005D SG 1D FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005D SG 1D FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013D SG 1D ISOL VLV 1AF013D SG 1D ISOL VLV 1VP01CC RCFC 1C HIGH SPEED 1VP01CC RCFC 1C HIGH SPEED ** **1MS018A SG 1A PORV 1MS018A SG 1A PORV 1CC01PA CC PUMP 1A 1CC01PA CC PUMP 1A ** **1MS018D SG 1D PORV 1MS018D SG 1D PORV 0CC01P CC PUMP 0 0CC01P CC PUMP 0 1SX01PA SX PUMP 1A 1SX01PA SX PUMP 1A **Check control switch position matches current component **Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position. position.





333 PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05JPLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05JPLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL05J::: EPNEPN EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT ** **1MS001B & 1MS001C MSIV 1B & 1C CONTROL 1MS001B & 1MS001C MSIV 1B & 1C CONTROL ** **1AF005E SG 1A FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005E SG 1A FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013E SG 1A ISOL VLV 1AF013E SG 1A ISOL VLV 1AF01PB AF PUMP 1B 1AF01PB AF PUMP 1B ** **1AF005F SG 1B FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005F SG 1B FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013F SG 1B ISOL VLV 1AF013F SG 1B ISOL VLV 1CV01PB CENT CHG PUMP 1B 1CV01PB CENT CHG PUMP 1B ** **1AF005G SG 1C FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005G SG 1C FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013G SG 1C ISOL VLV 1AF013G SG 1C ISOL VLV 1VP01CB RCFC 1B HIGH SPEED 1VP01CB RCFC 1B HIGH SPEED ** **1AF005H SG 1D FLOW CONT VLV 1AF005H SG 1D FLOW CONT VLV 1AF013H SG 1D ISOL VLV 1AF013H SG 1D ISOL VLV 1VP01CD RCFC 1D HIGH SPEED 1VP01CD RCFC 1D HIGH SPEED ** **1MS018B SG 1B PORV 1MS018B SG 1B PORV 1CC01PB CC PUMP 1B 1CC01PB CC PUMP 1B ** **1MS018C SG 1C PORV 1MS018C SG 1C PORV 0CC01P CC PUMP 0 0CC01P CC PUMP 0 1SX01PB SX PUMP 1B 1SX01PB SX PUMP 1B 1CV8104 EMER BORATION VALVE 1CV8104 EMER BORATION VALVE **Check control switch position matches current component **Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position. position.





444 PLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06JPLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06JPLACE REMOTE/LOCAL SWITCHES IN LOCAL AT 1PL06J::: EPNEPN EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT ** **1VP03CA CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1A 1VP03CA CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1A ** **1VP03CB CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1B 1VP03CB CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1B ** **1VP03CC CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1C 1VP03CC CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1C ** **1VP03CD CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1D 1VP03CD CRDM EXHAUST FAN 1D ** **1CV8149A 45 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE 1CV8149A 45 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE ** **1CV460 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 1CV460 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 0PW02PA PW MAKEUP PUMP 0A 0PW02PA PW MAKEUP PUMP 0A ** **1CV8149B 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE 1CV8149B 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE ** **1CV459 LETDOWN LINE ISOL 1CV459 LETDOWN LINE ISOL ** **1AB03P AB XFER PUMP 1 1AB03P AB XFER PUMP 1 ** **1CV8149C 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE 1CV8149C 75 GPM LETDOWN ORIFICE PZR B/U HEATER GRP A CONTACTOR PZR B/U HEATER GRP A CONTACTOR PZR B/U HEATER GRP A BREAKER PZR B/U HEATER GRP A BREAKER ** **1CV8145 PZR AUX SPRAY VALVE 1CV8145 PZR AUX SPRAY VALVE PZR B/U HEATER GRP B CONTACTOR PZR B/U HEATER GRP B CONTACTOR PZR B/U HEATER GRP B BREAKER PZR B/U HEATER GRP B BREAKER **Check control switch position matches current component **Check control switch position matches current component position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position prior to placing Local/Remote switch in the Local position. position.

************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** When in "LOCAL" the charging flowWhen in "LOCAL" the charging flow **** controller provides a direct aircontroller provides a direct air **** signal to the 1CV121 valvesignal to the 1CV121 valve **** controller.controller. ************************************************************************************

555 CONTROL CHARGING FLOWCONTROL CHARGING FLOWCONTROL CHARGING FLOW:::

a.a. Place charging flow control in - Place charging flow control in - LOCALLOCAL::

1FHC-1211FHC-121

666 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 8c (Page 6)

-END--END-




ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 4)ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 4)LOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONSLOCAL OPERATOR ACTIONS

************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** Vital area keys will be available atVital area keys will be available at **** the Remote Shutdown Panel for entrythe Remote Shutdown Panel for entry **** through doors with disabled cardthrough doors with disabled card **** readers.readers. ************************************************************************************

111 LOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEADLOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEADLOCALLY DEENERGIZE REACTOR HEADVENT VALVESVENT VALVESVENT VALVES:::

Open circuit breaker 9 on DCOpen circuit breaker 9 on DCBus 113, Cub ER1:Bus 113, Cub ER1:

1RC014A1RC014A1RC014C1RC014C

Open circuit breaker 10 on DCOpen circuit breaker 10 on DCBus 114, Cub ER1:Bus 114, Cub ER1:

1RC014B1RC014B1RC014D1RC014D

222 LOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIPLOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIPLOCALLY VERIFY BOTH RX TRIP Open the breakers.Open the breakers.BREAKERS OPENBREAKERS OPENBREAKERS OPEN

333 LOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVESLOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVESLOCALLY VERIFY ALL TURBINE VALVESCLOSEDCLOSEDCLOSED:::

Governor valvesGovernor valvesThrottle valvesThrottle valvesReheat stop valvesReheat stop valvesIntercept valvesIntercept valves

444 VERIFY PUMPS TRIPPEDVERIFY PUMPS TRIPPEDVERIFY PUMPS TRIPPED::: Locally open breaker(s).Locally open breaker(s).

HD Pump 1B (Bus 156 Cub 3)HD Pump 1B (Bus 156 Cub 3)FW Pump 1A (Bus 156 Cub 4)FW Pump 1A (Bus 156 Cub 4)HD Pump 1A (Bus 157 Cub 3)HD Pump 1A (Bus 157 Cub 3)HD Pump 1C (Bus 157 Cub 5)HD Pump 1C (Bus 157 Cub 5)Startup FW Pump (Bus 159 Cub 4)Startup FW Pump (Bus 159 Cub 4)





555 VERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPEDVERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPEDVERIFY MAIN GENERATOR TRIPPED:::

a.a. Locally check PMG outputLocally check PMG output a.a. Open the breaker.Open the breaker.breaker - breaker - OPENOPEN::

41 breaker (426' J4 at41 breaker (426' J4 at1MP09E)1MP09E)

666 VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSESVERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSESVERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSES::: Locally restore at least Locally restore at least ONEONE4KV ESF bus per:4KV ESF bus per:

ESF buses - ESF buses - BOTH ENERGIZEDBOTH ENERGIZED::1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV

Bus 141Bus 141 ESF BUS:ESF BUS:Bus 142Bus 142

oo ATTACHMENT B (1A DG)ATTACHMENT B (1A DG)

oo ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)ATTACHMENT D (1B DG)





************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** Bus status report should includeBus status report should include **** breaker positions, control powerbreaker positions, control power **** status, and any dropped relays.status, and any dropped relays. ************************************************************************************

777 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 141EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT:::

a.a. Disable auto start of CS pumpDisable auto start of CS pump1A:1A:

1)1) Pull control power fuses:Pull control power fuses:

Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)

2)2) Check CS pump breaker - Check CS pump breaker - OPENOPEN:: 2)2) Open breakers with aOpen breakers with areach rod.reach rod.

Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)

b.b. Report status of SI pumpReport status of SI pumpbreakers and CS pump breakersbreakers and CS pump breakersto RSP:to RSP:

Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)Bus 141 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1A)Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)Bus 141 Cub 9 (CS pump 1A)

c.c. Report status of Train A 4KVReport status of Train A 4KVbusses and breakers to RSP:busses and breakers to RSP:

Bus 141Bus 141Bus 143Bus 143





888 DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142DETERMINE STATUS OF BUS 142EQUIPMENTEQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT:::

a.a. Disable auto start of CS pumpDisable auto start of CS pump1B:1B:

1)1) Pull control power fuses:Pull control power fuses:

Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)

2)2) Check CS pump breaker - Check CS pump breaker - OPENOPEN:: 2)2) Open breakers with aOpen breakers with areach rod.reach rod.

Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)

b.b. Report status of SI pumpReport status of SI pumpbreakers and CS pump breakersbreakers and CS pump breakersto RSP:to RSP:

Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)Bus 142 Cub 3 (SI Pump 1B)Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)Bus 142 Cub 8 (CS pump 1B)

c.c. Report status of Train B 4KVReport status of Train B 4KVbusses and breakers to RSP:busses and breakers to RSP:

Bus 142Bus 142Bus 144Bus 144

999 VERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPEDVERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPEDVERIFY FW PUMPS TRIPPED::: Locally trip pump(s).Locally trip pump(s).

FW Pump 1BFW Pump 1BFW Pump 1CFW Pump 1C

101010 LOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FWLOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FWLOCALLY VERIFY CLOSED ANY FWVALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIEDVALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIEDVALVES NOT PREVIOUSLY VERIFIEDCLOSED FROM THE MCRCLOSED FROM THE MCRCLOSED FROM THE MCR

111111 REPORT STATUS OF DIESELREPORT STATUS OF DIESELREPORT STATUS OF DIESELGENERATORS TO RSPGENERATORS TO RSPGENERATORS TO RSP:::

1A DG1A DG1B DG1B DG

-END--END-




ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 1)ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 1)INSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERSINSTALLATION OF RH SYSTEM PNEUMATIC JUMPERS

111 INSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERSINSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERSINSTALLATION OF PNEUMATIC JUMPERS:::

a.a. Obtain the selected pneumatic jumper and regulator from the RSPObtain the selected pneumatic jumper and regulator from the RSPcabinet.cabinet.

b.b. Back regulator out to zero.Back regulator out to zero.

c.c. Isolate the instrument air supply to the installed regulator andIsolate the instrument air supply to the installed regulator andI/P converter.I/P converter.

d.d. Connect temporary pneumatic jumper and regulator as shown in theConnect temporary pneumatic jumper and regulator as shown in thedrawing below.drawing below.

e.e. Unisolate instrument air supply and throttle valves as directedUnisolate instrument air supply and throttle valves as directed

-END--END-




ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 3)ATTACHMENT D (PG 1 OF 3)RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOMRESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MAIN CONTROL ROOM

111 VERIFY MCR HABITABLEVERIFY MCR HABITABLEVERIFY MCR HABITABLE::: RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO procedure and step procedure and stepin effect.in effect.

Contact brigade leader toContact brigade leader toverify - verify - INITIATING CONDITIONINITIATING CONDITIONHAS CLEAREDHAS CLEARED

Contact Rad Protection toContact Rad Protection toverify - verify - SAMPLES INDICATE MCRSAMPLES INDICATE MCRATMOSPHERE SAFE FOR HABITATIONATMOSPHERE SAFE FOR HABITATION

222 ESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNINGESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNINGESTABLISH NORMAL MCR MANNING:::

a.a. Phone security shift supervisorPhone security shift supervisorat X-2829 to perform theat X-2829 to perform thefollowing:following:

1)1) Enable card readers into MCR:Enable card readers into MCR:

Door 505Door 505Door 507Door 507Door 511Door 511Door 512Door 512

2)2) Establish Main SecurityEstablish Main SecurityControl Room manningControl Room manning

b.b. Establish normal MCR manningEstablish normal MCR manningusing additional operatorsusing additional operatorswhile maintaining currentwhile maintaining currentremote control station manningremote control station manning

333 ESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEENESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEENESTABLISH COMMUNICATIONS BETWEENMCR AND RSPMCR AND RSPMCR AND RSP

444 EVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOSTEVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOSTEVALUATE MCR DAMAGE AND LOSTCONTROLSCONTROLSCONTROLS:::

a.a. Determine capability of MCR forDetermine capability of MCR forplant controlplant control

b.b. Check MCR indications andCheck MCR indications and b.b. IFIF ANYANY controls are controls arecontrols - controls - ALL AVAILABLEALL AVAILABLE damaged, damaged,

THENTHEN maintain remote maintain remoteoperation of that control.operation of that control.





555 TRANSFER CONTROL TO MCRTRANSFER CONTROL TO MCRTRANSFER CONTROL TO MCR:::

a.a. Review logs for all localReview logs for all localactions takenactions taken

b.b. Restore indications to MCR byRestore indications to MCR byplacing Fire Hazards Panelplacing Fire Hazards Panelswitches to - switches to - NORMALNORMAL

c.c. Transfer controls listed inTransfer controls listed inATTACHMENT A (Page 49) back toATTACHMENT A (Page 49) back toMCR - MCR - ONE AT A TIMEONE AT A TIME::

1)1) Verify MCR switch position -Verify MCR switch position -MATCHES RSP SWITCH POSITIONMATCHES RSP SWITCH POSITION

2)2) Place LOCAL/REMOTE switch atPlace LOCAL/REMOTE switch atRSP in - RSP in - REMOTEREMOTE

d.d. Place charging flow controllerPlace charging flow controllerin - in - REMOTEREMOTE::

1FHC-1211FHC-121

666 CHECK JUMPER STATUSCHECK JUMPER STATUSCHECK JUMPER STATUS:::

a.a. All jumpers - All jumpers - REMOVEDREMOVED a.a. Initiate TempInitiate TempConfiguration ChangeConfiguration Changepaperwork for jumperspaperwork for jumpersremaining installed.remaining installed.

777 LOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEADLOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEADLOCALLY REENERGIZE REACTOR HEADVENT VALVESVENT VALVESVENT VALVES:::

Close circuit breaker 9 on DCClose circuit breaker 9 on DCBus 113, Cub ER1:Bus 113, Cub ER1:

1RC014A1RC014A1RC014C1RC014C

Close circuit breaker 10 on DCClose circuit breaker 10 on DCBus 114, Cub ER1:Bus 114, Cub ER1:

1RC014B1RC014B1RC014D1RC014D





888 VERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPsVERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPsVERIFY APPLICABLE STEPS OF BwGPsCOMPLETEDCOMPLETEDCOMPLETED:::

oo 1BwGP 100-4, POWER DESCENSION1BwGP 100-4, POWER DESCENSION

oo 1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN AND1BwGP 100-5, PLANT SHUTDOWN ANDCOOLDOWNCOOLDOWN

-END--END-




ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 17)ATTACHMENT E (PG 1 OF 17)ESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESETESF MANUAL BLOCK OR RESET

************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** Some jumpers will be left installed,Some jumpers will be left installed, **** while other jumpers are onlywhile other jumpers are only **** momentarily installed. Temporarymomentarily installed. Temporary **** Configuration Change paperworkConfiguration Change paperwork **** should be initiated for any jumpersshould be initiated for any jumpers **** left installed.left installed. ************************************************************************************

111 DETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLEDETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLEDETERMINE IF AEER ACCESSIBLE:::

a.a. Obtain status report:Obtain status report:

oo Fire Brigade LeaderFire Brigade Leaderoo Rad ProtectionRad Protection

b.b. AEER determined to be -AEER determined to be - b.b. Contact the Shift ManagerContact the Shift ManagerACCESSIBLEACCESSIBLE for recovery options. for recovery options.

RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO procedure and procedure andstep effect.step effect.

222 OBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENTOBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENTOBTAIN NECESSARY EQUIPMENT:::

Obtain keys to ESF cabinets:Obtain keys to ESF cabinets:

1PA09J Train A1PA09J Train A1PA10J Train B1PA10J Train B1PA27J Train A1PA27J Train A1PA28J Train B1PA28J Train B

Obtain jumpers from cabinet atObtain jumpers from cabinet atRemote Shutdown Panel or MCR:Remote Shutdown Panel or MCR:

Determine from functions inDetermine from functions inStep 3 (Next Page) the numberStep 3 (Next Page) the numberof jumpers requiredof jumpers required

Obtain necessary safetyObtain necessary safetyequipment:equipment:

oo SCBAsSCBAsoo LightsLightsoo Turnout GearTurnout Gear





333 PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S)PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S)PERFORM BLOCK/RESET FUNCTION(S):::

oo To reset SI, To reset SI, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 4 (Page 64) Step 4 (Page 64)

oo To block PZR LOW PRESSURE SI, To block PZR LOW PRESSURE SI, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 5 (Page 65) Step 5 (Page 65)

oo To block STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI,To block STEAMLINE LOW PRESS SI,GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 6 (Page 66) Step 6 (Page 66)

oo To reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONTo reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONPHASE A, PHASE A, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 7 (Page 67) Step 7 (Page 67)

oo To reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONTo reset CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONPHASE B, PHASE B, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 8 (Page 68) Step 8 (Page 68)

oo To reset CONTAINMENT SPRAYTo reset CONTAINMENT SPRAYactuation, actuation, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 9 (Page 69) Step 9 (Page 69)

oo To reset CONTAINMENT VENTTo reset CONTAINMENT VENTISOLATION, ISOLATION, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 10 (Page 70) Step 10 (Page 70)

oo To reset NUCLEAR AT POWERTo reset NUCLEAR AT POWERPERMISSIVE P10, PERMISSIVE P10, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 11 (Page 71) Step 11 (Page 71)

oo To reset SOURCE RANGETo reset SOURCE RANGEPERMISSIVE P6, PERMISSIVE P6, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 12 (Page 72) Step 12 (Page 72)







oo To place COLD OVERPRESSURETo place COLD OVERPRESSUREPROTECTION in service, PROTECTION in service, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 13 (Page 73) Step 13 (Page 73)

oo To reset SI RECIRC SUMPS, To reset SI RECIRC SUMPS, GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 14 (Page 74) Step 14 (Page 74)

oo To reset CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONS,To reset CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONS,GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 15 (Page 75) Step 15 (Page 75)





444 RESET SIRESET SIRESET SI:::

a.a. Verify Reactor Trip Breakers -Verify Reactor Trip Breakers -OPENOPEN (P4 actuated) (P4 actuated)

b.b. Install jumpers across terminalInstall jumpers across terminalpoints listed below for Trainspoints listed below for TrainsA and/or B:A and/or B:

Install Install TWOTWO jumpers per train jumpers per trainto - to - RESETRESET: :

TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI) (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 (Unlatches slave relays) (Unlatches slave relays)

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB505 points 7 and 8 (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI) (Resets SI Signal, blocks Auto SI) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 Terminal Board TB644 points 9 and 10 (Unlatches slave relays) (Unlatches slave relays)

c.c. Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affected c.c. Perform the following:Perform the following:train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZEDDEENERGIZED::

1)1) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper fromK602K602 TB644.TB644.K603K603K604K604 2)2) Contact Maintenance toContact Maintenance toK608K608 manually reset anymanually reset anyK609K609 energized relays perenergized relays perK610K610 Step 16 (Page 76).Step 16 (Page 76).K611K611K630K630 3)3) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper from

TB505.TB505.

4)4) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 4e. Step 4e.

d.d. Remove jumpersRemove jumpers

e.e. Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manual e.e. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO procedure and procedure andblocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIREDREQUIRED step in effect.step in effect.

f.f. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62) Step 3 (Page 62)





555 BLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SIBLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SIBLOCK PZR LOW PRESSURE SI:::

a.a. Verify RCS pressure - Verify RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN1930 PSIG1930 PSIG

b.b. Install jumper(s) acrossInstall jumper(s) acrossterminal points listed belowterminal points listed belowfor Trains A and/or B:for Trains A and/or B:

Install Install ONEONE jumper per train jumper per trainto - to - BLOCKBLOCK::

TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB509 points 1 and 2

c.c. Check K628 relay(s) - Check K628 relay(s) - ENERGIZEDENERGIZED:: c.c. Notify Maintenance toNotify Maintenance tojumper slave relay K628-6jumper slave relay K628-6

oo Train A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J) to cabinet ground.to cabinet ground.oo Train B (1PA10J)Train B (1PA10J)

d.d. Leave jumper(s) - Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLEDINSTALLED







666 BLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SIBLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SIBLOCK STEAMLINE LOW PRESSURE SI:::

a.a. Verify RCS pressure - Verify RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN1930 PSIG1930 PSIG


Install Install ONEONE jumper per train jumper per trainto - to - BLOCKBLOCK::

TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB509 points 7 and 8

c.c. Check K628 relay(s) - Check K628 relay(s) - ENERGIZEDENERGIZED:: c.c. Notify Maintenance toNotify Maintenance tojumper slave relay K628-6jumper slave relay K628-6

oo Train A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J) to cabinet ground.to cabinet ground.oo Train B (1PA10J)Train B (1PA10J)

d.d. Leave jumper(s) - Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLEDINSTALLED







777 RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONRESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONRESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONPHASE APHASE APHASE A:::

a.a. Install jumpers across terminalInstall jumpers across terminalpoints listed below for Trainspoints listed below for TrainsA and/or B:A and/or B:

Install Install TWOTWO jumpers per train jumpers per trainto - to - RESETRESET::

TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal) (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB504 points 7 and 8 (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal) (Resets Cnmt Phase A signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 Terminal Board TB644 points 3 and 4 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)

b.b. Check relays on affectedCheck relays on affected b.b. Perform the following:Perform the following:train(s) - train(s) - DEENERGIZEDDEENERGIZED::

1)1) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper fromK605K605 TB644.TB644.K606K606K607K607 2)2) Contact Maintenance toContact Maintenance toK612K612 manually reset anymanually reset anyK613K613 energized relays perenergized relays perK614K614 Step 16 (Page 76).Step 16 (Page 76).

3)3) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper fromTB504.TB504.

4)4) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 7d. Step 7d.

c.c. Remove jumpersRemove jumpers

d.d. Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manual d.d. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO procedure and procedure andblocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIREDREQUIRED step in effect.step in effect.

e.e. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62) Step 3 (Page 62)





888 RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONRESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONRESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONPHASE BPHASE BPHASE B:::



TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal) (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB505 points 1 and 2 (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal) (Resets Cnmt Phase B signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB644 points 7 and 8 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)


1)1) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper fromK618K618 TB644.TB644.K626K626

2)2) Contact Maintenance toContact Maintenance tomanually reset anymanually reset anyenergized relays perenergized relays perStep 16 (Page 76).Step 16 (Page 76).










999 RESET CONTAINMENT SPRAYRESET CONTAINMENT SPRAYRESET CONTAINMENT SPRAYACTUATIONACTUATIONACTUATION:::



TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 (Resets Cnmt spray signal) (Resets Cnmt spray signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 Terminal Board TB504 points 4 and 5 (Resets Cnmt spray signal) (Resets Cnmt spray signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 Terminal Board TB644 points 1 and 2 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)













101010 RESET CONTAINMENT VENTRESET CONTAINMENT VENTRESET CONTAINMENT VENTISOLATIONISOLATIONISOLATION:::



TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 (Resets Cnmt Vent signal) (Resets Cnmt Vent signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)

TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Logic Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 Terminal Board TB504 points 10 and 11 (Resets Cnmt Vent signal) (Resets Cnmt Vent signal) Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 Terminal Board TB644 points 5 and 6 (Unlatches slave relay) (Unlatches slave relay)













111111 RESET NUCLEAR AT POWERRESET NUCLEAR AT POWERRESET NUCLEAR AT POWERPERMISSIVE P10PERMISSIVE P10PERMISSIVE P10:::


Install Install SIXSIX jumpers per train jumpers per trainto - to - RESETRESET::

TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%) (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)

TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 5 to TB111 point 3 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB101 point 6 to TB111 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 5 to TB211 point 3 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB201 point 6 to TB211 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 3 to TB311 point 3 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 Terminal Board TB301 point 4 to TB311 point 9 (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%) (Simulates three PR channels less than 10%)

b.b. Check K629 relay(s) -Check K629 relay(s) - b.b. Notify Maintenance to liftNotify Maintenance to liftDEENERGIZEDDEENERGIZED:: and tape slave relayand tape slave relay

K629-6.K629-6.oo Train A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J)oo Train B (1PA10J)Train B (1PA10J)

c.c. Leave jumpers - Leave jumpers - INSTALLEDINSTALLED







121212 RESET SOURCE RANGERESET SOURCE RANGERESET SOURCE RANGEPERMISSIVE P6PERMISSIVE P6PERMISSIVE P6:::

a.a. Check P10 - Check P10 - RESETRESET:: a.a. Reset P10 per Step 11Reset P10 per Step 11(Previous Page).(Previous Page).

Check relay K629 -Check relay K629 -DEENERGIZEDDEENERGIZED

b.b. Lift Lift TWOTWO leads per train to - leads per train to -RESETRESET::

TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J TRAIN A Front of Input Bay - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 (Simulates N35 less than 5x10 (Simulates N35 less than 5x10-11-11 AMPS) AMPS)

TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J TRAIN B Front of Input Bay - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB101 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 Terminal Board TB201 point 1 (Simulates N36 less than 5x10 (Simulates N36 less than 5x10-11-11 AMPS) AMPS)

c.c. Re-land leadsRe-land leads







131313 PLACE COLD OVERPRESSUREPLACE COLD OVERPRESSUREPLACE COLD OVERPRESSUREPROTECTION IN SERVICEPROTECTION IN SERVICEPROTECTION IN SERVICE:::

a.a. Install jumper(s) acrossInstall jumper(s) acrossterminal points listed belowterminal points listed belowfor Trains A and/or B:for Trains A and/or B:

Install Install ONEONE jumper per train jumper per trainto - to - PLACE IN SERVICEPLACE IN SERVICE::

TRAIN A Rear of Cabinet - 1PA27J TRAIN A Rear of Cabinet - 1PA27J Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB916 point 11 Terminal Board TB916 point 11

TRAIN B Rear of Cabinet - 1PA28J TRAIN B Rear of Cabinet - 1PA28J Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB917 point 11 to Terminal Board TB916 point 11 Terminal Board TB916 point 11

b.b. Leave jumper(s) - Leave jumper(s) - INSTALLEDINSTALLED

c.c. Check if other ESF manualCheck if other ESF manual c.c. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO procedure and procedure andblocks or resets - blocks or resets - REQUIREDREQUIRED step in effect.step in effect.

d.d. RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 3 (Page 62) Step 3 (Page 62)





141414 RESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATIONRESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATIONRESET SI RECIRC SUMPS ISOLATIONVALVESVALVESVALVES:::

a.a. Check SI signal - Check SI signal - RESETRESET:: a.a. Reset SI per Step 4Reset SI per Step 4(Page 64).(Page 64).

K602 relay - K602 relay - UNLATCHEDUNLATCHED


Install Install ONEONE jumper per train jumper per trainto - to - RESETRESET::

TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 (1SI8811A will not Auto Open) (1SI8811A will not Auto Open) (1CV8110 will not Auto Close) (1CV8110 will not Auto Close) (Allows breaker 1411 closure) (Allows breaker 1411 closure)

TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 Terminal Board TB656 points 11 and 12 (1SI8811B will not Auto Open) (1SI8811B will not Auto Open) (1CV8111 will not Auto Close) (1CV8111 will not Auto Close) (Allows breaker 1421 closure) (Allows breaker 1421 closure)

c.c. Check K647 relay(s) -Check K647 relay(s) - c.c. Perform the following:Perform the following:DEENERGIZEDDEENERGIZED::

1)1) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper fromoo Train A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J) TB656.TB656.oo Train B (1PA10J)Train B (1PA10J)



d.d. Remove jumper(s)Remove jumper(s)







151515 RESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONRESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONRESET CV MINIFLOW ISOLATIONVALVESVALVESVALVES:::

a.a. Check SI signal- RESET:Check SI signal- RESET: a.a. Reset SI per Step 4Reset SI per Step 4(Page 64).(Page 64).

K602 relay - K602 relay - UNLATCHEDUNLATCHED

b.b. Install Install ONEONE jumper per train jumper per trainto - to - RESETRESET::

TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J TRAIN A Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA09J Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 (1CV8114 will not Auto Close) (1CV8114 will not Auto Close)

TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J TRAIN B Rear of Output Cabinet - 1PA10J Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 Terminal Board TB645 points 7 and 8 (1CV8116 will not Auto Close) (1CV8116 will not Auto Close)

c.c. Check K646 relay(s) -Check K646 relay(s) - c.c. Perform the following:Perform the following:DEENERGIZEDDEENERGIZED::

1)1) Remove jumper fromRemove jumper fromoo Train A (1PA09J)Train A (1PA09J) TB645.TB645.oo Train B (1PA10J)Train B (1PA10J)

2)2) Contact Maintenance toContact Maintenance tomanually reset anymanually reset anyenergized relays perenergized relays perStep 16 (Next Page).Step 16 (Next Page).


d.d. Remove jumper(s)Remove jumper(s)







CAUTIONCAUTIONAn insulated screwdriver and lowAn insulated screwdriver and lowvoltage gloves are required tovoltage gloves are required toperform this step.perform this step.

************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** It is acceptable to remove daisyIt is acceptable to remove daisy **** chained wires in this step.chained wires in this step. ************************************************************************************

161616 PERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLYPERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLYPERFORM THE FOLLOWING TO MANUALLYRESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYSRESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYSRESET SSPS SLAVE RELAYS:::

oo Reset a Westinghouse AR styleReset a Westinghouse AR style(box shaped) relay as follows:(box shaped) relay as follows:

1)1) Tag/Remove wires from twoTag/Remove wires from twoterminals (one will beterminals (one will beenergized) on latch (topmost)energized) on latch (topmost)assemblyassembly

2)2) Remove two screws that fastenRemove two screws that fastenlatch assembly to relaylatch assembly to relay

3)3) Separate latch assembly fromSeparate latch assembly fromrelayrelay

4)4) Manually reset latch fingerManually reset latch fingerto recessed positionto recessed position

5)5) Reinstall latch assemblyReinstall latch assembly

6)6) Verify latch indicator buttonVerify latch indicator buttonis 'Out' (not latched)is 'Out' (not latched)

7)7) Restore wiringRestore wiring

8)8) RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO procedure and step procedure and stepin effect.in effect.







oo Reset a Potter & Brumfield MDRReset a Potter & Brumfield MDR(cylindrical shaped) relay as(cylindrical shaped) relay asfollows:follows:

1)1) Locate armature screw inLocate armature screw incenter of front face of relaycenter of front face of relay

2)2) Check screwdriver slot -Check screwdriver slot - 2)2) Rotate armature screwRotate armature screwALIGNED WITH EMBOSSED MARKSALIGNED WITH EMBOSSED MARKS approximately 30 DEGREESapproximately 30 DEGREESON RELAY (relay alreadyON RELAY (relay already until armature 'snaps'until armature 'snaps'deenergized)deenergized) into position with slotinto position with slot

aligned to embossedaligned to embossedmarks.marks.


oo Reset a Cutler-Hammer relay asReset a Cutler-Hammer relay asfollows:follows:

1)1) Locate the release lever on Locate the release lever on the relaythe relay

2)2) Manually move the releaseManually move the releaselever towards the front oflever towards the front ofthe relaythe relay

3)3) Verify the relay plungerVerify the relay plungermoved inmoved in


-END--END-




ATTACHMENT F (PG 1 OF 8)ATTACHMENT F (PG 1 OF 8)SI TERMINATIONSI TERMINATION

111 CHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SICHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SICHECK FOR LOW PZR PRESSURE SI:::

a.a. PZR pressure - PZR pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 2 (Next Page). Step 2 (Next Page).1829 PSIG1829 PSIG

b.b. PZR pressure - PZR pressure - DROPPINGDROPPING b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 2 (Next Page). Step 2 (Next Page).

c.c. Trip RCP(s) as required to stopTrip RCP(s) as required to stopPZR pressure drop:PZR pressure drop:

oo RCP 1DRCP 1Doo RCP 1CRCP 1Coo RCP 1BRCP 1Boo RCP 1ARCP 1A

d.d. Check if PZR pressure - Check if PZR pressure - STILLSTILL d.d. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 2 (Next Page). Step 2 (Next Page).DROPPINGDROPPING

e.e. Locally isolate PORV 1RY455A atLocally isolate PORV 1RY455A at e.e. Locally remove the controlLocally remove the controlMCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA):MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA): power fuses at 1DC10J topower fuses at 1DC10J to

fail PORV 1RY455A closed:fail PORV 1RY455A closed:1)1) Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTEPlace 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTE

switch in - switch in - LOCALLOCAL FU-11FU-11FU-12FU-12

2)2) Close 1RY8000AClose 1RY8000A

f.f. Check if PZR pressure - Check if PZR pressure - STILLSTILL f.f. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 2 (Next Page). Step 2 (Next Page).DROPPINGDROPPING

g.g. Locally isolate PORV 1RY456 atLocally isolate PORV 1RY456 at g.g. Locally remove the controlLocally remove the controlMCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA):MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA): power fuses at 1DC11J topower fuses at 1DC11J to

fail PORV 1RY456 closed:fail PORV 1RY456 closed:1)1) Place 1RY8000B LOCAL/REMOTEPlace 1RY8000B LOCAL/REMOTE

switch in - switch in - LOCALLOCAL FU-46FU-46FU-47FU-47

2)2) Close 1RY8000BClose 1RY8000B

h.h. Locally restore PORV 1RY455A:Locally restore PORV 1RY455A:

1)1) Place 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTEPlace 1RY8000A LOCAL/REMOTEswitch at MCC 131X2B A5 in -switch at MCC 131X2B A5 in -LOCALLOCAL

2)2) Open 1RY8000AOpen 1RY8000A





222 OBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSUREOBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSUREOBTAIN WIDE RANGE PRESSURE:::

a.a. Determine RCS wide rangeDetermine RCS wide range a.a. Locally align pressureLocally align pressurepressure from process computerpressure from process computer indicator 1PI-PS298 (HRSSindicator 1PI-PS298 (HRSSpoints:points: panel 1PS25J) to panel 1PS25J) to EITHEREITHER of of

the following:the following:oo P0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IVP0491 RCS Wide Rng Ch IVoo P0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIP0492 RCS Wide Rng Ch II oo PZR steam sample line:PZR steam sample line:oo P0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch IP0493 RCS Wide Rng Ch Ioo P0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch IIIP0494 RCS Wide Rng Ch III a)a) Open PZR sampleOpen PZR sample

containment isolationcontainment isolationvalves usingvalves usingpneumatic jumpers:pneumatic jumpers:

1PS9354A (377' +6'1PS9354A (377' +6'R6 OMB P-70)R6 OMB P-70)1PS9354B (364' +13'1PS9354B (364' +13'V13 P-70 CWA)V13 P-70 CWA)

b)b) Open PZR steam inletOpen PZR steam inletisolation valve:isolation valve:

1PS9350A (HRSS1PS9350A (HRSSpanel 1PS27J)panel 1PS27J)

c)c) Open valve 1.1 (HRSSOpen valve 1.1 (HRSSPanel 1PS25J)Panel 1PS25J)

-OR--OR-

oo PZR liquid sample line:PZR liquid sample line:

a)a) Open PZR sampleOpen PZR samplecontainment isolationcontainment isolationvalves usingvalves usingpneumatic jumpers:pneumatic jumpers:

1PS9355A (377' +6'1PS9355A (377' +6'R6 OMB P-70)R6 OMB P-70)1PS9355B (364' +13'1PS9355B (364' +13'V13 P-70 CWA)V13 P-70 CWA)

b)b) Open PZR liquid inletOpen PZR liquid inletisolation valve:isolation valve:

1PS9350B (HRSS1PS9350B (HRSSpanel 1PS27J)panel 1PS27J)

c)c) Open valve 1.2 (HRSSOpen valve 1.2 (HRSSPanel 1PS25J)Panel 1PS25J)





333 CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BECHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BECHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BE WHENWHEN SI termination criteria SI termination criteriaTERMINATEDTERMINATEDTERMINATED::: are met, are met,

THENTHEN terminate SI per Steps 4 terminate SI per Steps 4RCS subcooling - RCS subcooling - ACCEPTABLEACCEPTABLE:: thru 17.thru 17.

oo ICONIC DISPLAYICONIC DISPLAY

-OR--OR-

oo Computer point (greater thanComputer point (greater than3030 FF):):

X0190 Degrees ofX0190 Degrees ofSubcoolingSubcooling

-OR--OR-

oo FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1FIGURE 1BwOA PRI-5-1(Page 48) using:(Page 48) using:

RCS pressure from Step 2RCS pressure from Step 2(Previous Page)(Previous Page)

RCS temperature from RCSRCS temperature from RCShot leg temperaturehot leg temperatureindicationindication

RCS Pressure - RCS Pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISING

PZR level - PZR level - GREATER THAN 4%GREATER THAN 4%

444 CHECK SG LEVELSCHECK SG LEVELSCHECK SG LEVELS:::

a.a. Wide range level - Wide range level - GREATER THANGREATER THAN a.a. Maintain total feed flowMaintain total feed flow59% IN ANY SG59% IN ANY SG greater than greater than 500 GPM500 GPM until until

wide range level iswide range level isgreater than greater than 59%59% in at in atleast least ONEONE SG. SG.

b.b. Maintain wide range level -Maintain wide range level -BETWEEN 65% AND 70%BETWEEN 65% AND 70%





555 RESET ACTUATIONSRESET ACTUATIONSRESET ACTUATIONS:::

a.a. Check fire not occurring inCheck fire not occurring in a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO ATTACHMENT G ATTACHMENT Geither of the following:either of the following: (Page 86).(Page 86).

oo MCRMCR

oo AEERAEER

b.b. Check AEER - Check AEER - ACCESSIBLEACCESSIBLE b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO ATTACHMENT G ATTACHMENT G(Page 86).(Page 86).

c.c. Reset functions perReset functions perATTACHMENT E (Page 61):ATTACHMENT E (Page 61):

SISIContainment isolation Phase AContainment isolation Phase ACV MiniflowsCV MiniflowsSI Recirc SumpsSI Recirc Sumps

d.d. Check automatic SI relay onCheck automatic SI relay on d.d. GO TOGO TOGO TO ATTACHMENT G ATTACHMENT Gaffected train(s) - affected train(s) - UNLATCHEDUNLATCHED:: (Page 86).(Page 86).

K602 (1PA09J/10J)K602 (1PA09J/10J)

666 RESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TORESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TORESTORE INSTRUMENT AIR TOCONTAINMENTCONTAINMENTCONTAINMENT:::

a.a. Dispatch operators to locallyDispatch operators to locallyopen Instrument Air containmentopen Instrument Air containmentisolation valves usingisolation valves usingpneumatic jumpers:pneumatic jumpers:

1IA065 (391' CWA P-39)1IA065 (391' CWA P-39)1IA066 (377' +12' R5 OMB1IA066 (377' +12' R5 OMBP-39)P-39)

777 REALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPSREALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPSREALIGN CV SYSTEM PUMPS:::

a.a. Stop all but Stop all but ONEONE CV pump and CV pump andplace in standbyplace in standby





888 ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOWESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOWESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW:::

a.a. Locally check CV pumpLocally check CV pump a.a. Perform the following:Perform the following:miniflow - miniflow - GREATER THAN 60 GPMGREATER THAN 60 GPM::

oo Open motor operatedOpen motor operated1FI-CV048 (346' Q12)1FI-CV048 (346' Q12) miniflow valves perminiflow valves per

1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALEMERGENCY CONTROL OFEMERGENCY CONTROL OFSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

oo MCC 131X1 M1MCC 131X1 M1(1CV8110):(1CV8110):

1CV8110 (364' S131CV8110 (364' S13CWA)CWA)

oo MCC 132X4 C4MCC 132X4 C4(1CV8111):(1CV8111):

1CV8111 (364' S131CV8111 (364' S13CWA)CWA)

oo Open the solenoid valvesOpen the solenoid valvesby pulling fuses:by pulling fuses:

oo Fuses 61 and 62 atFuses 61 and 62 at1PA27J (1CV8114)1PA27J (1CV8114)


999 ESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGINGESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGINGESTABLISH NORMAL CHARGING:::

a.a. Throttle 1CV121 to - Throttle 1CV121 to - 5% OPEN5% OPEN

b.b. Locally open charging lineLocally open charging line b.b. Open the breaker(s) andOpen the breaker(s) andcontainment isolation valvescontainment isolation valves locally open valve(s)locally open valve(s)per 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALper 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL using the handwheel:using the handwheel:EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFESHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: oo 1CV8105 (379' CWA P-71)1CV8105 (379' CWA P-71)

oo 1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71)1CV8106 (379' CWA P-71)1CV8105 (MCC 132X4 C3)1CV8105 (MCC 132X4 C3)1CV8106 (MCC 131X1 K1)1CV8106 (MCC 131X1 K1)





101010 ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTIONISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTIONISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION:::

a.a. Locally close charging pumps toLocally close charging pumps to a.a. Open the breaker andOpen the breaker andcold leg injection isolationcold leg injection isolation locally close the valve(s)locally close the valve(s)valves using 1BwOA ELEC-5,valves using 1BwOA ELEC-5, using the handwheel:using the handwheel:LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFELOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFESHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: oo 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)

oo 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4)1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4)1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4)1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4)

111111 CONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAINCONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAINCONTROL CHARGING FLOW TO MAINTAIN IFIF 1CV121 can 1CV121 can NOTNOT be bePZR LEVELPZR LEVELPZR LEVEL::: controlled, controlled,

THENTHEN perform the following: perform the following:Throttle 1CV121 to maintain PZRThrottle 1CV121 to maintain PZRlevel - level - BETWEEN 25% and 31%BETWEEN 25% and 31% a.a. Locally throttle open oneLocally throttle open one

CENT CHG pump to cold legCENT CHG pump to cold legisolation valve toisolation valve tomaintain PZR level:maintain PZR level:

oo 1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)oo 1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)

b.b. Cycle PZR heater groups ACycle PZR heater groups Aand B to maintain pressureand B to maintain pressurestable.stable.

c.c. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 14 (Page 85). Step 14 (Page 85).

121212 CONTROL PZR PRESSURECONTROL PZR PRESSURECONTROL PZR PRESSURE:::

Cycle PZR heater groups A and BCycle PZR heater groups A and Bto maintain pressure - to maintain pressure - STABLESTABLE





131313 CHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BECHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BECHECK IF LETDOWN CAN BEESTABLISHEDESTABLISHEDESTABLISHED:::

a.a. PZR level - PZR level - GREATER THAN 17%GREATER THAN 17% a.a. Continue with Step 14Continue with Step 14(Next Page), (Next Page), WHENWHEN PZR level is greater PZR level is greaterthan than 17%17%, , THENTHEN do Step 13b. do Step 13b.

b.b. Establish letdown:Establish letdown: b.b. IFIF letdown can letdown can NOTNOT be berestored, restored,

1)1) Open letdown isolationOpen letdown isolation THENTHEN perform the perform thevalves:valves: following:following:

1CV4591CV459 1)1) Verify CC flow to RCPVerify CC flow to RCP1CV4601CV460 thermal barriers betweenthermal barriers between

150 GPM150 GPM and and 231 GPM231 GPM::2)2) Locally open letdown lineLocally open letdown line

containment isolation valvescontainment isolation valves 1FIS-685A (383' U18)1FIS-685A (383' U18)using pneumatic jumpers:using pneumatic jumpers:

2)2) Close at least Close at least ONEONE1CV8152 (364' +27' X13 CWA1CV8152 (364' +27' X13 CWA charging linecharging lineP-41)P-41) containment isolationcontainment isolation1CV8160 (377' +15' R5 OMB1CV8160 (377' +15' R5 OMB valve using 1BwOAvalve using 1BwOAP-41)P-41) ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY

CONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWN3)3) Open letdown orificeOpen letdown orifice EQUIPMENT:EQUIPMENT:

isolation valves - isolation valves - NOT TONOT TOEXCEED 120 GPMEXCEED 120 GPM:: oo MCC 132X4 C3MCC 132X4 C3

(1CV8105):(1CV8105):oo 1CV8149A1CV8149Aoo 1CV8149B1CV8149B 1CV8105 (379' CWA1CV8105 (379' CWAoo 1CV8149C1CV8149C P-71)P-71)

oo MCC 131X1 K1MCC 131X1 K1(1CV8106):(1CV8106):

1CV8106 (379' CWA1CV8106 (379' CWAP-71)P-71)

3)3) Throttle 1CV121 toThrottle 1CV121 tocontrol injection flowcontrol injection flowwhile maintaining PZRwhile maintaining PZRlevel less than level less than 90%90%::

F0131 RCP 1A Seal InjF0131 RCP 1A Seal InjFlowFlowF0129 RCP 1B Seal InjF0129 RCP 1B Seal InjFlowFlowF0127 RCP 1C Seal InjF0127 RCP 1C Seal InjFlowFlowF0125 RCP 1D Seal InjF0125 RCP 1D Seal InjFlowFlow





141414 DISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOPDISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOPDISPATCH OPERATOR TO LOCALLY STOPECCS PUMPSECCS PUMPSECCS PUMPS:::

a.a. Stop ECCS pumps using 1BwOAStop ECCS pumps using 1BwOAELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROLOF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:OF SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

oo SI Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 3)SI Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 3)oo RH Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 4)RH Pump 1A (Bus 141 Cub 4)oo SI Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 3)SI Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 3)oo RH Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 4)RH Pump 1B (Bus 142 Cub 4)

151515 RESTORE SEAL RETURNRESTORE SEAL RETURNRESTORE SEAL RETURN:::

a.a. Locally open seal water returnLocally open seal water return a.a. Open the breaker andOpen the breaker andcontainment isolation valvescontainment isolation valves locally open the valve(s)locally open the valve(s)using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALusing 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL using the handwheel:using the handwheel:EMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFEEMERGENCY CONTROL OF SAFESHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT: oo 1CV8100 (395' CWA P-28)1CV8100 (395' CWA P-28)

oo 1CV8112 (395' R5 OMB1CV8112 (395' R5 OMBMCC 131X4 A5 (1CV8100)MCC 131X4 A5 (1CV8100) P-28)P-28)MCC 132X2 B4 (1CV8112)MCC 132X2 B4 (1CV8112)

161616 CHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULDCHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULDCHECK IF DIESEL GENERATORS SHOULDBE STOPPEDBE STOPPEDBE STOPPED:::

a.a. Verify 4KV ESF buses -Verify 4KV ESF buses - a.a. Try to restore offsiteTry to restore offsiteENERGIZED BY OFFSITE POWERENERGIZED BY OFFSITE POWER:: power to ESF buses.power to ESF buses.

ACB 1412 - ACB 1412 - CLOSEDCLOSED IFIF offsite power can offsite power can NOTNOTACB 1422 - ACB 1422 - CLOSEDCLOSED be restored, be restored,

THENTHEN notify Transmission notify TransmissionSystem Operator toSystem Operator toinitiate an emergency ACinitiate an emergency ACrestoration program.restoration program.GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 17. Step 17.

b.b. Dispatch operators to stop anyDispatch operators to stop anyunloaded DG and place inunloaded DG and place instandby per BwOP DG-12, DIESELstandby per BwOP DG-12, DIESELGENERATOR SHUTDOWNGENERATOR SHUTDOWN

171717 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 12(Page 8)(Page 8)(Page 8)

-END--END-




ATTACHMENT G (PG 1 OF 3)ATTACHMENT G (PG 1 OF 3)*MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI*MAINTAINING HOT STANDBY WITH AN SI

111 STOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMPSTOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMPSTOP ALL BUT ONE CV PUMP:::

Stop selected pump using Stop selected pump using 1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCY1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL EMERGENCYCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNCONTROL OF SAFE SHUTDOWNEQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT

222 CHECK RCP STATUSCHECK RCP STATUSCHECK RCP STATUS:::

a.a. RCPs - RCPs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNING a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 3. Step 3.

b.b. Stop all but one RCPStop all but one RCP

333 ESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOWESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOWESTABLISH CV PUMP MINIFLOW:::

a.a. Locally check CV pumpLocally check CV pump a.a. Perform the following:Perform the following:miniflow - miniflow - GREATER THAN 60 GPMGREATER THAN 60 GPM::

oo Open motor operatedOpen motor operated1FI-CV048 (346' Q12)1FI-CV048 (346' Q12) miniflow valves perminiflow valves per

1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCAL1BwOA ELEC-5, LOCALEMERGENCY CONTROL OFEMERGENCY CONTROL OFSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT:

oo MCC 131X1 M1MCC 131X1 M1(1CV8110):(1CV8110):

1CV8110 (364' S131CV8110 (364' S13CWA)CWA)

oo MCC 132X4 C4MCC 132X4 C4(1CV8111):(1CV8111):

1CV8111 (364' S131CV8111 (364' S13CWA)CWA)

oo Open the solenoid valvesOpen the solenoid valvesby pulling fuses:by pulling fuses:







444 ISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTIONISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTIONISOLATE COLD LEG INJECTION:::

a.a. Check CC flow to RCP thermalCheck CC flow to RCP thermal a.a. Locally establish CC flowLocally establish CC flowbarriers - barriers - BETWEEN 150 GPM ANDBETWEEN 150 GPM AND to RCP thermal barriers:to RCP thermal barriers:231 GPM231 GPM::

1)1) Open the breaker forOpen the breaker for1FIS-685A (383' U18)1FIS-685A (383' U18) 1CC685:1CC685:

MCC 132X4 D4MCC 132X4 D4

2)2) SLOWLY throttle open CCSLOWLY throttle open CCfrom RCPs thermalfrom RCPs thermalbarrier isolation valve:barrier isolation valve:

1CC6851CC685(395' CWA P-24)(395' CWA P-24)

3)3) Maintain CC flow fromMaintain CC flow fromRCP thermal barriersRCP thermal barriersbetween between 150 GPM150 GPM and and231 GPM231 GPM::

1FIS-685A (383' U18)1FIS-685A (383' U18)

b.b. Deenergize charging pump(s) toDeenergize charging pump(s) toRCS cold leg injectionRCS cold leg injectionisolation valves:isolation valves:

1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4)1SI8801A (MCC 131X1 F4)1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4)1SI8801B (MCC 132X5 A4)

c.c. Locally close charging pump(s)Locally close charging pump(s)to RCS cold leg injectionto RCS cold leg injectionisolation valves using theisolation valves using thehandwheel:handwheel:

1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801A (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)1SI8801B (395' CWA P-26)





555 MAINTAIN PZR LEVELMAINTAIN PZR LEVELMAINTAIN PZR LEVEL:::

a.a. Locally bypass 1CV121:Locally bypass 1CV121:

1)1) Open charging header flowOpen charging header flowcontrol bypass valve forcontrol bypass valve forrunning CV pump:running CV pump:

oo 1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CV1CV8387A (364' U15 1A CVpump room)pump room)

oo 1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CV1CV8387B (364' Y14 1B CVpump room)pump room)

2)2) Close at least Close at least ONEONE charging chargingheader flow control valveheader flow control valvemanual isolation:manual isolation:

oo 1CV8483A (364' +10' U131CV8483A (364' +10' U13CWA)CWA)

oo 1CV8483B (364' +8' U131CV8483B (364' +8' U13CWA)CWA)

b.b. Control charging header flowControl charging header flow b.b. IFIF charging flow can charging flow can NOTNOTcontrol bypass valve tocontrol bypass valve to be reduced with the 1CV121,be reduced with the 1CV121,maintain - maintain - STABLESTABLE:: THENTHEN reduce charging reduce charging

through the RCP seals tothrough the RCP seals toPZR levelPZR level 3 GPM PER PUMP3 GPM PER PUMP using the using the

RCP seal injection manualRCP seal injection manualPZR pressurePZR pressure flow control valves:flow control valves:

1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33)1CV8369A (391' CWA P-33)

F0131 RCP 1 SealF0131 RCP 1 SealInjection Wtr FlowInjection Wtr Flow

1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)1CV8369D (391' CWA P-33)


1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53)1CV8369B (387' CWA P-53)


1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53)1CV8369C (387' CWA P-53)


666 RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14RETURN TO ATTACHMENT F, Step 14(Page 85)(Page 85)(Page 85)

-END--END-


REV. 106REV. 106REV. 106 OPERATOR ACTION SUMMARYOPERATOR ACTION SUMMARYOPERATOR ACTION SUMMARY 1BwOA PRI-F:51BwOA PRI-F:51BwOA PRI-F:5 FOR 1BwOA PRI-5FOR 1BwOA PRI-5FOR 1BwOA PRI-5

IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9IF SI ACTUATES AFTER STEP 9::: * * AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%:::

GO TO ATTACHMENT F, SI GO TO ATTACHMENT F, SI Refill the day tank Refill the day tank TERMINATION (Page 78) TERMINATION (Page 78)

IF MCR BECOMES HABITABLEIF MCR BECOMES HABITABLEIF MCR BECOMES HABITABLE::

GO TO ATTACHMENT D, RESTORING GO TO ATTACHMENT D, RESTORING OPERATIONS FROM MCR (Page 58) OPERATIONS FROM MCR (Page 58)

USE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDSUSE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDSUSE INDICATIONS AT FIRE HAZARDS PANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTEPANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTEPANEL IF NOT AVAILABLE AT REMOTE SHUTDOWN PANELSHUTDOWN PANELSHUTDOWN PANEL::

Source Range NI Source Range NI Intermediate Range NI Intermediate Range NI SG pressures SG pressures SG wide range levels SG wide range levels PZR pressure PZR pressure PZR level PZR level RCS Hot Leg temperatures RCS Hot Leg temperatures RCS Cold Leg temperatures RCS Cold Leg temperatures

PERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IFPERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IFPERFORM MAIN BODY STEP 15b RNO IF:::

o RCP seal outlet temperatureo RCP seal outlet temperaturerises to greater than or rises to greater than or equal to equal to 235235 FF

-OR--OR-o o RCP lower radial bearingRCP lower radial bearing

temperature rises to greatertemperature rises to greaterthan or equal to than or equal to 225225 FF

--OROR--oo No seal injection flow is No seal injection flow is

indicated to RCPs having no indicated to RCPs having no seal or radial bearingseal or radial bearingtemperature indicationtemperature indication

IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SGIF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SGIF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANY SG AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%AND NR SG LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 45%

FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:FOR GREATER THAN 75 MINUTES, THEN:

Feed affected SG(s) between Feed affected SG(s) between 60 GPM60 GPM and and 80 GPM 80 GPM for for 10 MINUTES10 MINUTES prior to prior to restoring desired feedwater flow. restoring desired feedwater flow.

(Final) (Final)

kuzmml

Line

kuzmml

Line

SIM-508 Page 1 of 5

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 had an automatic Safety Injection Actuation. The 1B and 1D RCFCs are out of service.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor directs you to perform 1BwEP-0, Step 7 to Verify RCFC’s are running in Accident Mode.

SIM-508 Page 2 of 5

TASK TITLE: Start RCFC’s in Accident Mode. JPM No.: SIM-508 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No: 4C.VP-06 K/A No.: 022000A4.01 TASK No.: R-VP-007 Start-up a RCFC K/A IMP: 3.6/3.6 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) ALTERNATE PATH: YES EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 10 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM _ IN PLANT _ SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. 1BwEP-0, Rev. 204, REACTOR TRIP OR SI MATERIALS:

1. 1BwEP-0, Step 7 TASK STANDARDS:

1. Start RCFC fans in low speed following SI with failure of SX valves to automatically align.

TASK CONDITIONS: 1. You are the Unit 1 Assist NSO.

2. Unit 1 had an automatic Safety Injection Actuation. The 1B and 1D RCFCs are out of service.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor directs you to perform 1BwEP-0, Step 7 to Verify RCFC’s are running in Accident Mode.

SIM-508 Page 3 of 5

RECORD START TIME:

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD CIRCLE APPLICABLE 1. Refer to 1BwEP-0, Reactor

Trip or Safety Injection.

• LOCATE and refer to 1BwEP-0, Reactor Trip or Safety Injection


2. Check Group 2 RCFC Accident Mode Status Lights.

• Group 2 RCFC Accident Mode Status Lights are NOT lit


**ALTERNATE PATH START** *3. Stop any RCFC running in High

Speed.

• Stop all RCFC’s running in High Speed (the two running must be stopped)

• 1VP01CA • 1VP01CC


*4. Close CNMT chiller inlet and outlet valves.

• Close 1SX112A & 1SX114A


5. Open CNMT chiller bypass valves.

• Verify Open 1SX147A. SAT UNSAT N/A Comments:

6. Verify/Open RCFC inlet valves. • 1SX016A is OPEN.


7. Verify RCFC outlet valves are OPEN.

• 1SX027A is OPEN.


*8. Start all RCFC’s in Low Speed.

• Start all RCFC’s in Low Speed (for each, after a 20 second delay).

• 1VP01CA • 1VP01CC


SIM-508 Page 4 of 5

CUE: THIS COMPLETES THIS JPM. RECORD STOP TIME: ________ COMMENTS:

SIM-508 Page 5 of 5


• Verify/perform TQ-BR-201-0113, BRAIDWOOD TRAINING DEPARTMENT SIMULATOR EXAMINATION SECURITY ACTIONS CHECKLIST.

• Reset to IC-21

• Shut down the operating containment chiller (to prevent nuisance trip during JPM)

• Place high and low switches for 1B and 1D RCFCs in PTL and place clearance order cards on them.

• Close 1SX112B and 1SX114B

COMMENTS:

REV. 204REV. 204REV. 204 REACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTIONREACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTIONREACTOR TRIP OR SAFETY INJECTION1BwEP-01BwEP-01BwEP-0

WOG 2WOG 2WOG 2 UNIT 1UNIT 1UNIT 1

A.A. PURPOSEPURPOSE

This procedure provides actions to verify proper response of theThis procedure provides actions to verify proper response of theautomatic protection systems following manual or automaticautomatic protection systems following manual or automaticactuation of a Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, to assess plantactuation of a Reactor Trip or Safety Injection, to assess plantconditions, and to identify the appropriate recovery procedure.conditions, and to identify the appropriate recovery procedure.

B.B. SYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONSSYMPTOMS OR ENTRY CONDITIONS

1)1) The following are symptoms that may require a Reactor Trip, ifThe following are symptoms that may require a Reactor Trip, ifone has not occurred:one has not occurred:

oo Source range high level Source range high level �� 101055 CPS CPSoo Intermediate range high level Intermediate range high level �� 25%25% power poweroo Power range lo-level Power range lo-level �� 25%25% power poweroo Power range hi-level Power range hi-level �� 109%109% power poweroo Power range positive rate Power range positive rate �� +5%+5% power change in 2 seconds power change in 2 secondsoo Overtemperature Delta T Overtemperature Delta T �� 132.5%132.5% �� penalties penaltiesoo Overpower Delta T Overpower Delta T �� 107.2%107.2% - penalties - penaltiesoo High PZR pressure High PZR pressure �� 2385 PSIG2385 PSIGoo Low PZR pressure Low PZR pressure �� 1885 PSIG1885 PSIGoo High PZR level High PZR level �� 92%92%oo Single loop loss of flow Single loop loss of flow �� 90%90% loop flow loop flowoo Two loop loss of flow Two loop loss of flow �� 90%90% loop flow in 2/4 loops loop flow in 2/4 loopsoo RCP breakers RCP breakers OPENOPENoo RCP bus low frequency RCP bus low frequency �� 57.0 HZ57.0 HZoo RCP bus undervoltage RCP bus undervoltage �� 5268 VOLTS5268 VOLTSoo Turbine trip emergency trip header Turbine trip emergency trip header �� 1000 PSIG1000 PSIG oil pressure oil pressure

or Turbine throttle valves shutor Turbine throttle valves shutoo SI manual actuationSI manual actuationoo CNMT high pressure SI CNMT high pressure SI �� 3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIGoo Low PZR pressure SI Low PZR pressure SI �� 1829 PSIG1829 PSIGoo Low steamline pressure SI Low steamline pressure SI �� 640 PSIG640 PSIG (rate sensitive) (rate sensitive)oo Steam Generator water level low-low Steam Generator water level low-low �� 18%18% of narrow range of narrow range

spanspan

2)2) The following are symptoms of a reactor trip:The following are symptoms of a reactor trip:

oo Any Reactor Trip first out annunciator lit.Any Reactor Trip first out annunciator lit.

oo Rapid drop in neutron level indicated by nuclearRapid drop in neutron level indicated by nuclearinstrumentation.instrumentation.

oo All shutdown and control rods fully inserted and rod bottomAll shutdown and control rods fully inserted and rod bottomlights lit.lights lit.

oo Rapid drop in Unit load to zero power.Rapid drop in Unit load to zero power.





3)3) The following may be symptoms that require a Reactor Trip andThe following may be symptoms that require a Reactor Trip andSafety Injection, if one has not occurred:Safety Injection, if one has not occurred:

oo Low PZR pressure Low PZR pressure �� 1829 PSIG1829 PSIG..

oo Low steamline pressure Low steamline pressure �� 640 PSIG640 PSIG (rate sensitive). (rate sensitive).

oo CNMT high pressure CNMT high pressure �� 3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIG..

4)4) The following may be symptoms of a Reactor Trip and SafetyThe following may be symptoms of a Reactor Trip and SafetyInjection:Injection:

oo Any SI first out annunciator lit.Any SI first out annunciator lit.

oo All Group 2 cold leg injection monitor lights lit.All Group 2 cold leg injection monitor lights lit.

oo ESF equipment actuated.ESF equipment actuated.

oo SI actuated BYPASS-PERMISSIVE light lit.SI actuated BYPASS-PERMISSIVE light lit.

5)5) This procedure may also be entered:This procedure may also be entered:

oo Anytime a manual reactor trip or safety injection isAnytime a manual reactor trip or safety injection isactuated.actuated.

oo Anytime an SI is actuated or required while in Mode 3.Anytime an SI is actuated or required while in Mode 3.





************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** With this procedure in effect, theWith this procedure in effect, the **** Emergency Director shall evaluateEmergency Director shall evaluate **** for Emergency Plan conditions.for Emergency Plan conditions. ************************************************************************************

************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** "ADVERSE CNMT" is defined as:"ADVERSE CNMT" is defined as: **** **** oo CNMT pressure CNMT pressure GREATER THAN 5 PSIGGREATER THAN 5 PSIG **** **** -OR--OR- **** **** oo CNMT radiation level CNMT radiation level GREATER THANGREATER THAN **** 101055 R/HR R/HR:: **** **** oo 1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120 **** oo 1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1211RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121 ************************************************************************************

111 VERIFY REACTOR TRIPVERIFY REACTOR TRIPVERIFY REACTOR TRIP::: Manually trip the Reactor:Manually trip the Reactor:

�� Rod bottom lights - Rod bottom lights - ALL LITALL LIT �� 1PM05J1PM05J�� 1PM06J1PM06J

�� Reactor trip and bypassReactor trip and bypassbreakers - breakers - OPENOPEN IFIF PR channels are greater PR channels are greater

than than 5%5%�� Neutron flux - Neutron flux - DROPPINGDROPPING OROR IR SUR is positive, IR SUR is positive,

THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwFR-S.1, 1BwFR-S.1,RESPONSE TO NUCLEAR POWERRESPONSE TO NUCLEAR POWERGENERATION/ATWS, Step 1.GENERATION/ATWS, Step 1.





222 VERIFY TURBINE TRIPVERIFY TURBINE TRIPVERIFY TURBINE TRIP::: Manually trip the turbine:Manually trip the turbine:

�� All Turbine throttle valves -All Turbine throttle valves - oo Trip pushbuttonTrip pushbuttonCLOSEDCLOSED

oo OWS graphic 5512OWS graphic 5512�� All Turbine governor valves -All Turbine governor valves -

CLOSEDCLOSED IFIF any throttle any throttle ANDAND any anygovernor valve are open, governor valve are open, THENTHEN isolate the steam isolate the steamsupply:supply:

oo Manually run back theManually run back theturbine at maximum rate atturbine at maximum rate atOWS graphic 5501:OWS graphic 5501:

1)1) Select turbine MANUAL.Select turbine MANUAL.

2)2) Select RAPID.Select RAPID.

3)3) Select and HOLD GV lowerSelect and HOLD GV lowerarrow.arrow.

oo Manually actuate MainManually actuate MainSteamline Isolation Steamline Isolation ANDANDverify MSIV bypass valvesverify MSIV bypass valvesare CLOSED.are CLOSED.

333 VERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSSESVERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSSESVERIFY POWER TO 4KV ESF BUSSES:::

a.a. ESF busses - ESF busses - AT LEAST ONEAT LEAST ONE a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwCA-0.0, LOSS OF 1BwCA-0.0, LOSS OFENERGIZEDENERGIZED:: ALL AC POWER, Step 1.ALL AC POWER, Step 1.

oo Bus 141Bus 141oo Bus 142Bus 142

b.b. ESF busses - ESF busses - BOTH ENERGIZEDBOTH ENERGIZED:: b.b. WHENWHEN time permits, time permits, THENTHEN try to restore power try to restore power

�� Bus 141Bus 141 to deenergized ESF bus perto deenergized ESF bus per�� Bus 142Bus 142 1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV1BwOA ELEC-3, LOSS OF 4KV

ESF BUS.ESF BUS.





444 CHECK SI STATUSCHECK SI STATUSCHECK SI STATUS:::

a.a. Check if SI - Check if SI - ACTUATEDACTUATED:: a.a. Check if SI is required:Check if SI is required:

oo Any SI first outAny SI first out oo PZR pressure less thanPZR pressure less thanannunciator - annunciator - LITLIT or equal to or equal to 1829 PSIG1829 PSIG..

-OR--OR- oo Steamline pressure lessSteamline pressure lessthan or equal tothan or equal to

oo SI ACTUATED permissiveSI ACTUATED permissive 640 PSIG640 PSIG..light - light - LITLIT

oo CNMT pressure greaterCNMT pressure greater-OR--OR- than or equal tothan or equal to

3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIG..oo SI equipment - SI equipment - AUTOMATICALLYAUTOMATICALLY

ACTUATEDACTUATED:: IFIF SI is required, SI is required, THENTHEN manually actuate SI. manually actuate SI.

oo Either SI pump - Either SI pump - RUNNINGRUNNINGIFIF SI is SI is NOTNOT required, required,

oo Either CENT CHG pump toEither CENT CHG pump to THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP ES-0.1, 1BwEP ES-0.1,cold leg injection isolcold leg injection isol REACTOR TRIP RESPONSE,REACTOR TRIP RESPONSE,valve - valve - OPENOPEN:: Step 1.Step 1.

oo 1SI8801A1SI8801Aoo 1SI8801B1SI8801B

b.b. * Manually actuate SI:* Manually actuate SI:

�� 1PM05J1PM05J�� 1PM06J1PM06J

555 DIRECT AN NSO TO PERFORM DIRECT AN NSO TO PERFORM DIRECT AN NSO TO PERFORM ATTACHMENT B (Page 32) WHILEATTACHMENT B (Page 32) WHILEATTACHMENT B (Page 32) WHILECONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURECONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURECONTINUING WITH THIS PROCEDURE

666 VERIFY ECCS PUMPS RUNNINGVERIFY ECCS PUMPS RUNNINGVERIFY ECCS PUMPS RUNNING::: Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).

�� CENT CHG pumps - CENT CHG pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING�� RH pumps - RH pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING�� SI pumps - SI pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING





777 VERIFY RCFCs RUNNING IN ACCIDENTVERIFY RCFCs RUNNING IN ACCIDENTVERIFY RCFCs RUNNING IN ACCIDENTMODEMODEMODE:::

a.a. Group 2 RCFC Accident ModeGroup 2 RCFC Accident Mode a.a. Manually align RCFCs inManually align RCFCs instatus lights - status lights - LITLIT accident mode asaccident mode as

necessary:necessary:

1)1) Stop any RCFC running inStop any RCFC running inhigh speed.high speed.

2)2) Close CNMT chiller inletClose CNMT chiller inletand outlet valves:and outlet valves:

oo 1SX112A1SX112Aoo 1SX114A1SX114Aoo 1SX112B1SX112Boo 1SX114B1SX114B

3)3) Open CNMT chiller bypassOpen CNMT chiller bypassvalves:valves:

oo 1SX147A1SX147Aoo 1SX147B1SX147B

4)4) Open RCFC inlet andOpen RCFC inlet andoutlet valves:outlet valves:

oo 1SX016A1SX016Aoo 1SX016B1SX016Boo 1SX027A1SX027Aoo 1SX027B1SX027B

5)5) Start all RCFCs in lowStart all RCFCs in lowspeed.speed.





888 VERIFY CNMT ISOLATION PHASE AVERIFY CNMT ISOLATION PHASE AVERIFY CNMT ISOLATION PHASE A:::

a.a. Group 3 CNMT Isol monitorGroup 3 CNMT Isol monitor a.a. Manually actuate CNMTManually actuate CNMTlights - lights - LITLIT Isolation Phase A.Isolation Phase A.

IFIF any Phase A valve will any Phase A valve willNOTNOT close, close, THENTHEN manually close manually closevalve(s).valve(s).

IFIF any valve(s) located any valve(s) locatedoutside of CNMT can outside of CNMT can NOTNOT be beclosed manually, closed manually, THENTHEN locally close the locally close thevalve(s) while continuingvalve(s) while continuingwith Step 9.with Step 9.

999 VERIFY CNMT VENTILATIONVERIFY CNMT VENTILATIONVERIFY CNMT VENTILATIONISOLATIONISOLATIONISOLATION:::

a.a. Group 6 CNMT Vent Isol monitorGroup 6 CNMT Vent Isol monitor a.a. Perform the following:Perform the following:lights - lights - LITLIT

1)1) Stop any running VQStop any running VQfans.fans.

2)2) Manually close VQ isolManually close VQ isolvalve(s) as necessary.valve(s) as necessary.





101010 VERIFY AF SYSTEMVERIFY AF SYSTEMVERIFY AF SYSTEM:::

a.a. AF pumps - AF pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING a.a. Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).

b.b. AF isol valves - AF isol valves - OPENOPEN:: b.b. Manually open valve(s) asManually open valve(s) asnecessary.necessary.

�� 1AF013A1AF013A�� 1AF013B1AF013B�� 1AF013C1AF013C�� 1AF013D1AF013D�� 1AF013E1AF013E�� 1AF013F1AF013F�� 1AF013G1AF013G�� 1AF013H1AF013H

c.c. AF flow control valves -AF flow control valves - c.c. Manually throttle valve(s)Manually throttle valve(s)THROTTLEDTHROTTLED:: open as necessary.open as necessary.

�� 1AF005A1AF005A�� 1AF005B1AF005B�� 1AF005C1AF005C�� 1AF005D1AF005D�� 1AF005E1AF005E�� 1AF005F1AF005F�� 1AF005G1AF005G�� 1AF005H1AF005H

111111 VERIFY CC PUMPS RUNNINGVERIFY CC PUMPS RUNNINGVERIFY CC PUMPS RUNNING:::

a.a. CC pumps - CC pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING a.a. Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).

121212 VERIFY SX PUMPS RUNNINGVERIFY SX PUMPS RUNNINGVERIFY SX PUMPS RUNNING:::

a.a. SX pumps - SX pumps - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING a.a. Manually start pump(s).Manually start pump(s).





131313 CHECK IF MAIN STEAMLINES SHOULDCHECK IF MAIN STEAMLINES SHOULDCHECK IF MAIN STEAMLINES SHOULDBE ISOLATEDBE ISOLATEDBE ISOLATED:::

a.a. Check for either of theCheck for either of the a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 14 (Next Step 14 (Nextfollowing:following: Page).Page).

oo Any SG pressure - Any SG pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN640 PSIG640 PSIG

-OR--OR-

oo CNMT pressure (1PR-937 orCNMT pressure (1PR-937 or1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) -1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) -GREATER THAN 8.2 PSIGGREATER THAN 8.2 PSIG

b.b. Verify the following:Verify the following: b.b. Perform the following:Perform the following:

�� MSIVs - MSIVs - CLOSEDCLOSED 1)1) Manually actuate MainManually actuate MainSteamline Isolation.Steamline Isolation.

�� MSIV bypass valves - MSIV bypass valves - CLOSEDCLOSED2)2) Verify MSIV and MSIVVerify MSIV and MSIV

bypass valves arebypass valves areclosed.closed.

IFIF any valve will any valve will NOTNOTclose, close, THENTHEN manually close manually closevalve(s).valve(s).





141414 CHECK IF CS IS REQUIREDCHECK IF CS IS REQUIREDCHECK IF CS IS REQUIRED:::

a.a. CNMT pressure (1PR-937 orCNMT pressure (1PR-937 or a.a. Continue with Step 15Continue with Step 151PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) - 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) - HASHAS (Page 12).(Page 12).RISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIGRISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIG

IFIF CNMT pressure rises to CNMT pressure rises togreater than greater than 20 PSIG20 PSIG, , THENTHEN do Steps 14b do Steps 14bthru 14f.thru 14f.

b.b. Group 6 CS monitor lights - Group 6 CS monitor lights - LITLIT b.b. Manually actuate CS andManually actuate CS andPhase B Isolation.Phase B Isolation.

IFIF Group 6 CS monitor Group 6 CS monitorlights are lights are NOTNOT LITLIT, , THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO ATTACHMENT C, ATTACHMENT C,Step 1 (Page 41).Step 1 (Page 41).

c.c. Group 6 Phase B IsolationGroup 6 Phase B Isolation c.c. Manually actuate CS andManually actuate CS andmonitor lights - monitor lights - LITLIT Phase B Isolation.Phase B Isolation.

IFIF Group 6 Phase B Group 6 Phase Bisolation monitor lightsisolation monitor lightsare are NOTNOT LITLIT, , THENTHEN manually close manually closePhase B isolation valves.Phase B isolation valves.

d.d. Stop all RCPsStop all RCPs

e.e. Check CS eductor suction flowCheck CS eductor suction flow e.e. Dispatch an operator withDispatch an operator withon running pump(s) - on running pump(s) - GREATERGREATER keys to verify valve(s)keys to verify valve(s)THAN 15 GPMTHAN 15 GPM:: are OPEN:are OPEN:

oo 1FI-CS0131FI-CS013 oo 1CS035A (1A CS Pump Rm)1CS035A (1A CS Pump Rm)oo 1FI-CS0141FI-CS014 oo 1CS035B (1B CS Pump Rm)1CS035B (1B CS Pump Rm)







f.f. Check CS eductor additive flowCheck CS eductor additive flow f.f. Dispatch operator(s) withDispatch operator(s) withon running pump(s) - on running pump(s) - GREATERGREATER keys to verify valves arekeys to verify valves areTHAN 5 GPMTHAN 5 GPM:: OPEN:OPEN:

oo 1FI-CS0151FI-CS015 oo Train A:Train A:oo 1FI-CS0161FI-CS016

�� 1CS017A (364' U13)1CS017A (364' U13)�� 1CS018A (364' U13)1CS018A (364' U13)�� 1CS040A (364' U13)1CS040A (364' U13)�� 1CS021A (1A CS Pump1CS021A (1A CS Pump

Rm) [Throttled]Rm) [Throttled]�� 1CS046A (1A CS Pump1CS046A (1A CS Pump

Rm)Rm)

oo Train B:Train B:

�� 1CS017B (364' U13)1CS017B (364' U13)�� 1CS018B (364' U13)1CS018B (364' U13)�� 1CS040B (364' U13)1CS040B (364' U13)�� 1CS021B (1B CS Pump1CS021B (1B CS Pump

Rm) [Throttled]Rm) [Throttled]�� 1CS046B (1B CS Pump1CS046B (1B CS Pump

Rm)Rm)





151515 VERIFY TOTAL AF FLOWVERIFY TOTAL AF FLOWVERIFY TOTAL AF FLOW:::

a.a. AF flow - AF flow - GREATER THAN 500 GPMGREATER THAN 500 GPM a.a. IFIF SG narrow range level SG narrow range levelis greater than is greater than 10%10% ( (31%31%ADVERSE CNMT) in any SG, ADVERSE CNMT) in any SG, THENTHEN control feed flow to control feed flow tomaintain narrow rangemaintain narrow rangelevel.level.

IFIF SG narrow range level SG narrow range levelis less than is less than 10%10% ( (31%31%ADVERSE CNMT) in all SGs, ADVERSE CNMT) in all SGs, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

a)a) Manually start pump(s)Manually start pump(s)and align valve(s) asand align valve(s) asnecessary.necessary.

b)b) IFIF feed flow greater feed flow greaterthan than 500 GPM500 GPM can can NOTNOT be beestablished, established, THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwFR-H.1, 1BwFR-H.1,RESPONSE TO LOSS OFRESPONSE TO LOSS OFSECONDARY HEAT SINK,SECONDARY HEAT SINK,Step 1.Step 1.

b.b. Check SG narrow range levels -Check SG narrow range levels - b.b. IFIF ruptured SG is ruptured SG isNOT RISING IN AN UNCONTROLLEDNOT RISING IN AN UNCONTROLLED identified identified ANDAND affected SG affected SGMANNERMANNER narrow range level isnarrow range level is

greater than greater than 10%10% ( (31%31%ADVERSE CNMT), ADVERSE CNMT), THENTHEN manually close its AF manually close its AFisol valves:isol valves:

oo SG 1A:SG 1A:

�� 1AF013A1AF013A�� 1AF013E1AF013E

oo SG 1B:SG 1B:

�� 1AF013B1AF013B�� 1AF013F1AF013F

oo SG 1C:SG 1C:

�� 1AF013C1AF013C�� 1AF013G1AF013G

oo SG 1D:SG 1D:

�� 1AF013D1AF013D�� 1AF013H1AF013H





161616 VERIFY ECCS VALVE ALIGNMENTVERIFY ECCS VALVE ALIGNMENTVERIFY ECCS VALVE ALIGNMENT:::

a.a. Group 2 Cold Leg InjectionGroup 2 Cold Leg Injection a.a. Manually align valve(s) asManually align valve(s) asmonitor lights required formonitor lights required for necessary.necessary.ECCS valve alignment - ECCS valve alignment - LITLIT

171717 VERIFY ECCS FLOWVERIFY ECCS FLOWVERIFY ECCS FLOW:::

a.a. High head SI flow (1FI-917) -High head SI flow (1FI-917) - a.a. Manually start CENT CHGManually start CENT CHGGREATER THAN 100 GPMGREATER THAN 100 GPM pumps and align valves aspumps and align valves as

necessary.necessary.

b.b. RCS pressure (1PI-403A/405) -RCS pressure (1PI-403A/405) - b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 18 (Next Step 18 (NextLESS THAN 1700 PSIGLESS THAN 1700 PSIG Page).Page).

c.c. SI pump discharge flowSI pump discharge flow c.c. Manually start SI pumpsManually start SI pumps(1FI-918/922) - (1FI-918/922) - GREATER THANGREATER THAN and align valves asand align valves as200 GPM200 GPM necessary.necessary.

d.d. RCS pressure - RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN d.d. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 18 (Next Step 18 (Next325 PSIG325 PSIG Page).Page).

e.e. RH pump discharge flowRH pump discharge flow e.e. Manually start RH pumpsManually start RH pumps(1FI-618/619) - (1FI-618/619) - GREATER THANGREATER THAN and align valves asand align valves as1000 GPM1000 GPM necessary.necessary.

f.f. Check two CENT CHG pumps -Check two CENT CHG pumps - f.f. IFIF only one CENT CHG pump only one CENT CHG pumpRUNNINGRUNNING is running, is running,

THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

1)1) Verify head SI flowVerify head SI flow(1FI-917) greater than(1FI-917) greater than100 GPM100 GPM or SI pump or SI pumpdischarge flow greaterdischarge flow greaterthan than 200 GPM200 GPM..

2)2) Trip all RCPs.Trip all RCPs.

3)3) WHENWHEN the RCS is the RCS isdepressurized, depressurized, THENTHEN manually close RCP manually close RCPseal injection isolationseal injection isolationvalves:valves:

�� 1CV8355A1CV8355A�� 1CV8355B1CV8355B�� 1CV8355C1CV8355C�� 1CV8355D1CV8355D





181818 CHECK PZR PORVS AND SPRAYCHECK PZR PORVS AND SPRAYCHECK PZR PORVS AND SPRAYVALVESVALVESVALVES:::

a.a. PORVs - PORVs - CLOSEDCLOSED:: a.a. IFIF PZR pressure is less PZR pressure is lessthan than 2315 PSIG2315 PSIG, ,

�� 1RY455A1RY455A THENTHEN manually close PORVs. manually close PORVs.�� 1RY4561RY456

IFIF any PORV can any PORV can NOTNOT be beclosed, closed, THENTHEN manually or locally manually or locallyclose its isol valve:close its isol valve:

oo 1RY8000A (1RY455A)1RY8000A (1RY455A)MCC 131X2B A5 MCC 131X2B A5 (414' S12 CWA)(414' S12 CWA)

oo 1RY8000B (1RY456) 1RY8000B (1RY456) MCC 132X2 C4 MCC 132X2 C4 (426' S12 CWA)(426' S12 CWA)

IFIF PORV isol valve can PORV isol valve can NOTNOTbe closed, be closed, THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-1, 1BwEP-1,LOSS OF REACTOR ORLOSS OF REACTOR ORSECONDARY COOLANT, Step 1.SECONDARY COOLANT, Step 1.

b.b. * PORV isol valves - * PORV isol valves - AT LEASTAT LEAST b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 18d. Step 18d.ONE ENERGIZEDONE ENERGIZED

c.c. * PORV relief path - * PORV relief path - AT LEASTAT LEAST c.c. Perform the following toPerform the following toONE AVAILABLEONE AVAILABLE:: establish a PORV reliefestablish a PORV relief

path for any PORV path for any PORV NOTNOT�� PORV in - PORV in - AUTOAUTO failed open:failed open:

�� Associated isol valve - Associated isol valve - OPENOPEN 1)1) Place the PORV in AUTO.Place the PORV in AUTO.

2)2) Open the associated PORVOpen the associated PORVisol valve.isol valve.

d.d. Normal PZR spray valves -Normal PZR spray valves - d.d. IFIF PZR pressure is less PZR pressure is lessCLOSEDCLOSED:: than than 2260 PSIG2260 PSIG, ,

THENTHEN manually close spray manually close spray�� 1RY455B1RY455B valve(s).valve(s).�� 1RY455C1RY455C

IFIF any spray valve(s) can any spray valve(s) cannot be closed, not be closed, THENTHEN stop RCP(s) as stop RCP(s) asnecessary to stop spraynecessary to stop sprayflow:flow:

oo RCP 1DRCP 1Doo RCP 1CRCP 1Coo RCP 1BRCP 1Boo RCP 1ARCP 1A





191919 CHECK RCS TEMPERATURESCHECK RCS TEMPERATURESCHECK RCS TEMPERATURES::: IFIF temperature is less than temperature is less than557557��FF and dropping, and dropping,

oo RCPs - RCPs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNING:: THENTHEN perform the following: perform the following:

�� RCS average temperature -RCS average temperature - a.a. Stop dumping steam.Stop dumping steam.STABLE AT OR TRENDING TOSTABLE AT OR TRENDING TO557557��FF b.b. IFIF cooldown continues, cooldown continues,

THENTHEN control total feed control total feed-OR--OR- flow:flow:

oo RCPs - RCPs - NONE RUNNINGNONE RUNNING:: �� Maintain total feed flowMaintain total feed flowgreater than greater than 500 GPM500 GPM

�� RCS cold leg temperature -RCS cold leg temperature - until SG narrow rangeuntil SG narrow rangeSTABLE AT OR TRENDING TOSTABLE AT OR TRENDING TO level is greater thanlevel is greater than557557��FF 10%10% ( (31%31% ADVERSE CNMT) ADVERSE CNMT)

in at least one SG.in at least one SG.

c.c. IFIF cooldown continues, cooldown continues, THENTHEN close MSIV and MSIV close MSIV and MSIVbypass valves.bypass valves.

IFIF temperature is greater temperature is greaterthan than 557557��FF and rising, and rising, THENTHEN perform the following: perform the following:

oo IFIF the C-9 permissive the C-9 permissivelight is light is NOTNOT LIT LIT ANDAND the theMSIV(s) or MSIV bypassMSIV(s) or MSIV bypassvalve(s) are open, valve(s) are open, THENTHEN dump steam to dump steam tocondenser:condenser:

1)1) Place MS header pressurePlace MS header pressurecontroller in MANUAL andcontroller in MANUAL andreduce demand signal toreduce demand signal tozero.zero.

2)2) Place steam dump modePlace steam dump modeselector switch in STMselector switch in STMPRESS mode.PRESS mode.

3)3) Adjust MS headerAdjust MS headerpressure controller inpressure controller inmanual or auto.manual or auto.

-OR--OR-

oo Dump steam using SG PORVs.Dump steam using SG PORVs.





************************************************************************************ NOTENOTE **** Seal injection flow should beSeal injection flow should be **** maintained to all RCPs to preventmaintained to all RCPs to prevent **** seal damage due to overheating.seal damage due to overheating. ************************************************************************************

202020 CHECK IF RCPS SHOULD BE STOPPEDCHECK IF RCPS SHOULD BE STOPPEDCHECK IF RCPS SHOULD BE STOPPED:::

a.a. RCPs - RCPs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNING a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 21. Step 21.

b.b. ECCS flow:ECCS flow: b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 21. Step 21.

oo High head SI flow (1FI-917) -High head SI flow (1FI-917) -GREATER THAN 100 GPMGREATER THAN 100 GPM

-OR--OR-

oo SI pump discharge flowSI pump discharge flow(1FI-918/922) - (1FI-918/922) - GREATER THANGREATER THAN200 GPM200 GPM

c.c. RCS pressure - RCS pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN c.c. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 21. Step 21.1425 PSIG1425 PSIG

d.d. Stop all RCPsStop all RCPs

212121 CHECK IF SGs SECONDARY PRESSURECHECK IF SGs SECONDARY PRESSURECHECK IF SGs SECONDARY PRESSUREBOUNDARIES ARE INTACTBOUNDARIES ARE INTACTBOUNDARIES ARE INTACT:::

a.a. Check pressure in all SGs:Check pressure in all SGs: a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-2, 1BwEP-2,FAULTED STEAM GENERATORFAULTED STEAM GENERATOR

�� NO SG PRESSURE DROPPING IN ANNO SG PRESSURE DROPPING IN AN ISOLATION, Step 1.ISOLATION, Step 1.UNCONTROLLED MANNERUNCONTROLLED MANNER

�� NO SG COMPLETELYNO SG COMPLETELYDEPRESSURIZEDDEPRESSURIZED





222222 CHECK IF SG TUBES ARE INTACTCHECK IF SG TUBES ARE INTACTCHECK IF SG TUBES ARE INTACT::: GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE,STEAM GENERATOR TUBE RUPTURE,

�� SJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust GasSJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust Gas Step 1.Step 1.radiation - radiation - HAS REMAINED LESSHAS REMAINED LESSTHAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINTTHAN ALERT ALARM SETPOINT::

�� 1PR27J Grid 1 1PS1271PR27J Grid 1 1PS127

�� SG Blowdown Liquid radiation -SG Blowdown Liquid radiation -HAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTHAS REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTALARM SETPOINTALARM SETPOINT::


�� Main Steamline radiation - Main Steamline radiation - HASHASREMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARMREMAINED LESS THAN ALERT ALARMSETPOINTSETPOINT::

�� Main Steamline 1A, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1A, MSIV Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA1221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA122�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA1231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA123

�� Main Steamline 1B, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1B, MSIV Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB2221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB222�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB2231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB223

�� Main Steamline 1C, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1C, MSIV Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC3221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC322�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC3231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC323

�� Main Steamline 1D, MSIV Rm:Main Steamline 1D, MSIV Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD4221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD422�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD4231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD423





232323 CHECK IF RCS IS INTACTCHECK IF RCS IS INTACTCHECK IF RCS IS INTACT::: GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF 1BwEP-1, LOSS OFREACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT,REACTOR OR SECONDARY COOLANT,

�� CNMT area radiation monitors -CNMT area radiation monitors - Step 1.Step 1.HAVE REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTHAVE REMAINED LESS THAN ALERTALARM SETPOINTSALARM SETPOINTS::

�� 1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS1011RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS101�� 1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS2021RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS202�� 1RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS3031RT-AR014 Grid 4 4AS303�� 1RT-AR011 Grid 4 4AS1111RT-AR011 Grid 4 4AS111�� 1RT-AR012 Grid 4 4AS1121RT-AR012 Grid 4 4AS112�� 1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120�� 1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1211RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121

�� CNMT pressure - CNMT pressure - LESS THANLESS THAN3.4 PSIG3.4 PSIG

�� CNMT floor drain sump level -CNMT floor drain sump level -LESS THAN 46 INCHESLESS THAN 46 INCHES::

�� 1LI-PC0021LI-PC002�� 1LI-PC0031LI-PC003





242424 CHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BECHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BECHECK IF ECCS FLOW SHOULD BEREDUCEDREDUCEDREDUCED:::

a.a. RCS subcooling - RCS subcooling - ACCEPTABLEACCEPTABLE:: a.a. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 25. Step 25.

oo ICONIC DISPLAYICONIC DISPLAY

-OR--OR-

oo ATTACHMENT A (Page 31)ATTACHMENT A (Page 31)

b.b. Secondary heat sink:Secondary heat sink: b.b. IFIF neither condition is neither condition issatisfied, satisfied,

oo Total feed flow to SGs -Total feed flow to SGs - THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 25. Step 25.GREATER THAN 500 GPMGREATER THAN 500 GPM

-OR--OR-

oo Narrow range level in atNarrow range level in atleast one SG - least one SG - GREATER THANGREATER THAN10%10%

c.c. RCS pressure - RCS pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISING c.c. GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 25. Step 25.

d.d. PZR level - PZR level - GREATER THAN 14%GREATER THAN 14% d.d. Perform the following:Perform the following:

1)1) IFIF normal PZR spray is normal PZR spray isavailable, available, THENTHEN try to stabilize try to stabilizeRCS pressure.RCS pressure.

2)2) RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 24a. Step 24a.

e.e. GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP ES-1.1, 1BwEP ES-1.1,SI TERMINATION, Step 1SI TERMINATION, Step 1

252525 INITIATE MONITORING OF CRITICALINITIATE MONITORING OF CRITICALINITIATE MONITORING OF CRITICALSAFETY FUNCTION STATUS TREESSAFETY FUNCTION STATUS TREESSAFETY FUNCTION STATUS TREES





262626 CHECK SG LEVELSCHECK SG LEVELSCHECK SG LEVELS:::

a.a. Narrow range levels - Narrow range levels - GREATERGREATER a.a. Maintain total feed flowMaintain total feed flowTHAN 10%THAN 10% greater than greater than 500 GPM500 GPM until until

narrow range level isnarrow range level isgreater than greater than 10%10% in at in atleast one SG.least one SG.

b.b. Control feed flow to maintainControl feed flow to maintain b.b. IFIF narrow range level in narrow range level innarrow range levels - narrow range levels - BETWEENBETWEEN any SG continues to riseany SG continues to rise10% AND 50%10% AND 50% in an uncontrolled manner, in an uncontrolled manner,

THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,STEAM GENERATOR TUBESTEAM GENERATOR TUBERUPTURE, Step 1.RUPTURE, Step 1.

�� CAUTIONCAUTION �� If offsite power is lost after SIIf offsite power is lost after SI �� reset, manual action may be requiredreset, manual action may be required �� to restart RH and SI pumps.to restart RH and SI pumps. ��

272727 RESET SIRESET SIRESET SI::: IFIF bypass permissive panel is bypass permissive panel isenergized and SI has energized and SI has NOTNOT

a.a. Depress both SI resetDepress both SI reset reset, reset, pushbuttonspushbuttons THENTHEN reset SI per reset SI per

1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOM1BwOA PRI-5, CONTROL ROOMb.b. Verify SI ACTUATED permissiveVerify SI ACTUATED permissive INACCESSIBILITY, ATTACHMENTINACCESSIBILITY, ATTACHMENT

light - light - NOT LITNOT LIT E.E.

c.c. Verify AUTO SI BLOCKEDVerify AUTO SI BLOCKEDpermissive light - permissive light - LITLIT

282828 RESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONRESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATIONRESET CONTAINMENT ISOLATION::: Reset per 1BwOA PRI-5,Reset per 1BwOA PRI-5,CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY,CONTROL ROOM INACCESSIBILITY,

�� Phase APhase A ATTACHMENT E.ATTACHMENT E.

�� Phase B if necessaryPhase B if necessary





292929 ESTABLISH INSTRUMENT AIR TOESTABLISH INSTRUMENT AIR TOESTABLISH INSTRUMENT AIR TOCONTAINMENTCONTAINMENTCONTAINMENT:::

a.a. Check SACs - Check SACs - ANY RUNNINGANY RUNNING a.a. Dispatch an operator toDispatch an operator tostart one SAC per BwOPstart one SAC per BwOPSA-1, STARTUP ANDSA-1, STARTUP ANDOPERATION OF A STATION AIROPERATION OF A STATION AIRCOMPRESSOR.COMPRESSOR.

Continue with Step 30Continue with Step 30(Next Page). OBSERVE(Next Page). OBSERVECAUTION PRIOR TO STEP 30.CAUTION PRIOR TO STEP 30.

WHENWHEN a SAC is running, a SAC is running, THENTHEN do Step 29b. do Step 29b.

b.b. Open instrument air CNMT isolOpen instrument air CNMT isolvalves:valves:

1)1) 1IA0651IA065 1)1) Locally open the valveLocally open the valveusing a pneumatic jumperusing a pneumatic jumper(391' CWA P-39).(391' CWA P-39).

Continue with Step 30Continue with Step 30(Next Page). OBSERVE(Next Page). OBSERVECAUTION PRIOR TOCAUTION PRIOR TOSTEP 30.STEP 30.

WHENWHEN 1IA065 is open, 1IA065 is open, THENTHEN open 1IA066. open 1IA066.

2)2) 1IA0661IA066





�� CAUTIONCAUTION �� RCS pressure should be monitored. RCS pressure should be monitored. �� If RCS pressure drops in anIf RCS pressure drops in an �� uncontrolled manner to less thanuncontrolled manner to less than �� 325 PSIG325 PSIG, the RH pumps must be, the RH pumps must be �� manually restarted to supply watermanually restarted to supply water �� to the RCS.to the RCS. ��

303030 CHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BECHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BECHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BESTOPPEDSTOPPEDSTOPPED:::

a.a. Check RCS pressure:Check RCS pressure:

1)1) Pressure - Pressure - GREATER THANGREATER THAN 1)1) GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF 1BwEP-1, LOSS OF325 PSIG325 PSIG REACTOR OR SECONDARYREACTOR OR SECONDARY

COOLANT, Step 1.COOLANT, Step 1.

2)2) Pressure - Pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISING 2)2) GO TOGO TOGO TO Step 31 (Next Step 31 (NextPage).Page).

b.b. Stop RH pumps and place inStop RH pumps and place instandbystandby





313131 CHECK SECONDARY RADIATIONCHECK SECONDARY RADIATIONCHECK SECONDARY RADIATIONNORMALNORMALNORMAL:::

a.a. Sample all SGs for activity:Sample all SGs for activity:

1)1) Open SG Blowdown Sample IsolOpen SG Blowdown Sample Isolvalves:valves:

�� 1SD005A (SG 1A)1SD005A (SG 1A)�� 1SD005C (SG 1B)1SD005C (SG 1B)�� 1SD005D (SG 1C)1SD005D (SG 1C)�� 1SD005B (SG 1D)1SD005B (SG 1D)

2)2) Request Chem Dept to sampleRequest Chem Dept to sampleall SGs for activityall SGs for activity

b.b. Check secondary radiationCheck secondary radiation b.b. GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,trends (PPC or RM-11) - trends (PPC or RM-11) - NORMALNORMAL STEAM GENERATOR TUBESTEAM GENERATOR TUBEFOR PLANT CONDITIONSFOR PLANT CONDITIONS:: RUPTURE, Step 1.RUPTURE, Step 1.

�� SJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust GasSJAE/Gland Steam Exhaust Gasradiation:radiation:


�� SG Blowdown Liquid radiation:SG Blowdown Liquid radiation:


�� Main Steamline radiation:Main Steamline radiation:

�� Main Steamline 1A, MSIVMain Steamline 1A, MSIVRm:Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA1221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AA122�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA1231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AA123

�� Main Steamline 1B, MSIVMain Steamline 1B, MSIVRm:Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB2221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AB222�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB2231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AB223

�� Main Steamline 1C, MSIVMain Steamline 1C, MSIVRm:Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC3221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AC322�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC3231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AC323

�� Main Steamline 1D, MSIVMain Steamline 1D, MSIVRm:Rm:

�� 1RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD4221RT-AR022 Grid 1 4AD422�� 1RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD4231RT-AR023 Grid 1 4AD423

c.c. Secondary activity samples -Secondary activity samples - c.c. GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwEP-3, 1BwEP-3,NORMAL (WHEN AVAILABLE)NORMAL (WHEN AVAILABLE) STEAM GENERATOR TUBESTEAM GENERATOR TUBE

RUPTURE, Step 1.RUPTURE, Step 1.





323232 CHECK AUXILIARY BUILDINGCHECK AUXILIARY BUILDINGCHECK AUXILIARY BUILDINGRADIATIONRADIATIONRADIATION:::

a.a. Check Aux Bldg radiation trendsCheck Aux Bldg radiation trends a.a. Evaluate cause of abnormalEvaluate cause of abnormal(PPC or RM-11) - (PPC or RM-11) - NORMAL FORNORMAL FOR conditions.conditions.PLANT CONDITIONSPLANT CONDITIONS::

IFIF cause is loss of RCS cause is loss of RCS�� Unit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackUnit 1 Aux Bldg vent stack inventory outside CNMT, inventory outside CNMT,

effluent (1PR28J):effluent (1PR28J): THENTHEN GO TOGO TOGO TO 1BwCA-1.2, 1BwCA-1.2,LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT,LOCA OUTSIDE CONTAINMENT,

�� Grid 2 Beta 1PA228Grid 2 Beta 1PA228 Step 1.Step 1.�� Grid 2 Gas Low 1PB128Grid 2 Gas Low 1PB128�� Grid 2 Iodine 1PC328Grid 2 Iodine 1PC328�� Grid 2 Gas High 1PD428Grid 2 Gas High 1PD428

�� Unit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackUnit 1 Aux Bldg vent stackeffluent (1PR30J):effluent (1PR30J):

�� Grid 2 Gas Low 1PA130Grid 2 Gas Low 1PA130�� Grid 2 Gas Med 1PB230Grid 2 Gas Med 1PB230�� Grid 2 Gas High 1PC330Grid 2 Gas High 1PC330�� Grid 2 Effluent 1PF430Grid 2 Effluent 1PF430


�� Grid 2 Beta 2PA228Grid 2 Beta 2PA228�� Grid 2 Gas Low 2PB128Grid 2 Gas Low 2PB128�� Grid 2 Iodine 2PC328Grid 2 Iodine 2PC328�� Grid 2 Gas High 2PD428Grid 2 Gas High 2PD428


�� Grid 2 Gas Low 2PA130Grid 2 Gas Low 2PA130�� Grid 2 Gas Med 2PB230Grid 2 Gas Med 2PB230�� Grid 2 Gas High 2PC330Grid 2 Gas High 2PC330�� Grid 2 Effluent 2PF430Grid 2 Effluent 2PF430






Step 32a (continued)Step 32a (continued)

�� ECCS cubicles:ECCS cubicles:

�� RH/CS pump 1A CubicleRH/CS pump 1A Cubicle(1PR13J):(1PR13J):

�� Grid 2 Beta 1PA213Grid 2 Beta 1PA213�� Grid 2 Gas 1PB113Grid 2 Gas 1PB113

�� RH/CS pump 1B CubicleRH/CS pump 1B Cubicle(1PR14J):(1PR14J):


�� RH HX 1A Cubicle (1PR15J):RH HX 1A Cubicle (1PR15J):


�� RH HX 1B Cubicle (1PR16J):RH HX 1B Cubicle (1PR16J):


�� CENT CHG pump 1A CubicleCENT CHG pump 1A Cubicle(1PR17J):(1PR17J):


�� CENT CHG pump 1B CubicleCENT CHG pump 1B Cubicle(1PR18J):(1PR18J):


�� Grid 4 Aux Bldg areaGrid 4 Aux Bldg arearadiationradiation

333333 CHECK PRT CONDITIONS NORMALCHECK PRT CONDITIONS NORMALCHECK PRT CONDITIONS NORMAL::: Evaluate cause of abnormalEvaluate cause of abnormalconditions.conditions.

�� PRT Pressure - PRT Pressure - LESS THAN 6 PSIGLESS THAN 6 PSIG

�� PRT Level - PRT Level - LESS THAN 88%LESS THAN 88%

�� PRT Temperature - PRT Temperature - LESS THANLESS THAN125125��FF





343434 CHECK IF DGs SHOULD BE STOPPEDCHECK IF DGs SHOULD BE STOPPEDCHECK IF DGs SHOULD BE STOPPED:::

a.a. 4KV busses - 4KV busses - ENERGIZED BYENERGIZED BY a.a. Try to restore offsiteTry to restore offsiteOFFSITE POWEROFFSITE POWER:: power to 4KV busses:power to 4KV busses:

�� Bus 141Bus 141 1)1) Consult TSO for statusConsult TSO for status�� Bus 142Bus 142 of offsite powerof offsite power

restoration.restoration.�� Bus 143Bus 143�� Bus 144Bus 144 IFIF offsite power is offsite power is

available, available, THENTHEN perform the perform thefollowing:following:

1)1) Restore offsite power toRestore offsite power to4KV ESF busses per BwOP4KV ESF busses per BwOPAP-32, SYNCHRONIZING AAP-32, SYNCHRONIZING ASAT TO A BUS BEING FEDSAT TO A BUS BEING FEDBY A DG.BY A DG.

2)2) Sync and closeSync and closeassociated 4KV NON-ESFassociated 4KV NON-ESFSAT feed breakers:SAT feed breakers:

�� ACB 1432ACB 1432�� ACB 1442 ACB 1442







IFIF offsite power can offsite power can NOTNOTbe restored to 4KV NON-ESFbe restored to 4KV NON-ESFbus(es), bus(es), THENTHEN crosstie the NON-ESF crosstie the NON-ESFbus(es) to the ESF bus(es)bus(es) to the ESF bus(es)as follows:as follows:

1)1) Dispatch an operator toDispatch an operator toplace the followingplace the followingswitch in PULL OUTswitch in PULL OUT(Panel 0VS03J, 3rd floor(Panel 0VS03J, 3rd floorHVAC room):HVAC room):

�� Service Bldg chillerService Bldg chiller0A (Bus 144 only)0A (Bus 144 only)

2)2) Place feeder breakersPlace feeder breakersfor affected 4KV NON-ESFfor affected 4KV NON-ESFbus(es) in PULL OUT:bus(es) in PULL OUT:

oo Bus 143:Bus 143:

�� ACB 1431ACB 1431�� ACB 1432ACB 1432

oo Bus 144:Bus 144:

�� ACB 1441ACB 1441�� ACB 1442ACB 1442

3)3) Open all 480 voltOpen all 480 volttransformer HIGH sidetransformer HIGH sideand LOW side breakersand LOW side breakersfor affected bus(es).for affected bus(es).

4)4) Open all 480 volt PZROpen all 480 volt PZRheater transformer LOWheater transformer LOWside breakers at 1PM05Jside breakers at 1PM05Jfor affected bus(es).for affected bus(es).

5)5) Reset SI recirc sumpReset SI recirc sumpisol valves ifisol valves ifnecessary:necessary:

�� 1SI8811A1SI8811A�� 1SI8811B1SI8811B







6)6) Place non-runningPlace non-runningequipment in PULL OUT onequipment in PULL OUT onaffected bus(es):affected bus(es):

�� Cnmt chillersCnmt chillers�� WS pumpsWS pumps�� SACsSACs

7)7) Close affected bus(es)Close affected bus(es)NON-ESF to ESF crosstieNON-ESF to ESF crosstiebreaker:breaker:

oo ACB 1411ACB 1411oo ACB 1421 ACB 1421

Load equipment asLoad equipment asnecessary while continuingnecessary while continuingwith Step 34b (Page 29):with Step 34b (Page 29):

1)1) Restore PZR heaters:Restore PZR heaters:

a)a) Close 4KV PZR heaterClose 4KV PZR heatertransformer HIGH sidetransformer HIGH sidebreakers.breakers.

b)b) Close 480 volt PZRClose 480 volt PZRheater transformerheater transformerLOW side breakers atLOW side breakers at1PM05J.1PM05J.

2)2) Energize Unit 1 480 voltEnergize Unit 1 480 voltbusses.busses.

3)3) Start a WS pump per Start a WS pump per BwOP WS-1, STARTUP ANDBwOP WS-1, STARTUP ANDOPERATION OF WS SYSTEM,OPERATION OF WS SYSTEM,if necessary.if necessary.







4)4) Restore air, ifRestore air, ifnecessary:necessary:

a)a) Start a SAC per BwOPStart a SAC per BwOPSA-1, STARTUP ANDSA-1, STARTUP ANDOPERATION OF AOPERATION OF ASTATION AIRSTATION AIRCOMPRESSOR.COMPRESSOR.

b)b) Restore IA to CNMT:Restore IA to CNMT:

1)1) Open 1IA065.Open 1IA065.

2)2) Open 1IA066.Open 1IA066.

5)5) Start other NON-ESFStart other NON-ESFloads as necessary:loads as necessary:

oo Boric acid transferBoric acid transferpumppump

oo SFP cooling pumpSFP cooling pumpoo Air side seal oilAir side seal oil

pumppumpoo Hydrogen side sealHydrogen side seal

oil pumpoil pump

IFIF any 4KV ESF bus is any 4KV ESF bus is NOTNOTenergized, energized, THENTHEN perform 1BwOA ELEC-3, perform 1BwOA ELEC-3,LOSS OF 4KV ESF BUS asLOSS OF 4KV ESF BUS astime permits.time permits.

b.b. Stop any unloaded DG and placeStop any unloaded DG and placein standby per BwOP DG-12,in standby per BwOP DG-12,DIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWNDIESEL GENERATOR SHUTDOWN

353535 RETURN TO STEP 18 (Page 14)RETURN TO STEP 18 (Page 14)RETURN TO STEP 18 (Page 14)

-END- -END-




(NORMAL)(NORMAL)(NORMAL)

200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700

0

200

400

600

800

1000

1200

1400

1600

1800

2000

2200

2400

2600

RCS Temperature (°F)

RCS Pressure (PSIG)

Normal--- Adverse---

Containment Conditions:

---Saturation

NOTACCEPTABLE

ACCEPTABLE

Normal--- Adverse---

Containment

---Saturation

NOT

ACCEPTABLE

FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1RCS SUBCOOLING MARGINRCS SUBCOOLING MARGINRCS SUBCOOLING MARGIN




ATTACHMENT AATTACHMENT A

A.A. Determination of Post-Accident RCS SubcoolingDetermination of Post-Accident RCS Subcooling::

1)1) Check CNMT for Check CNMT for ADVERSEADVERSE conditions: conditions:

oo CNMT pressure greater than CNMT pressure greater than 5 PSIG5 PSIG..

-OR--OR-

oo CNMT radiation greater than CNMT radiation greater than 101055 R/HR R/HR::

oo 1RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS1201RT-AR020 Grid 4 4AS120oo 1RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS1211RT-AR021 Grid 4 4AS121

2)2) Check RCS pressure on wide range pressure instrumentsCheck RCS pressure on wide range pressure instruments(1PI-403A/405).(1PI-403A/405).

3)3) Determine temperature for RCS pressure using Determine temperature for RCS pressure using NORMALNORMAL or or ADVERSEADVERSECNMT curves per FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1 (Previous Page).CNMT curves per FIGURE 1BwEP 0-1 (Previous Page).

4)4) Check average of ten highest core exit TCs from ICONIC DISPLAYCheck average of ten highest core exit TCs from ICONIC DISPLAYOROR MCB indicators (1TI-IT001/IT002). MCB indicators (1TI-IT001/IT002).

5)5) If average of ten highest core exit TCs is less than temperatureIf average of ten highest core exit TCs is less than temperaturefor RCS pressure, then acceptable subcooling exists.for RCS pressure, then acceptable subcooling exists.





ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 9)ATTACHMENT B (PG 1 OF 9)BALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATIONBALANCE OF PLANT VERIFICATION

111 VERIFY FW ISOLATIONVERIFY FW ISOLATIONVERIFY FW ISOLATION::: Manually trip pump(s) andManually trip pump(s) andclose valve(s) as necessary.close valve(s) as necessary.

�� FW pumps - FW pumps - TRIPPEDTRIPPEDIFIF any FW reg valve can any FW reg valve can NOTNOT

�� FW isolation monitor lights -FW isolation monitor lights - be closed, be closed, LITLIT THENTHEN manually close its manually close its

associated FW shutoff valve:associated FW shutoff valve:�� FW pumps discharge valves -FW pumps discharge valves -

CLOSEDCLOSED:: oo 1FW006A (1FW510)1FW006A (1FW510)oo 1FW006B (1FW520)1FW006B (1FW520)

�� 1FW002A1FW002A oo 1FW006C (1FW530)1FW006C (1FW530)�� 1FW002B1FW002B oo 1FW006D (1FW540)1FW006D (1FW540)�� 1FW002C1FW002C

222 VERIFY DGs RUNNINGVERIFY DGs RUNNINGVERIFY DGs RUNNING:::

a.a. DGs - DGs - BOTH RUNNINGBOTH RUNNING a.a. Manually start DG(s).Manually start DG(s).

b.b. DGs SX valve - DGs SX valve - OPENOPEN:: b.b. Manually open valve(s).Manually open valve(s).

�� 1SX169A1SX169A�� 1SX169B1SX169B

c.c. Dispatch operator to checkDispatch operator to checkDGs operationDGs operation

333 VERIFY GENERATOR TRIPVERIFY GENERATOR TRIPVERIFY GENERATOR TRIP:::

a.a. Unit 1 Main Transformer outputUnit 1 Main Transformer output a.a. Manually open breaker(s).Manually open breaker(s).breakers - breakers - OPENOPEN::

�� OCB 1-8OCB 1-8�� OCB 7-8OCB 7-8

b.b. PMG output breaker - PMG output breaker - OPENOPEN b.b. Manually open PMG outputManually open PMG outputbreaker.breaker.






444 VERIFY CONTROL ROOM VENTILATIONVERIFY CONTROL ROOM VENTILATIONVERIFY CONTROL ROOM VENTILATIONALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION:::

a.a. Control Room outside air intakeControl Room outside air intake a.a. Locally verify theLocally verify theradiation - radiation - LESS THAN HIGHLESS THAN HIGH following fans arefollowing fans areALARM SETPOINTALARM SETPOINT:: TRIPPED:TRIPPED:

�� Control Room Outside AirControl Room Outside Air 1)1) Control Room officesControl Room officesIntake 0A:Intake 0A: HVAC Panel 0VV01JHVAC Panel 0VV01J

(451' K24):(451' K24):�� 0PR31J Grid 2 0PA2310PR31J Grid 2 0PA231�� 0PR31J Grid 2 0PB1310PR31J Grid 2 0PB131 �� 0VV01CA, Supply Fan0VV01CA, Supply Fan�� 0PR31J Grid 2 0PC3310PR31J Grid 2 0PC331 OAOA�� 0PR32J Grid 2 0PA2320PR32J Grid 2 0PA232 �� 0VV01CB, Supply Fan0VV01CB, Supply Fan�� 0PR32J Grid 2 0PB1320PR32J Grid 2 0PB132 OBOB�� 0PR32J Grid 2 0PC3320PR32J Grid 2 0PC332

2)2) Laboratory HVAC PanelLaboratory HVAC Panel�� Control Room Outside AirControl Room Outside Air 0VL01J (426' M10):0VL01J (426' M10):

Intake 0B:Intake 0B:�� 0VL02CA, Fume Hood0VL02CA, Fume Hood

�� 0PR33J Grid 2 0PA2330PR33J Grid 2 0PA233 Exhaust Fan OAExhaust Fan OA�� 0PR33J Grid 2 0PB1330PR33J Grid 2 0PB133 �� 0VL02CB, Fume Hood0VL02CB, Fume Hood�� 0PR33J Grid 2 0PC3330PR33J Grid 2 0PC333 Exhaust Fan OBExhaust Fan OB�� 0PR34J Grid 2 0PA2340PR34J Grid 2 0PA234�� 0PR34J Grid 2 0PB1340PR34J Grid 2 0PB134 3)3) Radwaste Building HVACRadwaste Building HVAC�� 0PR34J Grid 2 0PC3340PR34J Grid 2 0PC334 Panel 0VW01JPanel 0VW01J

(433' J45 SB):(433' J45 SB):

�� 0VW03CA, Exhaust Fan0VW03CA, Exhaust FanOAOA

�� 0VW03CB, Exhaust Fan0VW03CB, Exhaust FanOBOB








b.b. Operating VC train equipment -Operating VC train equipment - b.b. Manually start equipmentManually start equipmentRUNNINGRUNNING:: for VC train in operation.for VC train in operation.

oo Train A:Train A: IFIF equipment can equipment can NOTNOT be bestarted, started,

�� Supply fan 0ASupply fan 0A THENTHEN perform the following perform the followingunless attempts haveunless attempts have

�� Return fan 0AReturn fan 0A already failed to startalready failed to startboth trains:both trains:

�� M/U fan 0AM/U fan 0Aa)a) Reset Control Room VentReset Control Room Vent

�� Chilled water pump 0AChilled water pump 0A Isolation.Isolation.

�� MCR chiller 0AMCR chiller 0A b)b) Stop inoperable VC trainStop inoperable VC trainequipment.equipment.

oo Train B:Train B:c)c) Start opposite VC trainStart opposite VC train

�� Supply fan 0BSupply fan 0B equipment.equipment.

�� Return fan 0BReturn fan 0B d)d) RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 4b. Step 4b.

�� M/U fan 0BM/U fan 0B

�� Chilled water pump 0BChilled water pump 0B

�� MCR chiller 0BMCR chiller 0B

c.c. Operating VC train dampers -Operating VC train dampers - c.c. Perform the followingPerform the followingALIGNEDALIGNED:: unless attempts haveunless attempts have

already failed to startalready failed to start�� M/U fan outlet damper - M/U fan outlet damper - NOTNOT and align both trains:and align both trains:

FULLY CLOSEDFULLY CLOSED::1)1) Reset Control Room VentReset Control Room Vent

oo 0VC24Y (Train A)0VC24Y (Train A) Isolation.Isolation.oo 0VC08Y (Train B)0VC08Y (Train B)

2)2) Stop inoperable VC trainStop inoperable VC train�� VC train M/U filter light -VC train M/U filter light - equipment.equipment.

LITLIT3)3) Start opposite VC trainStart opposite VC train

equipment.equipment.

4)4) RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 4b. Step 4b.








d.d. Operating VC train M/U filterOperating VC train M/U filter d.d. Place M/U Fltr InletPlace M/U Fltr Inletaligned to - aligned to - NORMAL TBNORMAL TB:: Select switch to Select switch to NORMAL TBNORMAL TB

position.position.oo Train A:Train A:

�� 0VC25Y - 0VC25Y - OPENOPEN

�� 0VC312Y - 0VC312Y - CLOSEDCLOSED

oo Train B:Train B:

�� 0VC09Y - 0VC09Y - OPENOPEN

�� 0VC313Y - 0VC313Y - CLOSEDCLOSED

e.e. * Operating VC train Charcoal* Operating VC train Charcoal e.e. Place RECIRC CharcoalPlace RECIRC CharcoalAbsorber - Absorber - ALIGNEDALIGNED:: Absorber selector switchAbsorber selector switch

to the to the ABSORBABSORB position. position.oo Train A:Train A:

IFIF Charcoal Absorber is Charcoal Absorber is�� 0VC43Y bypass damper -0VC43Y bypass damper - still still NOTNOT aligned, aligned,

CLOSEDCLOSED THENTHEN perform the following perform the followingunless attempts haveunless attempts have

�� 0VC21Y inlet damper - 0VC21Y inlet damper - OPENOPEN already failed to startalready failed to startand align both trains:and align both trains:

�� 0VC22Y outlet damper -0VC22Y outlet damper -OPENOPEN 1)1) Reset Control Room VentReset Control Room Vent

Isolation.Isolation.-OR--OR-

2)2) Stop inoperable VC trainStop inoperable VC trainoo Train B:Train B: equipment.equipment.

�� 0VC044Y bypass damper -0VC044Y bypass damper - 3)3) Start opposite VC trainStart opposite VC trainCLOSEDCLOSED equipment.equipment.

�� 0VC05Y inlet damper - 0VC05Y inlet damper - OPENOPEN 4)4) RETURN TORETURN TORETURN TO Step 4b Step 4b(Previous Page).(Previous Page).

�� 0VC06Y outlet damper -0VC06Y outlet damper -OPENOPEN

f.f. Control Room pressure Control Room pressure f.f. Restore MCR pressure perRestore MCR pressure per(MCR/TB DP, OPDI-VC038) -(MCR/TB DP, OPDI-VC038) - BwOP VC-14, MAIN CONTROLBwOP VC-14, MAIN CONTROLGREATER THAN +0.125" HGREATER THAN +0.125" H22OO ROOM PRESSURE LOW, whileROOM PRESSURE LOW, while

continuing with thiscontinuing with thisprocedure.procedure.






555 VERIFY AUX BLDG VENTILATIONVERIFY AUX BLDG VENTILATIONVERIFY AUX BLDG VENTILATIONALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONALIGNED FOR EMERGENCY OPERATION:::

a.a. * Inaccessible Filter Plenums -* Inaccessible Filter Plenums - a.a. Align plenums and startAlign plenums and startTWO PLENUMS ALIGNED WITHTWO PLENUMS ALIGNED WITH fans as necessary per fans as necessary per CHARCOAL ABSORBERS ON-LINECHARCOAL ABSORBERS ON-LINE:: BwOP VA-5, AUX BLDGBwOP VA-5, AUX BLDG

CHARCOAL BOOSTER FANCHARCOAL BOOSTER FANoo Plenum A:Plenum A: OPERATION.OPERATION.

oo Fan 0VA03CA - Fan 0VA03CA - RUNNINGRUNNING::

�� 0VA022Y Flow Cont0VA022Y Flow Contdamper - damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED

�� 0VA020Y Byp Isol0VA020Y Byp Isoldamper - damper - CLOSEDCLOSED

-OR--OR-

oo Fan 0VA03CB - Fan 0VA03CB - RUNNINGRUNNING::









Step 5a (continued)Step 5a (continued)

oo Plenum B:Plenum B:

oo Fan 0VA03CC - Fan 0VA03CC - RUNNINGRUNNING::



-OR--OR-

oo Fan 0VA03CD - Fan 0VA03CD - RUNNINGRUNNING::



oo Plenum C:Plenum C:

oo Fan 0VA03CE - Fan 0VA03CE - RUNNINGRUNNING::



-OR--OR-

oo Fan 0VA03CF - Fan 0VA03CF - RUNNINGRUNNING::








666 VERIFY FHB VENTILATION ALIGNEDVERIFY FHB VENTILATION ALIGNEDVERIFY FHB VENTILATION ALIGNEDFOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONFOR EMERGENCY OPERATIONFOR EMERGENCY OPERATION:::

a.a. FHB Charcoal Absorbers - FHB Charcoal Absorbers - ONEONE a.a. Align one train per Align one train per TRAIN ALIGNEDTRAIN ALIGNED:: BwOP VA-6, FUEL HANDLINGBwOP VA-6, FUEL HANDLING

BLDG CHARCOAL BOOSTER FANBLDG CHARCOAL BOOSTER FANoo Train A:Train A: OPERATION.OPERATION.

�� Fan 0VA04CA - Fan 0VA04CA - RUNNINGRUNNING

�� 0VA060Y Charcoal Absorber0VA060Y Charcoal AbsorberInlet Isol damper - Inlet Isol damper - OPENOPEN

�� 0VA057Y Filter Flow0VA057Y Filter FlowControl damper - Control damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED

�� 0VA051Y Charcoal Absorber0VA051Y Charcoal AbsorberBypass Isolation damper -Bypass Isolation damper -CLOSEDCLOSED

-OR--OR-

oo Train B:Train B:

�� Fan 0VA04CB - Fan 0VA04CB - RUNNINGRUNNING

�� 0VA055Y Charcoal Absorber0VA055Y Charcoal AbsorberInlet Isolation damper -Inlet Isolation damper -OPENOPEN

�� 0VA062Y Filter Flow0VA062Y Filter FlowControl damper - Control damper - NOT FULLYNOT FULLYCLOSEDCLOSED

�� 0VA435Y Charcoal Absorber0VA435Y Charcoal AbsorberBypass Isolation damper -Bypass Isolation damper -CLOSEDCLOSED






777 SHUTDOWN UNNECESSARY PLANTSHUTDOWN UNNECESSARY PLANTSHUTDOWN UNNECESSARY PLANTEQUIPMENTEQUIPMENTEQUIPMENT:::

�� Trip all running HD pumpsTrip all running HD pumps

�� Shutdown FW pumps as necessaryShutdown FW pumps as necessaryper:per:

�� oo BwOP FW-2, SHUTDOWN OF ABwOP FW-2, SHUTDOWN OF A�� TURBINE DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATERTURBINE DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATER�� PUMPPUMP

�� oo BwOP FW-8, SHUTDOWN OF ABwOP FW-8, SHUTDOWN OF A�� MOTOR DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATERMOTOR DRIVEN MAIN FEEDWATER�� PUMPPUMP

�� Shutdown all unnecessary CD/CBShutdown all unnecessary CD/CBpumps per BwOP CD/CB-2,pumps per BwOP CD/CB-2,CONDENSATE/CONDENSATE BOOSTERCONDENSATE/CONDENSATE BOOSTERSYSTEM SHUTDOWNSYSTEM SHUTDOWN

�� Shutdown all unnecessary CWShutdown all unnecessary CWpumps per BwOP CW-2,pumps per BwOP CW-2,CIRCULATING WATER PUMP/SYSTEMCIRCULATING WATER PUMP/SYSTEMSHUTDOWNSHUTDOWN






�� 888 INITIATE PERIODIC CHECKING OFINITIATE PERIODIC CHECKING OFINITIATE PERIODIC CHECKING OF�� SPENT FUEL COOLINGSPENT FUEL COOLINGSPENT FUEL COOLING:::

�� a.a. Locally verify SFP level isLocally verify SFP level is a.a. IFIF SFP level drops to the SFP level drops to the �� greater than 420' ELEV (20 FTgreater than 420' ELEV (20 FT 420' ELEV, 420' ELEV, �� above top of fuel)above top of fuel) THENTHEN makeup to the SFP per makeup to the SFP per ��

:: ��

oo BwOP FC-11, SPENT FUELBwOP FC-11, SPENT FUEL ��POOL LEVEL ADJUSTMENTPOOL LEVEL ADJUSTMENT ��

oo 1BwOA REFUEL-2, REACTOR1BwOA REFUEL-2, REACTOR ��CAVITY OR SPENT FUELCAVITY OR SPENT FUEL ��POOL UNCONTROLLED LEVELPOOL UNCONTROLLED LEVEL ��LOSSLOSS ��

�� b.b. Locally verify SFPLocally verify SFP b.b. IFIF SFP temperature is SFP temperature is �� temperature - temperature - STABLESTABLE rising, rising, ��

THENTHEN restore cooling: restore cooling: ��

�� 0BwOA REFUEL-3, LOSS OF0BwOA REFUEL-3, LOSS OF ��SPENT FUEL COOLINGSPENT FUEL COOLING ��

�� c.c. NOTIFY the STA of SFP coolingNOTIFY the STA of SFP cooling�� StatusStatus

999 NOTIFY UNIT SUPERVISOR OF THENOTIFY UNIT SUPERVISOR OF THENOTIFY UNIT SUPERVISOR OF THEFOLLOWINGFOLLOWINGFOLLOWING:::

�� Manual actions takenManual actions taken

�� Failed Equipment statusFailed Equipment status

�� ATTACHMENT B completedATTACHMENT B completed

-END--END-





ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 2)ATTACHMENT C (PG 1 OF 2)MANUAL CS ACTUATIONMANUAL CS ACTUATION

111 CHECK CS VALVE ALIGNMENTCHECK CS VALVE ALIGNMENTCHECK CS VALVE ALIGNMENT:::

a.a. CS pump RWST suction valves -CS pump RWST suction valves - a.a. Manually open valve(s).Manually open valve(s).OPENOPEN::

�� 1CS001A1CS001A�� 1CS001B1CS001B

b.b. CS pump header isol valves -CS pump header isol valves - b.b. IFIF associated CS pump is associated CS pump isOPENOPEN:: NOTNOT running, running,

THENTHEN manually open the manually open the�� 1CS007A1CS007A valve(s).valve(s).�� 1CS007B1CS007B

IFIF associated CS pump is associated CS pump isrunning, running, THENTHEN perform the following perform the followingto open the affectedto open the affectedvalve(s):valve(s):

1)1) Place CS pump(s) inPlace CS pump(s) inPULL OUT.PULL OUT.

2)2) Verify CS pump(s) testVerify CS pump(s) testswitch is in NORMAL.switch is in NORMAL.

3)3) Manually open theManually open thevalve(s) after thevalve(s) after the30 SECOND30 SECOND time delay. time delay.

4)4) Restart CS pump(s).Restart CS pump(s).

c.c. CS eductor spray additiveCS eductor spray additive c.c. Perform the following forPerform the following forvalves - valves - OPENOPEN:: the affected train(s):the affected train(s):

�� 1CS019A1CS019A 1)1) Place CS pump(s) testPlace CS pump(s) test�� 1CS019B1CS019B switch in TEST.switch in TEST.

2)2) Manually open theManually open thevalve(s).valve(s).

3)3) Place CS pump(s) testPlace CS pump(s) testswitch in NORMAL.switch in NORMAL.

d.d. CS eductor inlet flow controlCS eductor inlet flow control d.d. Manually open theManually open thevalves - valves - OPENOPEN:: valve(s).valve(s).

�� 1CS010A1CS010A�� 1CS010B1CS010B





ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 2)ATTACHMENT C (PG 2 OF 2)MANUAL CS ACTUATIONMANUAL CS ACTUATION

222 CHECK CS PUMPS RUNNINGCHECK CS PUMPS RUNNINGCHECK CS PUMPS RUNNING

a.a. CS pumps - CS pumps - AT LEAST ONE RUNNINGAT LEAST ONE RUNNING a.a. Locally start ONE CS pumpLocally start ONE CS pumpper 1BwOA ELEC-5,per 1BwOA ELEC-5,LOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFLOCAL EMERGENCY CONTROL OFSAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT,SAFE SHUTDOWN EQUIPMENT,while continuing with thiswhile continuing with thisprocedure.procedure.

333 RETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 14cRETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 14cRETURN TO MAIN BODY, Step 14c(Page 10)(Page 10)(Page 10)

-END--END-


REV. 204REV. 204REV. 204 OPERATOR ACTION SUMMARYOPERATOR ACTION SUMMARYOPERATOR ACTION SUMMARY 1BwEP-F:01BwEP-F:01BwEP-F:0WOG 2WOG 2WOG 2 FOR 1BwEP-0FOR 1BwEP-0FOR 1BwEP-0

TRIP RCPs WHENTRIP RCPs WHENTRIP RCPs WHEN ::: GO TO 1BwEP ES-1.3 IFGO TO 1BwEP ES-1.3 IFGO TO 1BwEP ES-1.3 IF :::

oo CC water to RCP lostCC water to RCP lost �� RWST level <46%RWST level <46%(affected pumps only)(affected pumps only)

-OR--OR- AF PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE LOWAF PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE LOWAF PUMP SUCTION PRESSURE LOWoo CNMT Phase B actuatedCNMT Phase B actuated ALARM (1-3-A7) LITALARM (1-3-A7) LITALARM (1-3-A7) LIT :::

-OR--OR-oo BOTH of the following conditionsBOTH of the following conditions oo Crosstie unit CSTs perCrosstie unit CSTs per

exist:exist: BwOP CD-2, RAISING CSTBwOP CD-2, RAISING CST LEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BYLEVEL WITH MAKEUP OR BY�� RCS pressure RCS pressure <1425 PSIG<1425 PSIG CROSSTYINGCROSSTYING

-AND- -AND- oo Reduce cooldown rateReduce cooldown rate�� High head SI flow indicatorHigh head SI flow indicator (1FI-917) (1FI-917) >100 GPM>100 GPM or SI or SI AF PUMP SX SUCTION VLVS ARMEDAF PUMP SX SUCTION VLVS ARMEDAF PUMP SX SUCTION VLVS ARMED

pump discharge flow pump discharge flow >200 GPM>200 GPM ALARM (1-3-E7) LITALARM (1-3-E7) LITALARM (1-3-E7) LIT :::

CLOSE ASSOCIATED 1AF013 VALVESCLOSE ASSOCIATED 1AF013 VALVESCLOSE ASSOCIATED 1AF013 VALVES �� Verify operating AF pumpsVerify operating AF pumpsAFTER STEP 15 COMPLETION IF AAFTER STEP 15 COMPLETION IF AAFTER STEP 15 COMPLETION IF A SX suction valves open:SX suction valves open:SG TUBE RUPTURE IS IDENTIFIEDSG TUBE RUPTURE IS IDENTIFIEDSG TUBE RUPTURE IS IDENTIFIED oo 1AF006A and 1AF017A1AF006A and 1AF017A ANDANDAND oo 1AF006B and 1AF017B1AF006B and 1AF017BAFFECTED SG NARROW RANGE LEVELAFFECTED SG NARROW RANGE LEVELAFFECTED SG NARROW RANGE LEVEL >10% (31% ADVERSE CNMT)>10% (31% ADVERSE CNMT)>10% (31% ADVERSE CNMT) : : : *** AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%AF PUMP DAY TANK LEVEL <50%

oo Level rising in an Level rising in an �� Refill the day tankRefill the day tankuncontrolled manner uncontrolled manner

-OR- -OR- IF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANYIF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANYIF FLOW IS LOST/ISOLATED TO ANYoo Abnormal secondary radiationAbnormal secondary radiation SG AND NR SG LEVEL LESS THAN ORSG AND NR SG LEVEL LESS THAN ORSG AND NR SG LEVEL LESS THAN OR

EQUAL TO 45% FOR GREATER THANEQUAL TO 45% FOR GREATER THANEQUAL TO 45% FOR GREATER THAN75 MINUTES, THEN75 MINUTES, THEN75 MINUTES, THEN :::

Feed affected SG(s) betweenFeed affected SG(s) between 60 GPM60 GPM and and 80 GPM80 GPM for for

10 MINUTES10 MINUTES prior to restoring prior to restoringdesired feedwater flowdesired feedwater flow

REV. 204REV. 204REV. 204 CONTINUOUS ACTION SUMMARYCONTINUOUS ACTION SUMMARYCONTINUOUS ACTION SUMMARY 1BwEP-C:01BwEP-C:01BwEP-C:0WOG 2WOG 2WOG 2 FOR 1BwEP-0FOR 1BwEP-0FOR 1BwEP-0

141414 CHECK IF CS IS REQUIRED (while in this procedure)CHECK IF CS IS REQUIRED (while in this procedure)CHECK IF CS IS REQUIRED (while in this procedure) :::

IF CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) IF CNMT pressure (1PR-937 or 1PI-CS934 thru 1PI-CS937) HAS RISEN TO GREATER THAN HAS RISEN TO GREATER THAN 20 PSIG20 PSIG, THEN:, THEN:

1) Stop all RCPs1) Stop all RCPs

2) Verify Group 6 CS monitor lights - 2) Verify Group 6 CS monitor lights - LITLIT

3) Verify Group 6 Phase B isolation monitor lights - 3) Verify Group 6 Phase B isolation monitor lights - LITLIT

4) Verify CS eductor suction flow on running pump(s) - 4) Verify CS eductor suction flow on running pump(s) - GREATER THAN 15 GPMGREATER THAN 15 GPM::

5) Verify CS eductor additive flow on running pump(s) - 5) Verify CS eductor additive flow on running pump(s) - GREATER THAN 5 GPMGREATER THAN 5 GPM::

191919 CHECK RCS TEMPERATURES (while in this procedure)CHECK RCS TEMPERATURES (while in this procedure)CHECK RCS TEMPERATURES (while in this procedure) :::

o Any RCP running - o Any RCP running - RCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURERCS AVERAGE TEMPERATURE STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557��FF -OR- -OR- o NO RCPs running - o NO RCPs running - RCS COLD LEG TEMPERATURESRCS COLD LEG TEMPERATURES STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557STABLE AT OR TRENDING TO 557��FF

262626 CHECK SG LEVELSCHECK SG LEVELSCHECK SG LEVELS :::

Maintain total feed flow greater than Maintain total feed flow greater than 500 GPM500 GPM until narrow until narrow range level is greater than range level is greater than 10%10% in at least one SG. in at least one SG.

Control feed flow to maintain narrow range levels - Control feed flow to maintain narrow range levels - BETWEEN 10% AND 50%BETWEEN 10% AND 50%

IF narrow range level in any SG continues to rise in an IF narrow range level in any SG continues to rise in an uncontrolled manner, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-3. uncontrolled manner, THEN GO TO 1BwEP-3.

303030 CHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BE STOPPEDCHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BE STOPPEDCHECK IF RH PUMPS SHOULD BE STOPPED :::

IF RCS pressure is less than IF RCS pressure is less than 325 PSIG325 PSIG, , THEN GO TO 1BwEP-1. THEN GO TO 1BwEP-1.

Stop RH pumps and place in standby if:Stop RH pumps and place in standby if:

1) RCS pressure - 1) RCS pressure - GREATER THAN 325 PSIGGREATER THAN 325 PSIG ANDAND

2) RCS pressure - 2) RCS pressure - STABLE OR RISINGSTABLE OR RISING

SIM-601

Page 1 of 5

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an assist NSO. 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1. 3. The 1B D/G was manually started, and is currently supplying bus 142 (DG is only source currently feeding bus

142) for a special engineering test. The test is now complete. 4. Breaker 1424 is closed to prevent equipment sequencing onto bus 142

INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to synchronize bus 142 to SAT 142-2 per BwOP AP-32. 2. During a pre-job brief it was determined that step F.1 and F.3 of BwOP AP-32 are N/A. Step

F.2 is complete. You are to continue at step F.4 of BwOP AP-32.

SIM-601

Page 2 of 5

TASK TITLE: Synchronize a SAT to a Bus Being Fed by an Emergency Diesel Generator JPM No.: SIM-601 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4D.AP-03 K&A No.: 062000A4.07 TASK No.: R-AP-013, Sync. SAT to bus fed by D/G K&A IMP: 3.1/3.1 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 3, 4 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 19 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. BwOP AP-32, Rev. 5, Synchronizing a SAT to a Bus Being Fed by a DG. MATERIALS:

1. BwOP AP-32, Rev. 5. TASK STANDARDS:

1. Correctly synchronize SAT 142-2 to a bus being fed by the 1B D/G. TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an assist NSO. 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1. 3. The 1B D/G was manually started, and is currently supplying bus 142 (DG is only source currently feeding

bus 142) for a special engineering test. The test is now complete. 4. Breaker 1424 is closed to prevent equipment sequencing onto bus 142

INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to synchronize bus 142 to SAT 142-2 per BwOP AP-32. 2. During a pre-job brief it was determined that step F.1 and F.3 of BwOP AP-32 are N/A. Step

F.2 is complete. You are to continue at step F.4 of BwOP AP-32.

SIM-601

Page 3 of 5

RECORD START TIME Note: Provide a copy of BwOP AP-32 to the examinee.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable 1. Refer to BwOP AP-32.

CUE: All Prerequisites,

Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.

Open BwOP AP-32.


2. Verify 1B D/G is operating properly.

VERIFY 1B D/G is operating properly as follows: • 1B D/G frequency is

approximately 60 hz. • 1B D/G voltage is

approximately 4160 volts.


*3. Prepare 1B D/G for parallel operation with SAT 142-2.

Prepare 1B D/G for parallel operations as follows: • TURN ACB 1422

Synchroscope Switch ON. • USING the 1B D/G voltage

adjust control, adjust the “RUNNING” voltage slightly HIGHER than the “INCOMING” voltage (0-4 volts).

o VERIFY the same voltage on ‘AB’, ‘BC’, and ‘CA’ with the 1B D/G Voltmeter selector switch.

• USING the 1B D/G governor adjust control, ADJUST generator speed such that the synchroscope is rotating slowly in the SLOW direction.


*4. Parallel the 1B D/G to SAT 142-2.

Parallel the 1B D/G to SAT 142-2 as follows: • When the synchroscope is

slightly before the 12 o’clock position, CLOSE ACB 1422.

o VERIFY the synchroscope has LOCKED IN at the 12 o’clock position.

o TURN the synchroscope switch for ACB 1422 to OFF.

o Adjust 1B D/G KVARs as needed.


5. Restore breaker positions. CUE: When asked, ACB 2424 is

in after trip.

Restore breaker positions as follows: • OPEN ACB 1424 • PLACE ACB 2424 in AFTER

TRIP.


SIM-601

Page 4 of 5

6. Unload 1B D/G per BwOP DG-12. CUE: The US will direct another

NSO to unload the 1B D/G.

Refer to BwOP DG-12 to unload 1B D/G.



SIM-601

Page 5 of 5

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-601 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE(S): Any ‘At Power’ IC. MALFUNCTION #’S: N/A COMMENTS:

1. Swap to 1B SX pump to put load on Bus 142. 2. Place 1B D/G auto recluse circuit arm switch in SURV TEST. 3. Start 1B D/G and sync to grid. 4. Load 1B D/G until SAT feed amps = 0. 5. Close 1424. 6. Open 1422. 7. Turn on 1422 synchroscope and adjust 1B D/G speed until the synchroscope is rotating in the FAST

direction. 8. Adjust 1B D/G voltage so “running” voltage is LOWER than “incoming” voltage. 9. Turn off 1422 synchroscope. Leave Synchroscope Key Switch in 1423 but OFF. 10. Ensure the Governor Adjuster and the Voltage Adjuster are not “set” at values that happen to be exactly

what the examinee needs (i.e. the intent is to force the examinee to manipulate the controls).

BwOP AP-32 Revision 5 Continuous Use

1

SYNCHRONIZING A SAT TO A BUS BEING FED BY A DG A.

STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY

This procedure outlines the steps necessary to parallel a SAT to a BUS being fed by a Diesel Generator.

B.

REFERENCES

1. Station Procedures: a. BwOP DG-12, Diesel Generator Shutdown. b. BwOP DG-13, Trouble Shooting Diesel Generators.

2. Station Drawings:

a. 20E-0-4001 b. 20E-0-4000B

3. Station Commitment: 456-103-84-0690051 Step D.5.

C.

PREREQUISITES

1. The diesel generator is running and feeding its respective bus. 2. Diesel generator control MODE switch in REMOTE. 3. Notify Security one hour prior to energizing/de-energizing overhead lines that

intersect the PA boundary.


2

D. PRECAUTIONS 1. Continuous rating of generator is 5500 Kw. 2. Short term maximum (2 hours) rating of generator is 6050 Kw. 3. Minimum continuous steady-state loading on the diesel generator is 3000 Kw. 4. When a Diesel Generator is in the Emergency MODE and paralleled to the grid

DO NOT

return the Emergency MODE Speed Voltage C/S to Auto if it is currently in the Manual Emergency position. This will prevent Isochronous operation while in parallel.

* 5. Operate only ONE

Emergency Diesel Generator in parallel with offsite power at any one time. This will prevent damage to more than one Diesel Generator if a fault condition develops on the grid.

E.

LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. Adhere to the following Generator load limits when DG is in parallel with offsite power: a. Continuous rating - 5500 KW and ≤ 1000

KVAR.

b. 2000 Hour Rating - 5935 KW and ≤ 1000

KVAR.

c. Two Hour Rating - 6050 KW and ≤ 1000

KVAR.

2. Refer to BwOP DG-13 if diesel generator trip/trouble occurs.


3

F.

MAIN BODY

CAUTION if the Diesel Generator started due to a loss of off site power, the Diesel Generator Output Breaker may trip if the Mode Control Switch is placed in "MANUAL TEST MODE".

NOTE

If the diesel generator was started manually, Step 1 is not necessary. The MODE control switch may be left in auto.

NOTE

Do not close in SAT Feed Breaker if a Degraded Voltage Condition (<3990

VAC) exists on the off site power source (switchyard).

1. VERIFY/PLACE the Diesel Generator in "Manual Emerg MODE" to enable speed

and voltage control. 2. If synchronizing the SAT to the UNIT 1 ESF Bus, perform the following:

a. VERIFY/PLACE ACB 2414/2424 CONTROL Switch in the PULL TO

LOCK position. b. TURN the ACB 1414/1424 Synchroscope Switch to “ON

”.

NOTE The following step will cause the DG to shift to DROOP mode. The engine may run slower as noted by a drop in RPM and Frequency.

c. CLOSE ACB 1414/1424 to place the Diesel Generator in the DROOP

MODE. d. TURN the ACB 1414/1424 Synchroscope Switch to “OFF

”.


4

F. 3. If synchronizing the SAT to the UNIT 2 ESF Bus perform the following: a. VERIFY/PLACE ACB 1414/1424 CONTROL Switch in the PULL TO

LOCK position. b. TURN the ACB 2414/2424 Synchroscope Switch to “ON

”.

NOTE The following step will cause the DG to shift to DROOP mode. The engine may run slower as noted by a drop in RPM and Frequency.

c. CLOSE ACB 2414/2424 to place the Diesel Generator in the DROOP

MODE. d. TURN the ACB 2414/2424 Synchroscope Switch to “OFF

”.

4. VERIFY/ADJUST the diesel generator frequency to approximately 60 hz and voltage to approximately 4160

volts.

5. TURN the SAT Feed Bkr Synchroscope Switch to "ON

".

6. USING the diesel generator voltage adjust control, adjust the "RUNNING" voltage slightly HIGHER

than the "INCOMING" voltage (0-4 volts).

7. VERIFY the same voltage on "AB", "BC", and "CA" with Diesel Gen Voltmeter selector switch.

8. USING the diesel generator governor adjust control, ADJUST generator speed

such that the synchroscope is rotating slowly in the SLOW

direction.

9. When the synchroscope is slightly before the "12 o'clock" position, CLOSE the SAT Feed Breaker.

10. VERIFY the synchroscope has LOCKED IN at the "12 o'clock" position. 11. TURN the SAT Feed Breaker Synchroscope Switch to "OFF

".

12. OPEN the ACB that was closed in step F.2.c./3.c. 13. VERIFY/PLACE ACB CONTROL Switches for all breakers in steps F.2.a. and

F.3.a. to the AFTER TRIP position. 14. UNLOAD the diesel generator per BwOP DG-12.

(Final)

SIM-707

Page 1 of 4

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO. 2. Both units are at full power with all systems normal for current plant conditions. 3. System Engineering is preparing to perform the incore detector operability surveillance, and needs the

Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor audible alarm disabled. INITIATING CUES: The US has directed you to disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor for Unit 1 per BwOP IC-9, step F.1.a.

SIM-707

Page 2 of 4

TASK TITLE: Operate a Rad Monitor (Disable Incore Seal Table Monitor Audible Alarm) JPM No.: SIM-707 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.AR-03 K&A No.: 073000A4.02 TASK No.: R-AR-001, Operate the RM-11 Rad K&A IMP: 3.7/3.7 Monitoring System EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 2, 3 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 9 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. BwOP IC-9, Rev. 21, Movable Incore Detector Operation 2. TRM 3.3.a. Movable Incore Detectors

MATERIALS:

1. BwOP IC-9, Rev. 21 TASK STANDARDS:

1. Disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Radiation Monitor. TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO. 2. Both units are at full power with all systems normal for current plant conditions. 3. System Engineering is preparing to perform the incore detector operability surveillance and needs the

Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor audible alarm disabled. INITIATING CUES:

1. The US has directed you to disable the audible alarm of the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor for Unit 1 per BwOP IC-9, step F.1.a.

SIM-707

Page 3 of 4

RECORD START TIME

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable 1. Refer to BwOP IC-9

CUE: After the student locates

correct procedure, provide a copy. All Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions have been met.

Locate and open the following: • BwOP IC-9, Step F.1.a


*2. Select 1AR014J skid on RM-11.

Channel 4303 is entered. 1AR014J has white cursor surrounding it.

Select 1AR014J skid at the RM-11 keyboard as follows: • PLACE the RM-11 in

Supervisor mode. • SELECT grid 4 on the RM-

11. • DEPRESS, in order, 4, 3, 0,

3. • DEPRESS SEL.


*3. Disable the audible alarm for the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor. Channel Item button

pushed. 16 inserted, Select pushbutton pushed.

CUE: As US and Unit NSOs, acknowledge notification of expected RM-11 alarm. 0 inserted, Enter button pushed. RM-11 in Normal mode.

CUE: As US/NSO acknowledge report of audible alarm disabled.

Disable the audible alarm for the Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor as follows: • Push the CHANNEL ITEM

button. • On the keypad, TYPE 16

and push the SELECT pushbutton.

o Notify US and both Unit NSOs of expected alarm on the RM-11 due to next step.

• On the keypad, TYPE 0 and

PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.

o PLACE the RM-11 to NORMAL mode.

o Inform US/NSO audible Alarm for Incore Seal Table Rad Monitor is disabled.



SIM-707

Page 4 of 4

SIMULATOR SETUP INSTRUCTIONS JPM NO: SIM-707 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): At power with RM-11 operating. MALFUNCTION #’S: N/A COMMENTS:

1. Ensure Seal Table Rad Monitor (Grid 4, 4303), is enabled by selecting Channel Item 16 and entering a ‘1’. 2. Place RM-11 on Grid 1. 3. Ensure RM-11 NOT in supervisory mode.

PROCEDUREBwOP IC-9

BRAIDWOOD STATIONUNIT NO. REVISION NO.

21

PROCEDURE TITLE:

MOVABLE INCORE DETECTOR OPERATION

Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable)18 This procedure is being revised to reflect the

installation of the Replacement Plant Process Computer on Unit 1.

EC 375574ATI 1172997-11

19 Inserted table on page 11 that was inadvertently removed in previous revision.

PCRA 1364041-01

20 Add defeat/restoration steps for Loose Parts 1VE-LM003 and 1VE-LM004 Alarms for Flux Maps. Added step to Attachment A step G to return the DRIVE SELECTOR switch back to the ALL position, if desired.Reformat Attachment B to clarify actions to clear a blocked thimble.

PCRA 1371608-02PCRA 1408795-02

21 Changes steps F.3.g, F.3.i and Figure 1 per EC 391242 due to thimble blockage at core positions L10 and R11.

PCRA 1435306-03EC 391242

BwOP IC-9Revision 21Continuous Use

1

MOVABLE INCORE DETECTOR OPERATION

A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY

The purpose of this procedure is to perform an operability check of the Incore Detector (IC) System pursuant to TRM 3.3.a. Also, this procedure describes the steps necessary to move the incore detectors to map the core and place back in storage.

Testing will be performed at the interval of at least once per 24 hours, applicable when the IC System is used for recalibration of the excore neutron flux detector system, monitoring the Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio (in accordance with Tech Spec SR 3.2.4.2), or measurement of FN

H, FCQ (Z), W(Z), FW

Q (Z), and calibration of the Power Distribution System (PDMS).

B. REFERENCES

1. Tech Specs:

a. TRM 3.3.a, Movable Incore Detectors.

b. 3.2.4, Quadrant Power Tilt Ratio.

c. TRM 3.3.h, Power Distribution Monitoring System.

2. Station Drawings (Specification 2702, S.O. 360):

a. 6062D83, Sheet 4.

b. 43118, Sheets 2, 3 and 5, Unit 1.

c. 43119, Sheets 2, 3 and 5, Unit 2.

d. 27650, Sheets 3 and 5.

e. 27641, Sheet 9.

f. 43118, Sheet 1-6.

3. Vendor Manual: Technical Manual for Incore Instrumentation Byron/Braidwood Units 1 & 2 (2702-360) Book 1 & 2.


2

B. 4. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP IC-E1/E2, Electrical Lineup.

b. BwOP IC-M1/M2, Mechanical Lineup.

c. NF-AP-576, Determination of Rod Position Using Movable Incore Detector System (MIDS).

C. PREREQUISITES

1. Notify the Shift Manager that this surveillance involves movements of the incore movable detectors and as a result, no personnel should be allowed in containment until this procedure is complete unless there is an incore operability concern.

2. The main power circuit breakers should be closed and power turned on to each detector readout panel for at least 30 minutes before using the flux mapping system. Move the detectors to the bottom of the core to warm up, if the core is to be flux mapped. (Data taken.)

3. BwOP IC-E1/E2 applicable portions completed.

4. BwOP IC-M1/M2 completed.

5. There are sufficient movable detectors, detector drives and strip chart recorders, or disc space (paperless recorder) to collect the required data via the process computer.

6. Compact Flash Cards 2-4Gb or larger will be required for data storage from each of the recorders that will be used. (Only required if actually taking data.)


3

D. PRECAUTIONS

1. Personnel may be allowed in containment while the detectors are in a fully withdrawn position to address an operability problem or concern that exists with an Incore Detector(s). (Refer to BwAP 1450 –1 Access to Containment requirements with incore capable of moving.)

2. Irradiated detectors, in the withdrawn or parked position, may pose a radiation hazard. Personnel required to be working around the Incore Detector System should follow the specific requirements of the applicable RWP and Radiation Protection Dept.

3. Reactor Coolant System controlling parameters (i.e. temperature, xenon distribution, and boron concentration) as well as power level should be constant during the core map or as directed by a Qualified Nuclear Engineer (QNE) or designee.

4. Obtain the permission of the Shift Manager or designee prior to operating the IC system.

5. Care must be taken not to drive the detectors into the top of the core, withdraw the detectors past the safety limit switch or change the position of the Operation Selector Switch while the detector is inserted beyond the withdrawal limit switch.

6. Watch for slippage of the detector drive clutch. This can be observed by detector position lights stopping while the detector drive is still in operation.

7. Operation SELECTOR and PATH SELECTOR switch positions are not to be changed unless the detector is at its withdrawal limit. If the withdrawn limit switch is disabled for an inoperable detector, the PATH SELECTOR switch may be changed for emergency passes.

8. Inoperable detector drives may be maintained in the OFF position. Steps associated with operation of inoperable drives may be marked N/A.

9. Inoperable detector path may be placed in the OFF position during the particular pass. Steps associated with operation of inoperable paths may be marked N/A.

10. Do NOT attempt to unblock a path that was previously identified as being blocked without Operations Management approval. Attempting to unblock a path can lead to the loss of detector function or other system capabilities due to unavailable 10-paths. Authorized attempts should consider what affect losing a detector and associated equipment have on the system, as well as required equipment per TLCO 3.3.a. A list of previously identified blocked paths can be found in the Incore Limits Operator Aid.


4

D. 11. When the START pushbutton on the electronic recorders is pushed, the recorder will begin recording at low speed (10 hours/division). Once the trace is triggered by the external contact to the recorder, it will shift to high speed (25 millisecond/division). The recorder will continue recording, generating a new file every 3 hours. The recorder may be stopped at any time by pressing the STOP pushbutton. Stopping the recorder will transfer the data file to the recorder’s internal memory and the inserted compact flash card (if applicable).

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS

1. Definitions of terms for the Incore movable detectors:

Stored: Shielded storage location in the wall of the Incore Seal Table Room, or the bottom of the Reactor Vessel.

Withdrawn: Located at the withdrawal limit switch at the Incore Detector Drive(s).

Parked: Located in a stationary position anywhere between the Incore Detector Drive motors and the Reactor Core.

2. Manual operation of the detector drives may be utilized provided that the detectors are not withdrawn past the drive respective “zero” as indicated on the associated DETECTOR POSITION indications.

3. Flux mapping operations should only be performed while reactor is at a nearly constant power level. Neutron flux variations should be kept to less than 5% per hour/or as directed by a QNE.

4. A work group may be in containment provided all Containment Access Procedure steps for MIDS operation are adhered to/enforced.

5. Steps of this procedure may be repeated as necessary.


5

F. MAIN BODY

NOTEF.1. will align the radiation monitor, set the detectors to bottom of core for heatup, plant computer and recorders.F.2. will perform Incore Detector Operability.F.3. will perform a Full Core Flux Map.F.4. will restore the system.Attachment A directs normal incore operation.Attachment B directs incore troubleshooting.Attachment C directs emergency/common passes.Attachment D removes/restores a 5-path from rotating.

NOTEFor troubleshooting the IC system, use any applicable steps and data sheets as directed by the Unit Supervisor or Reactor Engineering.

NOTESteps may be N/A by the Unit Supervisor or Reactor Engineer as conditions warrant.

NOTEDisabling the Audible Alarm Capability of the General Atomics RM-11 in the Control Room may be necessary to reduce the possibility of the RM-11 overloading the Radiation Monitor System Computer during flux mapping. This is due to frequent alarms from _RE-AR003, Incore Seal Table Room.

NOTEIf a zero is inserted into channel item 16, the channel will be inoperable. If a one is inserted into channel item 16, the channel will be operable.


6

F. 1. ALIGN the rad monitor, plant computer, loose parts, and recorders per the following steps:

a. Defeat Alarms

1) VERIFY/ PERFORM the following to remove the audible alarm capability of the detector 4AS303/5AS303 (U1/U2 incore seal table detector) on the General Atomics RM-11 in the main control room.

a) PLACE the RM-11 in SUPERVISOR Mode.

b) SELECT grid four on the RM-11.

c) On the keypad, TYPE 4303/5303 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton (this will cue up the U1/U2 incore seal table detector).

d) PUSH the CHANNEL ITEM pushbutton on the RM-11.

e) On the keypad, TYPE 16 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton.

f) NOTIFY Unit NSO, the opposite Unit NSO, and Unit Supervisor of expected alarm on the RM-11 due to the next step.

g) On the keypad, TYPE 0 and PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.

h) PLACE the RM-11 to NORMAL mode.

NOTEEnsure proper coverage per TRM 3.3.d prior to defeating alarms in the following step.

2) VERIFY/PERFORM the following to disable Loose Parts Alarms:

a) ENTER TRM LCO 3.3.d for the 1VE-LM003 and 1VE-LM004.

b) At 1PA44J, PLACE the ALM ENABLE/DEFEAT Switch to ALM DEFEAT for:

1VE-LM003

1VE-LM004


7

NOTEAttachment A provides guidance on how to operate the Incore Drive System. Refer to these steps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

NOTEIf a problem occurs during Incore operations that require troubleshooting, refer to Attachment B of this procedure.

NOTEIf an individual Drive Selector Switch is in the OFF position, that drive will not operate.

NOTEIf a detector cannot be withdrawn from storage, use ATTACHMENT D to allow access to the appropriate Drive's 10 path.

F. 1. b. VERIFY/WITHDRAW the operable incore detectors per Attachment A to allow for warm-up of detector.

c. PERFORM ATTACHMENT D for any operable detectors that cannot be withdrawn (N/A if all withdrew).


8

F. 1. d. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the following switch configurations on the DETECTOR CONTROL panels for each operable detector. (This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

1) PLACE the OPERATION SELECTOR switches in NORMAL for all known operable detectors.

2) PLACE the OPERATION SELECTOR switches in OFF for all known inoperable detectors.

3) PLACE PATH SELECTOR switch to locations of highest relative power (Desired Paths). If the thimble listed is not available, a different thimble that is as close to the center of the core as possible may be used (Make note in table below).

PATH SELECTOR SWITCHES

Detector Desired PathAlternative Path(N/A if not used)

A Path 5B Path 5C Path 1D Path 1E Path 8F Path 1

e. INSERT all operable detectors to the bottom of the core per Attachment A to start the 30 minute warm-up. (This step may be N/A if flux map data is not required.)

_________________________Warm-Up Start Time


9

F. 1. f. INITIALIZE the Flux Map Storage on the process computer, zeroing out all the previous passes, by performing the following: (This step may be N/A if flux map data is not required.)

1) On the PPC Main Menu screen SELECT Operator Demandable.

2) On the Operator Demandable screen SELECT Moveable Detectors (Flux Mapping).

3) On the Flux Mapping Traverse screen SELECT Create New Map.

4) ENTER the following data on the Flux Mapping new Map Data window (Data may be obtained from Reactor Engineering):

Description

Map number

Reactor Power (%)

Burnup (MWD/MTU)

5) SELECT Create.

NOTESubsections of this step may be re-performed as necessary to properly setup the paperless recorders.

g. IF required by Reactor Engineering, PERFORM the following to VERIFY the paperless recorders are setup to record flux map data: (Parts of this step may be N/A if flux map data is not required.)

1) VERIFY that a 2-4Gb Compact Flash Card is in the recorders being used.

2) PRESS the green START button on the recorder to begin basic recording. (This starts the recording in slow speed at a rate of 10 hours/division.)

3) VERIFY light located on the electronic recorder’s control panel is green.


10

F. 2. PERFORM Incore Detector Operability.

NOTEAttachment A provides guidance on how to operate the Incore Drive System. Refer to these steps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

NOTEIf a problem occurs during Incore operations that requiretroubleshooting, refer to Attachment B of this procedure.

NOTEIf section F.2 has been performed within the past 24 hours and the plant has remained stable, F.2.a. through F.2.e may be marked N/A.

a. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the following switch configurations on the COMMON CONTROLS panel.

1) COMPUTER switch in OFF.

2) MAIN POWER switch in ON.

3) AUTO-MANUAL switch in AUTO.

4) SPEED switch in LOW.

5) DRIVE SELECTOR switch in ALL.


11

F. 2. b. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the following configurations on the DETECTOR READOUT panels for each operable detector. (This step may be N/A if flux map data is not required).

1) PLACE EXTERNAL RECORD switch in REC.

2) VERIFY/ADJUST RECORDER POTENTIOMETER Readings to values as listed below or as directed by the System Engineer.

Unit 1 A – 2.01 B – 2.01 C – 1.75 D – 1.99 E – 1.98 F – 1.45

Unit 2 A – 2.02 B – 1.51 C – 1.98 D – 2.00 E – 2.02 F – 2.02

3) RECORD RECORDER POTENTIOMETER settings in the table below if they differ from the above. (N/A if above settings are used)

A – B – C – D – E – F –

c. VERIFY 30 minute warm up complete.

_________________________(Warm up time complete) 30 minutes + time from Step F.1.e.(This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

d. PERFORM a Detector Operating Voltage Determination/Check with the following steps: (This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

1) DEPRESS the SCAN pushbutton on the Common Controls Panel to scan all operable detectors to the top of the core.

2) OBSERVE/DETERMINE the location of the highest Relative Neutron Flux.

3) PLACE AUTO-MANUAL switch on the COMMON CONTROLS panel to MANUAL.

4) PLACE recorders in service.

a) INSERT Compact Flash Card and VERIFY boot program is complete for the paperless recorders (N/A if not used or previously performed per step F.1.g.).

b) VERIFY light located on the electronic recorder’s panel is green.


12

F. 2. d. 5) PLACE the INSERT-OFF-WITHDRAW switch on the COMMON CONTROLS panel to WITHDRAW to drive the operable detectors into the core until the detectors reach their approximate maximum flux value.

6) ADJUST the RANGE switch as necessary to ensure the strip chart recorders remain on scale.

7) RECORD the As Found voltage setting for each operable detector.

As Found Voltages

Detector A V Detector D VDetector B V Detector E VDetector C V Detector F V

8) SET each operable detector's voltage to approximately 0 volts to determine the recorder’s pen moves.

9) ADJUST each operable voltage to 80 volts.

10) RECORD % full scale of recorders on Table 1.

11) INCREASE each operable detector's voltage by approximately 10volts.

12) RECORD % full scale of recorders on Table 1.

13) REPEAT previous two steps until each operable detector's voltage is approximately 150 volts. FILL in the data on Table 1 for each 10-volt increment.

Table 1Moveable Incore Detectors Operability Check

Detector Voltage

A % Full Scale of Recorder

B % Full Scale of Recorder

C % Full Scale of Recorder

D % Full Scale of Recorder

E % Full Scale of Recorder

F % Full Scale of Recorder

8090

100110120130140150


13

F. 2. d. 14) From the data recorded in step above, SELECT a range of approximately 20 volts where the detector output varies the least.

Detector A _________ V to _________ V

Detector B _________ V to _________ V

Detector C _________ V to _________ V

Detector D _________ V to _________ V

Detector E _________ V to _________ V

Detector F _________ V to _________ V

15) RECORD the midpoint of this range and have an Independent Verification of the results.

Detector Midpoint IV

A __________ V

B __________ V

C __________ V

D __________ V

E __________ V

F __________ V

16) ADJUST Operating Voltages for each operable detector to the midpoint value specified in the previous step.

Detector Adjusted Midpoint Initial/Date

A __________ V ___________/_______

B __________ V ___________/_______

C __________ V ___________/_______

D __________ V ___________/_______

E __________ V ___________/_______

F __________ V ___________/_______

17) RECORD the time and date the Detector Operating Voltage Determination/Check was completed.

Time: ___________ Date: ___________

e. On each individual control ROTATE the current selector switch through each current position. (This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)


14

NOTEStep F.3. will perform a full core flux map. If it is desired to perform a partial, quarter or a QPTR flux map then transition to the applicable T-sheet at step F.3.d. of this procedure.

BwOP IC-9T3 directs a partial flux map.BwOP IC-9T4 directs a quarter flux map.BwOP IC-9T5 directs a QPTR flux map.

F. 3. PERFORM a FULL CORE Flux Map by performing the following:

a. VERIFY/PERFORM the following at the COMMON CONTROLS panel:

1) AUTO-MANUAL switch in AUTO.

2) PUSH WITHDRAW pushbutton to withdraw all operable detectors to the withdrawn position.

3) COMPUTER Switch in ON.

4) VERIFY light located on the electronic recorder’s panel is green.


15

NOTEBwOP IC-9 Attachment A is a reference step on how to operate the Incore Drive System under normal conditions. Refer to the appropriate substeps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

F. 3. b. RECORD the following information prior to the Flux Map:(This step may be N/A if Flux map data is not required.)

SBA ______ SBB ______ SBC ______ SBD ______ SBE ______

CBA ______ CBB ______ CBC ______ CBD ______

Unit: Cycle:

Time: Date:

Power: % Flux map ID #:

c. Reason for taking map or using the system:

Monthly Surveillance.

Incore/Excore Calibration.

PDMS Calibration.

System Checkout.

Troubleshooting.

Other, specify:

d. VERIFY no personnel in Containment, if applicable

e. If performing a full core flux map continue with the next step, otherwise transition to the applicable T-sheet:

BwOP IC-9T3 directs a partial flux map.

BwOP IC-9T4 directs a quarter flux map.

BwOP IC-9T5 directs a QPTR flux map.


16

F. 3. f. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 1.

ALIGN Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as follows:A B C D E F

Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal--(J-10) 1 (D-10) 1 (G-9) 1 (J-7) 1 (K-12) 1 (D-8)

PATH Switch Position Aligned per above.

VERIFY Operations Selector Switch in position required above.

VERIFY no personnel in Containment. (This step may be N/A if a Work Group is in Containment.)

DEPRESS INSERT Pushbutton.

DEPRESS SCAN Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on Scale.

DEPRESS RECORD Pushbutton.

VERIFY all Strip Chart Recorders remained on scale.

VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)(N/A if flux map data not required.)

ENTER the time of the pass in the adjacent box.

DEPRESS WITHDRAW Pushbutton.

COMPLETE NIS Power Range Channel Data Table if reactor power 5% or COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5% (N/A if not applicable).


17

F. 3 f. RECORD NIS POWER RANGE CHANNEL DATA (N/A if < 5% power or deemed not necessary by RE):

Detector Currents (Ma) and Percent PowerPass

#Channel 41 Channel 42 Channel 43 Channel 44

//////// Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q Top Bot Q

1

Delta Flux (%) (MCB Meters and Computer) 10 MinutePass

#_NI-41C _NI-42C _NI-43C _NI-44C

Calorimetric Power (%)

1

//////// CH 41 CH 42 CH 43 CH 44 ///////////////////

1 ///////////////////

RECORD NIS INTERMEDIATE RANGE DATA TABLE (N/A if > 5% power):

Detector Currents (Amps)

Pass # Channel 35 Channel 36Reactivity Computer Pico

Ammeter Reading (If applicable)

1


18

F. 3. g. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 2.


Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal2 (R-11)

1 (H-15) --(J-10) 2 (R-8)OFF * (U2)

2 (F-14) 2 (H-2)

* Capped per EC 391242 (A2R16)












COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5% (N/A if not applicable).





2


19

F. 3. h. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 3.


Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal2 (K-2) 2 (A-11) --(J-10) 3 (B-8) 3 (H-4) 3 (B-3)

















3


20

F. 3. i. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 4.


Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal3 (L-10) (U1)OFF * (U2)

3 (K-6) 3 (C-5) --(J-10) 4 (M-7) 4 (L-15)

* Capped per EC 391242 (A2R16)

















4


21

F. 3. j. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 5.


Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal4 (P-4) 4 (F-1) 4 (B-13) 4 (L-13) --(J-10) 5 (N-6)

















5


22

F. 3. k. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 6.


Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate5 (H-6) 5 (F-7) 5 (H-11) 5 (N-4) 5 (N-13) -- (J-10)












COMPLETE NIS Power Range Channel Data Table if reactor power 5% or COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%. (N/A if not applicable.)


23

F. 3. k. RECORD NIS POWER RANGE CHANNEL DATA (N/A if < 5% power or deemed not necessary by RE):




6


#_NI-41C _NI-42C _NI-43C _NI-44C


6

//////// CH 41 CH 42 CH 43 CH 44 ///////////////////

6 ///////////////////





6


24

F. 3. l. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 7.


Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal--(J-10) 6 (R-6) 6 (J-14) 6 (D-14) 6 (J-8) 6 (G-12)

















7


25

F. 3. m. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 8.


Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal Normal6 (D-12) --(J-10) 7 (J-1) 7 (G-5) 7 (C-7) 7 (A-9)

















8


26

F. 3. n. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 9.


Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal Normal7 (B-6) 7 (N-14) --(J-10) 8 (D-3) 8 (F-8) 8 (P-9)

















9


27

F. 3. o. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 10.


Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal Normal8 (E-9) 8 (N-2) 8 (L-8) --(J-10) 9 (C-8) 9 (N-8)

















10


28

F. 3. p. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 11.


Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate Normal9 (H-3) 9 (H-13) 9 (F-3) 10 (L-11) --(J-10) 1 (D-8)

















11


29

F. 3. q. PLACE a check () when complete for Pass 12.


Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Calibrate10 (L-5) 10 (E-11) 10 (E-5) 1 (J-7) 1 (K-12) --(J-10)












COMPLETE NIS Power Range Channel Data Table if reactor power 5% or COMPLETE NIS Intermediate Range Data Table if reactor power <5%. (N/A if not applicable.)


30

F. 3. q. RECORD NIS POWER RANGE CHANNEL DATA (N/A if < 5% power or deemed not necessary by RE):




12


#_NI-41C _NI-42C _NI-43C _NI-44C


12

//////// CH 41 CH 42 CH 43 CH 44 ///////////////////

12 ///////////////////





12

r. PERFORM any required Emergency/Common passes per Attachment C.

s. CIRCLE all locations that could not be mapped on FIGURE 1 of this procedure.

t. VERIFY/PLACE the Computer Switch to the OFF position.

u. COMPLETE ATTACHMENT D for all drives that could not be withdrawn from storage.

v. POSITION Incore detectors per the applicable sections of Attachment A as required:

VERIFY/INSERT all operable detectors to the bottom of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE all operable Detectors into storage.

PLACE in location as directed by Shift Manager or designee.


31

F. 4. System Restoration:

a. VERIFY/ PERFORM the following to restore the audible alarm capability of the detector 4AS303/5AS303 (U1/U2 incore seal table detector) on the General Atomics RM-11 in the main control room.

1) PLACE the RM-11 in SUPERVISOR Mode.

2) SELECT grid four on the RM-11.

3) On the keypad, TYPE 4303/5303 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton (this will cue up the U1/U2 incore seal table detector).

4) PUSH the CHANNEL ITEM pushbutton on the RM-11.

5) On the keypad, TYPE 16 and PUSH the SELECT pushbutton.

6) On the keypad, TYPE 1 and PUSH the ENTER pushbutton.

7) PLACE the RM-11 to NORMAL mode.

b. VERIFY/PERFORM the following to restore Loose Parts Alarms:

1) At 1PA44J, PLACE the ALARM ENABLE/DEFEAT switch to ALM ENABLE for:

1VE-LM003

1VE-LM004

2) EXIT TRM LCO 3.3.d for restored channels.

c. REMOVE the Compact Flash Card(s) from the recorder(s) if directed by Reactor Engineering.

d. ALIGN the IC panel per the Shift Manager or designee.

e. ATTACH completed BwOP IC-9T3, 9T4, or 9T5 sheets (as applicable).

f. FORWARD copies of any BwOP IC-9, 9T3, 9T4, 9T5, which were used to Reactor Engineering.


32

MOVABLE INCORE DETECTORS CORE LOCATIONS

FIGURE 1

R P N M L K J H G F E D C B A

1 C7 B4

2 B8 A2 F2

3 A9 C9 D8 F3

4 A4 D5 E3

5 A1 D7 C10 C3

6 B6 F5 B3 A5 A7

7 E4 D1 B5 E7

8 C2 F9 C8 E6 E8 F1 E9 D3

9 F8 C1 A8 F7

10 A3* CP B1

11 D2* D1 C5 B10 B2

12 E1 F6 A6

13 E5 D4 B9 C4

14 B7 C6 E2 D6

15 F4 A1

NORMAL MODE FLUX THIMBLE LOCATIONS

In this case, there is one to one thimble to detector correspondence(i.e., thimble letter equals detector letter and number corresponds to

detector path selector numbers).

CP - Calibration Path* Unit 2 only, L10 and R11 Capped for Cycle 17 per EC 391242 (A2R16)


33

ATTACHMENT A

NORMAL INCORE OPERATIONS

Perform the applicable step to operate the Incore System as directed in BwOP IC-9.

NOTEStep A will WITHDRAW Detectors from Storage.

Step B INSERT Detectors to the bottom of the core

Step C will SCAN detectors from the bottom of the core to the top of the core

Step D will RECORD and move detectors from the top the core to the bottom of the core

Step E will WITHDRAW the Detectors from the bottom of the core to the fully withdrawn position

Step F will place Detectors in STORAGE.

Step G will manually operate a detector or detectors.

A. To WITHDRAW Detectors from Storage, PERFORM the following:

1) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning at the Common Controls Panel.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be placed in the WITHDRAW position.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be placed in the WITHDRAW position.

2) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment, if applicable.

3) DEPRESS the WITHDRAW Pushbutton at the Common Control Panel.

4) VERIFY that the Detector(s) fully withdrawn.

5) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to fully withdraw all selected Detectors from Storage (N/A if all detectors were withdrawn).


34

ATTACHMENT A (Contd)

B. To INSERT Detectors to the bottom of the core, PERFORM the following:

1) VERIFY that the Detectors to be inserted are in the FULLY WITHDRAWN position.

2) For each Detector to be inserted, PERFORM the following at each Detector Control Panel:

a) SET the OPERATION SELECTOR Switch to the desired position.

b) SET the PATH SELECTOR Switch to the desired position.


VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be inserted to the bottom of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be inserted to the bottom of the core.

4) IF an emergency or common pass is required, VERIFY/UPDATE the EMERGENCY/COMMON/STORAGE limits for the associated drive per the Incore System Operator Aid.

5) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment, if applicable.

6) DEPRESS the INSERT Pushbutton on the Common Control Panel.

7) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) in the bottom of core position.

8) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors in the bottom of the core (N/A if all detectors were inserted).


35


C. To SCAN detectors from the bottom of the core to the top of the core, PERFORM the following:

1) VERIFY that the Detectors to be scanned are at the bottom of the core position.


VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be scanned to the top of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be scanned to the top of the core.

3) VERIFY that there are NO PERSONNEL in Containment.

4) DEPRESS the SCAN Pushbutton on the Common Control Panel.

5) VERIFY/ADJUST detector range to keep sensor output onscale of recorder (N/A if recorder not used).

6) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) at the top of core position.

7) REPEAT the previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors in the top of the core (N/A if all detectors were scanned).


36


D. To RECORD and move detectors from the top of the core to the bottom of the core, PERFORM the following:

1) VERIFY that the Detectors to be recorded are at the top of the core position.


VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to record and move to the bottom of the core.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to record and move to the bottom of the core.


4) DEPRESS the RECORD Pushbutton on the Common Control Panel.

a) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) at the bottom of core position.

b) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors in the bottom of the core (N/A if all detectors were recorded).

E. To WITHDRAW the Detectors from the bottom of the core to the FULLY WITHDRAWN position, PERFORM the following:


VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be fully withdrawn.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be fully withdrawn.


3) DEPRESS the WITHDRAW Pushbutton, at the Common Controls Panel.

4) VERIFY that the Detector(s) is(are) fully withdrawn.

5) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to withdraw individual Detectors (N/A if all detectors were withdrawn).


37


NOTEThe Incore Detectors may be considered fully inserted into storage when the Encoder position is within 12 inches of the higher value of the two storage limits.

F. To place Detectors in Storage, PERFORM the following:

1) For each Detector to be placed in Storage, PERFORM the following at the Associated Detector Control Panel:

a) VERIFY that the Detector is fully withdrawn.

b) PLACE the OPERATION SELECTOR Switch to the STORAGE Position


VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be placed in storage.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be placed in storage.

3) IF the EMERGENCY/COMMON/STORAGE limits have been changed for execution of common or emergency passes, THEN VERIFY/UPDATE the limits for storage using the Incore System Operator Aid.


5) DEPRESS the INSERT Pushbutton at the Common Controls Panel.

6) VERIFY that the Detector(s) STOP at the Storage Lower Limit.

7) DEPRESS the SCAN Pushbutton at the Common Controls Panel.

8) VERIFY that each Detector STOPS at the Storage Upper Limit.

9) REPEAT previous steps as necessary to place all selected Detectors into Storage (N/A if all detectors were placed into storage).


38


NOTEManual operation of the detector may be utilized provided that the detectors are not withdrawn past 0.0 inches as indicated on the associated DETECTOR POSITION indications.

G. To manually operate a detector or detectors, PERFORM the following:

1) DRIVE SELECTOR positioning.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if all of the Detectors are to be manually operated.

VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the A/B/C/D/E/F POSITION, if less than the entire group of Detectors is to be manually operated.


3) VERIFY/PLACE the AUTO/MANUAL Switch in the MANUAL position.

4) INSERT OR WITHDRAW the detector(s) as necessary using the INSERT-OFF-WITHDRAW Switch.

5) VERIFY/PLACE the AUTO/MANUAL Switch in the AUTO position.

6) VERIFY/PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position, if desired (otherwise N/A this step).


39

ATTACHMENT B

INCORE TROUBLESHOOTING

The following is a list of potential problems that, although unlikely, may occur. This is not intended to be an all-inclusive list.

NOTEIf any problems occur that are outside of those listed, please contact a member of the Reactor Engineering Department.

NOTEIf during Insert, Scan, or Record, the appropriate button does not extinguish and the detector(s) has ceased movement, the detector(s) may not have reached its limit due to blockage in the thimble tube.

NOTEDo NOT attempt to unblock a path that was previously identified as being blocked without Operations Management approval. Attempting to unblock a path can lead to the loss of detector function or other system capabilities due to unavailable 10-paths. Authorized attempts should consider what affect losing a detector and associated equipment have on the system, as well as required equipment per TLCO 3.3.a. A list of previously identified blocked paths can be found in the Incore Limits Operator Aid.


40

ATTACHMENT B (Contd)

PROBLEM SOLUTION RNO

Blocked thimble. Try to clear blockage per Step 1. Refer to step 1.i.Path light does not illuminate.

Follow actions of Step 2. Contact an RE.

5 or 10 path does not stop on selected path.

Wait for rotation to continue to selected position.

Contact RE if excessive rotation occurs (>5 rotations).

5 or 10 path does not rotate.

Verify detector withdrawn light is lit. Wait for rotation.

Contact RE if withdrawn light is lit and excessive time has elapsed (>5 min).

STOP light illuminates.

Check all drive selectors are selected to the proper position.

VERIFY more than 1 drive is not selected to the same location. Contact RE.

Fluxmap data not being received.

Contact NIS.

Withdraw light not illuminated

Go to manual and individual drive and Insert/Withdraw in Low Speed

Contact an RE.

1. To attempt to clear blockage in the thimble tube, PERFORM the following:

a. DEPRESS the stop button, and DETERMINE which detector has not reached its limit.

b. SELECT the detector, which has not reached its limit, on the Common Controls Panel.

c. PLACE the AUTO/MANUAL switch to MANUAL.

d. SELECT the SPEED switch to HIGH.

e. PLACE the INSERT/OFF/WITHDRAW Switch in WITHDRAW for the detector and WITHDRAW the detector about 20 inches.

f. PLACE the INSERT/OFF/WITHDRAW Switch in INSERT for the detector and INSERT the detector until the limit is reached, the detector stops, or the detector passes the point of blockage.

g. Repeat steps 1.e & f for a maximum of 3 times

h. TAKE the AUTO/MANUAL switch back to AUTO.


41

ATTACHMENT B (Contd)

1. i. PERFORM one of the following:

If the blockage has NOT been cleared, THEN PERFORM the following:

1) DEPRESS Withdraw on the common control panel.

2) ONCE the detector is withdrawn, PLACE the PATH SELECTOR for that drive to OFF.

3) PLACE the DRIVE SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position. If one of the drives is off, the path selector light for that drive will be extinguished.

4) SELECT the speed switch to LOW.

5) Return to step in effect.

IF the blockage has been cleared, THEN PERFORM the following:

1) PLACE the DRIVER SELECTOR Switch in the ALL position.

2) SELECT the speed switch to LOW.

3) PUSH the INSERT or SCAN pushbutton to reinsert or rescan with the detector.

4) Return to step in effect.

2. IF the correct number of path lights does not illuminate on the common panel, there may be a problem with the indication microswitch.

a. VERIFY that all detectors being inserted have a flux indication on scan.

b. IF there is no flux indication after about 50 inches of scan, STOP the trace and CONTACT a Reactor Engineer.


42

ATTACHMENT C

EMERGENCY/COMMON PASS

NOTEBwOP IC-9 Attachment A is a reference step on how to operate the Incore Drive System. Refer to the appropriate substeps to perform desired movement of the Incore Drive System.

NOTECopy additional forms of this attachment as needed for each Emergency/Common pass.

1. RECORD As Found Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits for the detector(s) being used (N/A for detectors not used):

Emergency/Common/Storage "As Found" LimitsDetector A B C D E F

Top

Bottom

Calibrate "As Found" LimitsDetector A B C D E F

Top

Bottom

2. VERIFY/UPDATE Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits for the drive utilizing the Incore Operator Aid, if applicable.

3. RECORD the Emergency pass positions required by the Reactor Engineering Group in Step 4.


43

ATTACHMENT C (Contd)

4. PLACE a check () when complete for the Emergency/Common Pass.

RECORD Operations Selector Switch and Path Detector Switch Positions as determined by Reactor Engineering as follows:

A B C D E F



VERIFY no personnel in Containment, if applicable.






VERIFY the data was received by the process computer.(Pass number increments by 1. Mapped core locations turn green.)

RECORD required data (Pass # , Detector and ten path position, on the paperless recorder between traces per BwOP IC-9, Attachment B or enter the time of the pass in the adjacent box).


Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits changed? (Yes/No).PERFORM next step if limits were changed, otherwise N/A next step.

5. IF the map is complete, RESTORE Emergency/Common/Storage and Calibrate limits, to the "As Found" limits or per the Incore Operator Aid. N/A if more emergency passes are to be completed.

a. RETURN to BwOP IC-9 procedure and step in effect.


44

ATTACHMENT D

REMOVING/RESTORING A 5-PATH FROM ROTATING

NOTEThe following section is to be used to allow access to the ten paths of drives, which have detectors that cannot be withdrawn. This section can be marked "N/A" if no leads are to be lifted.

NOTERemoval of the 5-path transfer relay per the steps below will ensure that the 5-path will not rotate.

NOTE Copy this Appendix for each Drive that CANNOT be withdrawn from storage.

NOTE Steps 1 through 5 will disable a 5-Path from turning to support mapping. Steps 6 through 12 will return the system to the as found configuration.

1. REMOVE a 5-PATH from operation for all Drives that cannot be withdrawn from storage by lifting leads in the following steps:

a. LIST the Drive(s) for which a lead is being lifted.

__________ __________ __________ __________

b. NOTIFY the Shift Manager that the lead(s), and relay(s) for the Drive(s) listed in 1.a. will be lifted.


45

ATTACHMENT D (Contd)

1. c. CIRCLE the lead(s), and relay(s) to be lifted from the list below:

Lead Relay

Drive A TB3-11 K90A

Drive B TB7-11 K91A

Drive C TB19-11 K92A

Drive D TB23-11 K93A

Drive E TB26-14 K94A

Drive F TB29-14 K95A

2. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the Operation Selector switch for each applicable drive to the STORAGE position at its Detector Control panel.

3. REMOVE the 5-path transfer motor relay(s) circled in Step 1.c from the rear of the _PM08J panel (Access Key 69).

VERIFICATION _____

4. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the Operation Selector switch for each applicable drive to the OFF position at its Detector Control panel. The Storage lamp will extinguish.

CAUTIONThe lead(s) to be lifted are energized with 120V AC.

5. LIFT the lead(s) circled in Step 1.c, located in the rear of the _PM08J panel.

VERIFICATION _____


46

ATTACHMENT D (Contd)

NOTESteps 6 through 12 are to be used to reconnect any leads lifted in step 5.

6. RESTORE a 5-PATH to operation for all Drives that cannot be withdrawn from storage by lifting leads in the following steps:

7. LIST the Drive(s) for which a lead is being landed.

__________ __________ __________ __________

8. RECONNECT all leads that were lifted in step 5 of this attachment as specified below:

Lead

Drive A TB3-11Drive B TB7-11Drive C TB19-11Drive D TB23-11Drive E TB26-14Drive F TB29-14

VERIFICATION _____

9. VERIFY/SELECT STORAGE on the Operation Selector switch for the applicable drive at its Detector Control Panel.

10. VERIFY Storage lamp is ILLUMINATED.

11. REPLACE all motor relay(s) that were removed in step 5 as specified below:

RelayDrive A K90ADrive B K91ADrive C K92ADrive D K93ADrive E K94ADrive F K95A

VERIFICATION _____

12. VERIFY/ESTABLISH the Operation Selector switch as desired by the Shift Manager or designee. System interlocks should not allow operation of the 5-path transfer motor with the detector inserted.

(Final)

SIM-805 Page 1 of 5

JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURE TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO. 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 5. 3. 1PR01J is currently operable, but is scheduled to be taken OOS for maintenance next shift. 4. A Unit 1 containment release is scheduled in anticipation of the 1PR01J outage.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor has handed you a Containment release package G-13-001, completed through section D, and has directed you to perform Section E using the containment mini-purge exhaust fan and BwOP VQ-6 to reduce Containment pressure to between 0.0 and 0.1 psig. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.

2. An Equipment Operator is standing by to obtain the 1FI-VQ009 flowrate

SIM-805 Page 2 of 5

TASK TITLE: Perform a Containment Mini-Purge Release JPM No.: SIM-805 REV: 2013 NRC TPO No.: 4C.VQ-02 K&A No.: 029000 A2.03 TASK No.: R-VQ-006, Start the containment mini-purge sys. K&A IMP: 2.7/3.1 EXAMINEE: RO SRO (Circle One) EVALUATOR: DATE: The Examinee: PASSED this JPM. TIME STARTED: FAILED TIME FINISHED: JPM TIME: MINUTES CRITICAL ELEMENTS: (*) 6, 8 APPROX COMPLETION TIME: 15 MINUTES CRITICAL TIME: NA EVALUATION METHOD: LOCATION: X PERFORM IN PLANT SIMULATE X SIMULATOR GENERAL REFERENCES:

1. BwOP VQ-6 Rev. 21, Containment Mini Purge System Operation 2. RP-BR-980, Rev 12, Containment Vent And Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents

MATERIALS:

1. BwOP VQ-6 Containment Mini Purge System Operation 2. RP-BR-980, Rev 12, Containment Vent And Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents

TASK STANDARDS:

1. Complete Section E.2. a-f of Containment Release Form in accordance with RP-BR-980. 2. Correctly align and start containment mini purge system.

TASK CONDITIONS:

1. You are an extra NSO. 2. Unit 1 is in Mode 1. 3. 1PR01J is currently operable, but is scheduled to be taken OOS for maintenance next shift. 4. A Unit 1 containment release is scheduled in anticipation of the 1PR01J outage.

INITIATING CUES:

1. The Unit Supervisor has handed you a Containment release package G-13-001, completed through section D, and has directed you to perform Section E using the containment mini purge exhaust fan and BwOP VQ-6 to reduce Containment pressure to between 0.0 and 0.1 psig. All previous sections of the release package have been successfully completed.

2. An Equipment Operator is standing by to obtain the 1FI-VQ009 flowrate

SIM-805 Page 3 of 5

RECORD START TIME Note: Provide the examinee with a copy of RP-BR-980 through Step D and BwOP VQ-6. When requested by the examinee, Independent Verification has been completed.

PERFORMANCE STEP STANDARD Circle applicable 1. Refer to partially completed RP-

BR-980, Section E.2

CUE: Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions are met.

• Open RP-BR-980

• REVIEW the applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions.


2. RECORD the affected containment number.

CUE: US has initialed and dated the “SRO” blank.

• Record 1 in the affected containment blank.

• Initial and date “operator” blank.

• Request SRO initial and date “SRO” blank.


3. RECORD the affected containment pressure.

• Record affected containment pressure in blank.

• Initial and date “operator” blank.


4. Ensure HVAC requirements are still in effect.

• Verify 0VA02CA or CB is running.

• Initial and date the “operator” blank


5. Refer to BwOP VQ-6

CUE: Prerequisites, Precautions, Limitations and Actions are met.

• Open BwOP VQ-6.

• REVIEW the applicable Prerequisites, Precautions, and Limitations and Actions.

• Determine step 8 is applicable.


SIM-805 Page 4 of 5

6*. Open mini purge containment isolation valves.

• At 0PM02J:

• Open 1VQ005A

• Open 1VQ005B

• Open 1VQ005C


7. Record the time the valves were open on RP-BR-980 step E.2.d.

• Record the current time.



8*. Start Mini Purge Exhaust Fan. • At 0PM02J, start 1VQ05C


9. Record the time the fan was started on RP-BR-980 step E.2.e.

• Record the current time.




SIM-805 Page 5 of 5


JPM NO: SIM-805 REQUIRED SIMULATOR MODE (S): ANY MALFUNCTION #’S: N/A COMMENTS:

1. RP-BR-980 needs to be filled out through section D.

2. Verify 0VA02CA or CB is running.

3. Raise containment pressure to > 0.3 psig with main containment purge supply system.

4. Place “Release in Progress” placard on 0PM02J

BRAIDWOOD STATION

PROCEDURE BwOP VQ-6

UNIT NO.

REVISION NO. 21

PROCEDURE TITLE: CONTAINMENT MINI-PURGE SYSTEM OPERATION

Rev Summary IR# / EC# (if applicable) 21

Reinstate Step F.1 clarification that was inadvertently dropped from Rev 19.

PCRA 1292723-02

BwOP VQ-6 Revision 21 Continuous Use

1

CONTAINMENT MINI-PURGE SYSTEM OPERATION A. STATEMENT OF APPLICABILITY

This procedure describes the steps required to startup and shutdown the Containment Mini-Purge System.

B. REFERENCES 1. Station Procedures:

a. BwOP VQ-M1/M2, Mechanical Lineup. b. BwOP VQ-E1/E2, Electrical Lineup. c. RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents. d. RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with

1(2)PR01J Inoperable. e. _BwOSR 3.6.3.2, Cnmt Ventilation 8" Purge Sup/Exh Isol Weekly Surv.

2. Station Drawing: M-105, Containment Purge System. 3. Tech Specs:

a. 3.6.4. b. 3.6.5. c. 3.6.3. d. 3.9.4.

4. UFSAR Sections: a. 9.4.9. b. 11.5.2.

5. Westinghouse PLS. 6. Station Commitment: 456-402-91-00100, Precaution on Spent Fuel Pool Impact.


2

C. PREREQUISITES 1. The system is lined up in accordance with BwOP VQ-M1/M2. 2. The system is lined up in accordance with BwOP VQ-E1/E2. 3. NOTIFY the Radiation Protection Department that this procedure is being

performed and the purpose of the performance and verify that the filter will not be changed in _PR01J during release.

4. Either of the following may be used to perform the Containment Release:

RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents (_PR01J OPERABLE).

RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with

1(2)PR01J INOPERABLE.

5. _PR28J must be OPERABLE if the containment release is being performed using RP-BR-932 with _PR01J INOPERABLE.

D. PRECAUTIONS * Startup and Shutdown of the Containment Mini-Purge System may impact Spent Fuel

Pool Level if the Spent Fuel Pool is connected to the Refueling Cavity via the Transfer Canal. If the "Spent Fuel Pit Level High Low" annunciator is not operable, direct communications between the Control Room and the Spent Fuel Pool MUST be maintained until conditions stabilize.


3

E. LIMITATIONS AND ACTIONS 1. When any system valves of Containment Mini-Purge lines are open in MODE 1,

2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3, or are open during core alterations or movement of irradiated fuel within the containment in accordance with Tech Spec 3.9.4:

a. The valves must be capable of closing under accident conditions. b. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the valves must be

functioning. c. The effluent release must be monitored and must be within regulatory

limits.

2. Containment internal pressure shall be maintained between -0.1 and +1.0 psig in MODES 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.4.

3. Containment maximum temperature shall not exceed 120°F in MODES 1, 2, 3,

and 4 per Tech Spec 3.6.5. 4. IF Containment temperature is less than 70°F with the SI Accumulators

pressurized, VERIFY _BwOS SI-1a is entered.

5. Refer to Attachment A of this procedure if _PR01J alarms during a containment release. (N/A if release initiated with RP-BR-932.)

6. The following Containment Mini-Purge valves will close upon a Containment

Ventilation Isolation Signal: a. _VQ003, Mini-Flow to Post LOCA Purge Isol Vlv. b. _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv. c. _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. d. _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. e. _VQ004A, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv. f. _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.

7. All references to _BwOSR 3.6.3.2 are not applicable in Modes 5 or 6, and recording data is not required in these modes.

8. Containment pressure should be less than 0.3 psig prior to starting the _VQ04C,

Mini-Purge Supply Fan to allow forward flow.


4

F. MAIN BODY

CAUTION If _PR01J becomes inoperable during the release, IMMEDIATELY suspend the release. The release may still be performed if initiated with RP-BR-932.

NOTE

Steps 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 can be performed independent of each other. Steps 4 and 5: Purge the Containment with No Mini-Purge Fans. Steps 6 and 7: Operate Containment Mini-Purge Supply Fans. Steps 8 and 9: Operate Containment Mini-Purge Exhaust Fans. Step 10: Performs an Extended Purge of Containment (feed and bleed).

1. VERIFY either of the following is approved by the Shift Manager or designee:

(N/A if only supply fans are to be run): RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE) RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)

NOTE

If taking credit for VA Charcoal Booster and FHB Charcoal Booster Fans, then the opposite unit’s VA Exhaust Fan should be shutdown to prevent a loss of flow up the applicable vent stack.

2. VERIFY when starting Unit 1 Containment Mini-Purge System at least one of the

following is in operation. (N/A if only supply fans are to be run).

Unit One Aux Building Exhaust Fan 0VA02CA/B.

One Lab HVAC Fume Hood Exhaust Fan, 0VL02CA/B. Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA/B/C/D/E/F) and one FHB

Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA/B).


5

NOTE

If taking credit for VA Charcoal Booster and FHB Charcoal Booster Fans, then the opposite unit’s VA Exhaust Fan should be shutdown to prevent a loss of flow up the applicable vent stack.

F. 3. VERIFY when starting Unit 2 Containment Mini-Purge System at least one of the

following is in operation. (N/A if only supply fans are to be run).

Unit Two Aux Building Exhaust Fan 0VA02CC/D.

One Radwaste Building Exhaust Fan 0VW03CA/B. Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA/B/C/D/E/F) and one FHB

Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA/B).


6

NOTE

The Mini-Purge containment isolation valves will not maintain their open position unless the limit switch interlock is complete. Limit switch interlock is complete when valve indication no longer shows dual indication (only the open light is lit).

NOTE

If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release was initiated with RP-BR-932.)

F. 4. To PURGE Containment with no Mini-Purge Fans, perform the following at

0PM02J:

a. RECORD Containment initial pressure on RP-BR-980, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents or RP-BR-932, Containment Vent and Mini Purge Gaseous Effluents with 1(2)PR01J Inoperable.

b. OPEN _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv. c. OPEN _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. d. OPEN _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. e. RECORD the time when valves were opened and release began on the

following:

RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE)

RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE)


7

F. 5. To SECURE/SUSPEND PURGING Containment with no Mini-Purge Fans, perform the following at 0PM02J. a. CLOSE _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv. b. CLOSE _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. c. CLOSE _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. d. RECORD the time when valves were closed and Release was

secured/suspended on the following:


RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) e. RECORD Containment final pressure on the following:




8

CAUTION When any system valves of Containment Mini-Purge lines are open in Mode 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3 then: 1. The valves must be capable of closing under

accident conditions. 2. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the

valves must be functioning. 3. The effluent release must be monitored and must

be within regulatory limits.

NOTE

When starting _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Supply Fan, the Control Switch must be held in the start position until the fan suction damper _VQ01Y is in the open position. The fan will not start until that interlock is satisfied.

NOTE

Notify Radiation Protection to address any radiological concerns when starting Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply when Containment Integrity is set.

NOTE

Before proceeding with the next step, Containment Pressure should be less than 0.3 psig to allow forward flow.

NOTE



9

NOTE

If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release initiated with RP-BR-932.)

F. 6. To startup Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. OPEN _VQ004A, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv.

b. OPEN _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.

c. START _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini Flow Prg Supply Fan.

d. MONITOR Containment pressure.

7. To SECURE/SUSPEND Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J: a. STOP _VQ04C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Supply Fan. b. CLOSE _VQ004A, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Inside Isol Vlv. c. CLOSE _VQ004B, Mini-Flow Prg Sup Outside Isol Vlv.


10

CAUTION When any system valves of Containment Mini-Purge lines are open in Mode 1, 2, 3 and 4, in accordance with Tech Spec 3.6.3 then: 1. The valves must be capable of closing under

accident conditions. 2. The instrumentation for causing isolation of the

valves must be functioning. 3. The effluent release must be monitored and must

be within regulatory limits.

NOTE


NOTE

If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM Attachment A of this procedure for _PR01J alarm response. (N/A if release initiated with RP-BR-932.)

F. 8. To Startup Cnmt Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J:

a. OPEN _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv. b. OPEN _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. c. OPEN _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. d. RECORD time valves were opened on the following:


RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) e. START _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan.


11

F. 8. f. RECORD start time of fan on the following:


RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) g. OPERATE Containment Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan as directed by the Unit

Supervisor while MONITORING the Containment pressure.


12

F. 9. To SECURE/SUSPEND Cnmt Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan, perform the following at 0PM02J: a. STOP _VQ05C, Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan. b. RECORD fan stop time on the following:


RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) c. CLOSE _VQ005A, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Inside Isol Vlv. d. CLOSE _VQ005B, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. e. CLOSE _VQ005C, Mini-Flow Prg Exh Outside Isol Vlv. f. RECORD valve closure time on the following:


RP-BR-932 (_PR01J INOPERABLE) g. RECORD Containment final pressure on the following:




13

F. 10. To perform an Extended Purge (feed and bleed) of Unit _ Containment, perform

the following:

CAUTION Containment pressure SHALL be maintained between - 0.1 and 1.0 psig in Modes 1, 2, 3, and 4.

a. VERIFY/START the Cnmt Mini-Purge Exhaust Fan per Step F.8.

NOTE

Before proceeding with the next step, Containment Pressure should be less than 0.3 psig to allow forward flow.

b. START the Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply Fan per Step F.6. c. WHEN Containment Pressure reaches the desired value, STOP _VQ05C,

Cnmt Mini-Flow Prg Exh Fan. d. OPERATE Cnmt Mini-Purge Supply and Exhaust Fans as directed by the

Unit Supervisor while monitoring Containment Pressure. e. SECURE/SUSPEND the Release per Steps F.7 and F.9 when necessary.


14

ATTACHMENT A

_PR01J ALARM RESPONSE DURING CONTAINMENT RELEASES

NOTE This attachment should only be used if the release was initiated using RP-BR-980 (_PR01J OPERABLE).

If _PR01J alarms during a containment release, PERFORM the following as applicable:

If a HIGH Alarm is received on any Channel, PERFORM the following:

1. SECURE the release by performing the applicable steps of this procedure. 2. TERMINATE the release package. 3. NOTIFY Rad Protection that the release has been terminated.

If an ALERT Alarm is received on any Channel, continue to CLOSELY MONITOR the

containment release. (The ALERT Alarm is normally set close to the HIGH setpoint to warn the operator that prompt manual action may be required).

If a Communications, Operate, or Equipment Failure has occurred, PERFORM the

following: 1. SUSPEND the release by performing the applicable steps of this procedure. 2. Determine the cause of the monitor failure per BwOP AR/PR-11, using the

RM-11 Alarm Response Guidelines. 3. If the alarm condition can be cleared and the monitor restored to normal while the

unit is in Mode 5, 6 or defueled, then the release may be RESTARTED with Shift Supervisor permission.

4. If the alarm condition CANNOT be cleared, TERMINATE the release package.

(Final)

RP-BR-980 Revision 12

Page 1 of 25 Level 1 – Continuous Use

1.

CONTAINMENT VENT AND MINI PURGE GASEOUS EFFLUENTS

1.1. This procedure outlines the method to be used to verify that the principal gamma emitting noble gas isotopes, iodine and tritium activities in the Containment Building atmosphere are identified and quantified and dose rates established as required by Technical Specifications.

PURPOSE

2. MATERIAL AND SPECIAL EQUIPMENT

3.

- NONE

3.1.

PRECAUTIONS, LIMITATIONS, AND PREREQUISITES

3.1.1. If an out-of-spec condition exists (such as exceeding activity limits in step A.5.b.2., monitoring equipment failure, etc.) immediately notify the Shift Manager.

Precautions

3.2.

3.2.1. Contact Operations to determine if 1(2)PR01J is operable. If 1(2)PR001J is inoperable, then refer to RP-BR-932 for release from containment with 1(2)PR001J inoperable

Limitations

3.2.2. The limiting condition for operation is met when the principle gamma emitting noble gases, iodine and tritium activities are identified and quantified and the dose rates released in gaseous effluents from the site to areas at or beyond the site boundary are limited to the following (exceeding activity concentrations in A.5.b.2. may indicate these dose limits need to be evaluated by chemistry):

1. Whole body - less than or equal to 500 mrem/yr.

2. Skin - less than or equal to 3000 mrem/yr.

3.2.3. Dose rate calculations for this surveillance shall be performed in accordance with the methodology and parameters in the Offsite Dose Calculation Manual.

3.2.4. This procedure is applicable at all times and in all modes of reactor operation.

3.2.5. The Shift Manager must be notified immediately whenever the limiting condition for operation cannot be met.

3.2.6. In the event an out-of-specification condition exists, immediately notify the Shift Manager to implement the applicable LCOAR procedure.

3.2.7. Use of “N/A” is allowed when procedure/attachment step is not required.


Page 2 of 25

3.3.

3.3.1. Attachment 1, Containment Release Form, has been approved by Radiation Protection and the Shift Manager or SRO prior to commencing a containment release.

Prerequisites

4.

4.1. OBTAIN Attachment 1, Containment Release Form. Radiation Protection SHALL assign a Release Number from Attachment 2, Containment Release Log.

MAIN BODY

4.2. Radiation Protection SHALL OBTAIN all necessary sample results and COMPLETE Section A. The form should be HAND DELIVERED to Chemistry to COMPLETE Section B, unless Section B is not applicable and Chemistry ODCM evaluation is not required. The form should be HAND DELIVERED to Operating to COMPLETE Sections C, D, E and F.

4.3. Following the completion of the release, Attachment 1 will be delivered to Chemistry for completion of Section G. Attachment 1 will be FILED by the Chemistry Department.

5.

5.1. This procedure is considered complete and no further action is required when Attachment 1 is properly completed for each release and the dose limits have been met.

RETURN TO NORMAL

6.

6.1.

REFERENCES

6.1.1. Offsite Dose Calculation Manual (ODCM).

Commitments

6.1.2. Technical Specification Section 3.6.3, "Containment Isolation Valves".

6.1.3. Technical Specification Section 5.5.4, "Radioactive Effluent Controls Program".

7.

7.1. Attachment 1 - Containment Release Form

ATTACHMENTS

7.2. Attachment 2 - Containment Release Log


Page 3 of 25

ATTACHMENT 1 Containment Release Form

Page 1 of 22

1(2) PR 01J Operable ___ X

Release Number __

___Yes ________No (refer to RP-BR-932)

G-13-001Initiate Purge by Time/Date ___

___ 0700/tomorrow

A.

_

1. INDICATE the Containment to be released by CHECKING the applicable Unit.

Radiation Protection/Chemistry Responsibility

Unit One Containment X Unit Two Containment N/A

Release Type Notes Initial Date Routine Release 1,2,3,6,7 RR

First Post-Shutdown Release

today

1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A

Second Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A

Third Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A

Additional Non-Continuous Post Shutdown Release 1,2,3,6,7 N/A N/A

Continuous Post Shutdown Release 3,4,5,6,7 N/A N/A

NOTE 1: Only one containment release can be performed with each containment noble gas, iodine and tritium analysis, unless otherwise approved by RP/Chemistry Supervision. A release is defined as the exhaust isolation valves being open for greater than one minute.

_________________________________________ Leave blank if no approval needed.

SRRS 2C.111


Page 4 of 25


Page 2 of 22

NOTE 2: Routine non-outage analyzed samples are valid for a period of 48 hours from the time the sample is pulled. As long as the purge is initiated in the 48 hour window, the package is valid until the purge is terminated. Under conditions of continuous feed and bleed in modes 1-4, a new sample must be obtained every 24 hours and a new release package must be prepared and used within 48 hours from the time each sample is pulled.

NOTE 3: Following a startup, shutdown, or thermal power change of 15% within one hour, new containment samples must be obtained and analyzed prior to a containment purge or vent.

NOTE 4: During refueling or extended outages when containment integrity is broken and the containment purge system is in continuous use, the following special practices will be implemented:

− A new containment release form should be completed every 30 hours, not to exceed 48 hours during the first three days of the outage until the noble gas and tritium activity in containment has stabilized at or near LLD.

− Once the noble gas and tritium concentrations are verified stabilized by trending for a period of 3 days, the purge can be run continuously without generating a new package.

− To initiate a containment release package, with no expiration date, complete steps A.1. through A.6., and mark “ continuous release” in the “Initiate Purge by” blank on Page 1

If significant increases in daily noble gas or tritium concentrations are noted or the purge is terminated a new containment release package must be initiated.

NOTE 5: In Modes 5, 6 and defueled only, interruptions of 4 hours or less shall not be considered a termination of release.


Page 5 of 25


Page 3 of 22

NOTE 6: It is permissible to simultaneously release from multiple sources (i.e., U-1 Containment and Gas Decay Tank) provided that each release path meets its respective release rate limits as documented on the applicable release form.

NOTE 7: All times should be recorded in a 2400 hour time format.

A. 2. OBTAIN the following and ATTACH to this release form:

a. Containment noble gas activity

b. Containment tritium activity (RP-BR-911 or RP-BR-949)

c. Containment Iodine activity

__ RR _/__ Initial Date

today

3. VERIFY that the noble gas activity from 1(2)PB111 has not changed significantly

since sampling. (NA this step if 1(2)PB111 is not in service). The 1(2) PB111 trend can be obtained from the 1(2) RM11, or Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_RP0076 (Unit 1) or BRW02V_RP0114 (Unit 2).

__ RR _/_ Initial Date

today

CAUTION

If 0VA02CC/D is in operation without 0VA02CA/B in operation, VA will not provide any flow up the unit 1 stack even with the charcoal booster fans in operation. In this case, a Laboratory Fume Hood exhaust fan (0VL02CA/B) must be in operation to provide air flow.


Page 6 of 25


Page 4 of 22

4. a. For a Unit one release VERIFY at least one of the following conditions exists. (Check box next to operating component, NA this step if performing a Unit two release)

Unit one Aux Building Exhaust Fan (0VA02CA or

0VA02CB) running One Lab HVAC Fume Hood Exhaust (0VL02CA or

0VL02CB) running Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA-F) and one

FHB Charcoal Booster Fan running (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) with NO main VA fans running (0VA02CA-D).

__ RR __/_ Initial Date

today

CAUTION

If 0VA02CA/B is in operation without 0VA02CC/D in operation, VA will not provide any flow up the unit 2 stack even with the charcoal booster fans in operation. In this case, a Radwaste Exhaust Fan (0VW03CA/B) must be in operation to provide air flow.

A. 4. b. For a Unit two release VERIFY at least one of the following conditions exists. (Check box next to operating component, NA this step if performing a Unit one release)

Unit two Aux Building Exhaust Fan (0VA02CC or

0VA02CD) running One Radwaste Building Exhaust Fan (0VW03CA or

0VW03CB) running Two VA Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA-F) and one FHB

Charcoal Booster Fan runnning (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) with no main VA fans running (0VA02CA-D).

_______/_______ Initial Date


Page 7 of 25


Page 5 of 22

NOTE: If no quantifiable noble gas peaks and no tritium are found in the containment radionuclide analysis, or if all identified noble gases and tritium are less than their respective LLD's, enter "<LLD" in steps A.5.a.1 and A.5.a.2

NOTE: If a computerized release program is available, attach the printout to this form. “N/A” may be used for steps that perform same function as computer when computer is used.

5. Release Rate and Monitor Setpoint Determination

a. VERIFY that the release does not exceed the 10CFR20 release limits by COMPARING the calculated total µCi/cc values to their stated µCi/cc limits in Step A.5.b.


Page 8 of 25


Page 6 of 22

A. 5. a. 1) RECORD the total noble gas activity from the applicable isotopic below.

Noble Gas Activity = ______4.44E-4

__

______ uCi/cc

RR __/__ Initial Date

today

2) RECORD the tritium activity from Section B of RP-BR-911 or RP-BR-949.

Tritium Activity = _______4.1E-6

__

_______ uCi/cc

RR __/__ Initial Date

today

b) 1) Is the NOBLE GAS activity (step A.5.a.1) less than or equal to 5.29E-2 µCi/cc AND the TRITIUM activity (step A.5.a.2) less than or equal to 5.29E-2 µCi/cc?

[ ] YES This package is acceptable for release using the Mini-Purge or Post-Loca flowpaths. (N/A all of step A.5.b.2).

[ ] NO Then answer the following question:

2) Is the NOBLE GAS activity (step A.5.a.1) less than or equal to 5.29E-1 µCi/cc AND the TRITIUM activity (step A.5.a.2) less than or equal to 5.29E-1 µCi/cc?

[ ] YES This package is acceptable for release using the Post-Loca Flowpath only. N/A all of step E.1 now.

[ ] NO THIS PACKAGE MAY BE UNACCEPTABLE FOR RELEASE. Notify Unit Supervisor. Notify Chemistry ODCM/RETS owner for further guidance.

__ RR __/_ today Initial Date

_


Page 9 of 25


Page 7 of 22

NOTE: The following guidance only applies to the RETDAS computer program:

The release rate calculation should initially be performed assuming a containment purge rate of 4000 cfm (1.89E6 cc/sec). This release rate is associated with the mini purge system.

If a recalculation is required (Step A.5.b.2 is answered yes) the containment purge rate used should be 400 cfm (1.89E5 cc/sec). This release rate is associated with the post-LOCA purge system.

In either case, the total noble gas or tritium release rate must be <=1E5 µCi/sec.

NOTE: If the noble gas activity recorded in Step A.5.a.1. is <LLD, a value of zero should be used for the total containment activity in Step A.5.c.

NOTE: Independent verification of steps A.5.c and A.5.d is required if manual calculations are performed. If a computerized release program is used, attach the printout and "NA" Steps A.5.c. and A.5.ed.

c. The alarm setpoints will be set at a value of 50% above the containment total analyzed noble gas activity plus the current containment purge monitor gas detector [1(2)PB101] background. The current 1(2)PB101 background value can be OBTAINED from the 1(2)RM-11, or Plant Parameter Displays Trend ID BRW01V_RP0066 (Unit 1) or BRW02V_RP0104 (Unit 2).

(Total Containment activity x 1.5) + [1(2)PB101] background =

(________________ µCi/cc x 1.5) + ____________(Step A.5.a.1)

_____ µCi/cc =

____________

Indep Verf

_____ µCi/cc

__ _____/_ ____ _ ___ Initial Date Initial Date

__/______


Page 10 of 25


Page 8 of 22

d. EVALUATE the calculated monitor setpoint as follows:

1) COMPARE the calculated monitor setpoint from Step A.5.c. to the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint of 6.06E-4 µCi/cc. If the calculated value is less than the baseline monitor setpoint, RECORD the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint as the release setpoint. If the calculated value is greater than the baseline monitor HIGH alarm setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the release setpoint.

1(2)PB101 HIGH Alarm Setpoint ________

2) COMPARE the calculated monitor setpoint from Step A.5.c. to the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint of 6.06E-5 µCi/cc. If the calculated value is less than the baseline monitor setpoint, RECORD the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint as the release setpoint. If the calculated value is greater than the baseline monitor ALERT alarm setpoint, RECORD the calculated value as the release setpoint.

__ µCi/cc

1(2)PB101 ALERT Alarm Setpoint _________

__ µCi/cc

e. RECORD Release Setpoints:

1(2)PB101 HIGH Alarm Setpoint __6.06E-4

ALERT Alarm Setpoint __

___ µCi/cc

6.06E-5

Indep Verf

____ µCi/cc

__ RR __/ today __ N/A Initial Date Initial Date

_/______

NOTE: If any single isotope of iodine is present in the attached isotopic report(s) at greater than 1.0E-8 µCi/cc, then Chemistry ODCM evaluation is required prior to performing this containment release. If Section B of this procedure is N/A, then forward this release package to Operations (as required by Step 4.2 in this procedure) after approval for release at Step A.7.


Page 11 of 25


Page 9 of 22

A. 6. REVIEW the attached iodine isotopic report(s) and SELECT one of the following:

o Any single isotope of iodine is present at greater than 1.0 E-8 µCi/cc, Section B must be completed by Chemistry.

_______/______ Initial Date

o No single isotope of iodine is present at greater than 1.0E-8 µCi/cc, mark Section B “N/A”.


7.

Radiation Protection _____

APPROVAL FOR RELEASE

Rad Supervisor________


Page 12 of 25


Page 10 of 22

B.

NOTE: If detectable levels of Iodine are present in the attached isotopic report(s), then Chemistry ODCM evaluation is required for Quarterly and Annual Effluent dose limits prior to performing this containment release.

Chemistry Department Responsibility

1. The Chemistry ODCM evaluation is complete.


The following release path is required:

Post-Loca flowpath Release path as outlined in step A.5.b. Approval for release: Chemistry ________________________________


C.

NOTE: If any of the below instruments are inoperable, then refer to RETS 12.2.2.A and Table 12.2-3 for appropriate action.

Operating Department Responsibility

1. PERFORM the appropriate instrumentation operability checks and required Tech Spec surveillances on applicable monitors.

a. PERFORM _1BwOS RETS 2.2.B-1, Unit 1_Pre-Release Source and Channel Check of Containment Purge Effluent Monitor 1PR01J (1RE-PR001A/B/C).

___ JN _/_ Initial Date

Today


Page 13 of 25


Page 11 of 22 b. RECORD original Setpoint of __RE-PR001 Gas Channel

RM-11 Monitor GRID

CNMT 2 _1PB101 HIGH ALARM SETPOINT

ADDRESS

6.06E-4__µCi/cc PURGE EFF ALERT ALARM SETPOINT _6.06E-5

___µCi/cc

JN __/_ Initial Date

Today

NOTE: Steps c-f should be completed only if the setpoints recommended by RP in Step A.5.e. are different than the current setpoints of _RE-PR001 Gas Channel.

NOTE: When the RM-11 is in SUPERVISOR MODE, some actions may have serious detrimental effects on system operation. Use CAUTION and DO NOT leave the RM-11 console unattended when it is in the SUPERVISOR MODE. If any unusual conditions occur then contact the system STE.

c. PLACE the RM-11 console in SUPERVISOR MODE.

_______/_______ Initial Date


Page 14 of 25


Page 12 of 22

d. DEPRESS the CHANNEL ITEM Key. Then SELECT the High Alarm Setpoint Channel Item by KEYING in "09" and then DEPRESSING the SEL key. Grid 2 ____PB101


e. ENTER the High Alarm Setpoint for _PB101 suggested by Radiation Protection/Chemistry in section A.5.e. using the format XYZ + AB. (i.e. A value of 5.36E-12 would be entered as 536-12).

High Alarm Release Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/______ _______/______ Initial Date Initial Date f. ENTER the Alert Alarm Setpoint suggested by Radiation

Protection/Chemistry in Section A.5.e. using the method described in steps d and e. In order to select the Alert Alarm Channel Item in step d, a "10" must be KEYED in.

High Alarm Release Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/______ _______/______ Initial Date Initial Date


Page 15 of 25


Page 13 of 22 D.

SHIFT ENGINEER OR SRO RESPONSIBILITY

1. PLACE the placard "Gaseous Release in Progress" somewhere on 0PM02J where the placard will be visible. This is to ensure that for a unit 1 release an Aux. Bldg. Exhaust Fan (unit 1 side) or a Lab HVAC exhaust fan is in operation, OR for a unit 2 release an Aux. Bldg. Exhaust Fan (unit 2 side) or a Radwaste Bldg. Exhaust Fan is in operation, or for either unit , to have (2) Charcoal Booster Fans (0VA03CA-F) and (1) FHB Charcoal Booster Fan (0VA04CA or 0VA04CB) in operation.

_ US___/_ Initial Date

today

NOTE: Routine non-outage analyzed samples are valid for a

period of 48 hours. As long as the purge is initiated in the 48 hour window, the package is valid until the purge is terminated

NOTE: Following a startup, shutdown, or thermal power change of 15% within one hour, new containment samples must be obtained and analyzed prior to a containment purge or vent.

2. ENSURE sections A.7. and B.1 are signed or labeled not applicable by a

member of Radiation Protection and/or Chemistry approving the release. ENSURE the sample analyses have not expired from page 1.

__ US__/_ Initial Date

today


Page 16 of 25


Page 14 of 22 3. If the release is from Containment through the Mini Purge System, then

INSTRUCT the operator to start the Mini Purge System per BwOP VQ-6 Containment Mini-Purge Operation (The fan start section), following SE or SRO approval in Step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in Step A.5.b. for Mini-Purge flowpath, and per Chemistry approval in Step B.1 (if required).

If the release is from Containment through the Mini Purge System for the purpose of equalizing Containment pressure with atmospheric pressure (no fans required), then INSTRUCT the Operator to perform procedure BwOP VQ-6, Containment Mini-Purge Operation (The venting containment section), following SE or SRO approval in Step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in Step A.5.b. for mini purge flowpath, and per Chemistry approval in Step B.1 (if required).

If the release is from Containment through the Post-LOCA Purge System, INSTRUCT the operator to PERFORM procedure BwOP VQ-7 following SE or SRO approval in step D.2. above. ENSURE the purge is acceptable per HP calculations in step A.5.b. for Post-LOCA flowpath, or per Chemistry direction in Step B.1.

D. 4. REVIEW information and ENSURE the form is filled out properly.

Approval for Release _______ US ________/__SE OR SRO Date

today


Page 17 of 25


Page 15 of 22 E.

Operator Responsibility

1. If the release is through the Containment Mini Purge System, then COMPLETE the following:

OPERATOR

a. Affected Containment ____ ______/______ ______/______

SRO

b. RECORD affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in effect.

______/______ d. Start time of purge ____ ______/______

Exhaust isolation dampers open per BwOP VQ-6 OR Time of transfer from Release # _________________________

e. Start time of fan ____ ______/______

f. Purge flowrate _FI-VQ009 ____cfm ______/______ (or estimate if flow gauge is inoperable)

g. Stop time of fan ____ ______/______

h. Stop time of purge ____ ______/______ Exhaust isolation dampers closed per BwOP VQ-6 or Time of transfer to Release #___________________________

i. Final affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

NOTE: In Modes 5, 6 and defueled only, momentary interruptions of 4 hours or less shall not be considered a termination of release.


Page 18 of 25


Page 16 of 22

E. 1. j. Purge interruptions of 4 hours or less

Stop time Start time ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______

E. 2. If the release is through the Containment Mini Purge System as a VENT PATH (without a fan in operation), then COMPLETE the following:

OPERATOR

SRO

a. Affected Containment ____ ______/______ ______/______ Unit.

b. RECORD affected Containment ____psig ______/______

Positive Pressure

c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in affect.

______/______

d. Start time of release (Exhaust isolation valves open per BwOP VQ-6) ____ ______/______

e. Stop time of release (Exhaust Isolation valves closed per BwOP VQ-6) ____ ______/______

f. Final affected Containment Pressure ____psig ______/______


Page 19 of 25


Page 17 of 22

E. 3. If the release is through the CNMT Post LOCA Purge System, then COMPLETE the following:

OPERATOR

a. Affected Containment ____ ______/______ ______/______

SRO

b. RECORD affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

c. ENSURE that the HVAC requirements of step A.4.a, or A.4.b as applicable, are still in affect.

______/______ d. Start time of purge ____ ______/______

Exhaust isolation dampers open per BwOP VQ-7 or Time of transfer from Release # _________________________

e. Start time of fan ____ ______/______

f. Purge flowrate _FI-VQ093 ____cfm ______/______ (or estimate if flow gauge is inoperable)

g. Stop time of fan ____ ______/______

h. Stop time of purge ____ ______/______ Exhaust isolation dampers closed per BwOP VQ-7 or Time of transfer to Release #___________________________

i. Final affected containment pressure ____psig ______/______

j. Purge interruptions of 4 hours or less

Stop time Start time

____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______ ____ ____ ______/______


Page 20 of 25


Page 18 of 22

NOTE: If this release will be continued on another release package (unit is in a continuous release mode) step E.4 and E.5 can be skipped.

E. 4. RETURN Rad Monitors for the affected release path to their baseline setpoints (This Step is NOT APPLICABLE if setpoints were not changed in step C.1.)

a. Containment Release ( RE-PR001)

1) RETURN the HIGH ALARM Setpoint for PB101 to the baseline setpoint in Section A.5.e. (USE the method described in Section C.1.)

High Alarm Baseline Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/________ _______/________ Initial Date Initial Date

2) RETURN the Alert Alarm Setpoint for PB101 to the baseline Setpoint in section A.5.e. (USE the method described in Section C.1.).

Alert Alarm Baseline Setpoint Indep Verf

___PB101 ______________ _______/________ _______/________ Initial Date Initial Date

5. REMOVE the placard "Gaseous Release in Progress" from 0PM02J.

6 RETURN this release form to the SE or SRO.


Page 21 of 25


Page 19 of 22

F.

NOTE: Notify Radiation Protection/Chemistry that the release has been terminated if containment purge will be discontinued for more than 4 hours AND containment integrity is broken.

SE or SRO Responsibility

1. REVIEW the discharge data and ENSURE that the form is filled out properly.

Discharge complete; reviewed by _________/______/_____ SE or SRO Date Time

2. FORWARD this form to Chemistry Supervision.


Page 22 of 25


Page 20 of 22

G.

1. Actual Gaseous and TRITIUM Activity Released

Chemistry Responsibility

NOTE: If a computerized release program is available, attach the printout to this form and indicate "see attached" in the calculation spaces below. If manual calculations are performed, independent verification is required.

NOTE: More than one method may be used to quantify a release if the time the isolation dampers were opened differs from the time the fans were turned on or separate calculations of the same method may be performed. For example two different release paths were used with different flow rates.

a. Differential Pressure Method - to be used when containment integrity is not broken.

1) Volume of containment released

Where:

Pi

P

= pressure before release _____psig

f

= pressure after release _____psig

ccP

PPxtcontainmeninccE

i

fi=

+

−+

7.14)(1082.7


Page 23 of 25


Page 21 of 22 G. 1. a. 2) DOCUMENT in the table below the total µCi released of each noble

gas isotope and tritium.

NOTE: µCi released = Analyzed noble gas or tritium activity (µCi/cc) x volume of containment released (cc).

Noble Gas and Tritium Isotope __________________ ___________

µCi Released

__________________ ___________ __________________ ___________ __________________ ___________

Indep Verf

_______/______ _______/______ Initial Date Initial Date

b. Activity x Flowrate x Time method - to be used when containment integrity is broken (i.e. outages) and no difference in pressure can be noted.

Fill in the chart MULTIPLYING the first 4 columns to OBTAIN activity released in µCi. DIVIDE the activity by the duration of release (seconds) to OBTAIN µCi/sec.

NUCLIDE CONTAINMENT (µCi/cc)

FAN FLOW (cfm)

CONSTANT (cc/cf)

TIME (min)

ACTIVITY (µCi)

RATE (µCi/s)

H-3 2.83E+004 Ar-41 2.83E+004 Kr-85 2.83E+004 Kr-85M 2.83E+004 Kr-87 2.83E+004 Kr-88 2.83E+004 Xe-131M 2.83E+004 Xe-133 2.83E+004 Xe-133M 2.83E+004 Xe-135 2.83E+004 TOTALS

Indep Verf

_______/______ _______/______ Initial Date Initial Date


Page 24 of 25


Page 22 of 22

G. 1. c. Concentration Curve Fit Method - if a high fan flow or high concentration was used during the release and sufficient containment atmosphere samples are available the rate change of concentration in containment may be used for a more accurate determination of released activity. REFER to policy Memo EFF-06 and ATTACH pertinent calculations to this form.

2. VERIFY compliance with 10CFR50 dose limits by ENTERING release data into the 10CFR50 ODCM gaseous release program per CY-AA-170-200, Radioactive Effluent Controls Program.


Page 25 of 25

ATTACHMENT 2 Containment Release Log

Page 1 of 1

Date Pkg. Made

Release Number

Release Source

Date Pkg. Made

Release Number

Release Source

Records Retention: SRRS 2C.111

RETDAS v3.6.3 <BRA> VSSI

GASEOUS PRE-RELEASE PERMIT REPORT ---------------------------------

Permit Number: 2006100 Release Point: Unit 1 Containment Purge Release Mode : 2 Batch

Permit Status : Pre-Release

Comments: === RELEASE DATA =================================================== Release Number .......................................... G-13-001 1(2) PB101 High Alarm Setpoint (uCi/cc)................... 6.06E-04 Alert Alarm Setpoint (uCi/cc)................... 6.06E-05 === MONITOR DATA =================================================== 1(2) PB101 Monitor Background(uCi/cc)...................... 1.82E-06 Calculated Setpoint (uCi/cc).............................. 7.23E-06

=== RELEASE RATE DATA ============================================== Procedure: BwRP 6110-13T1 Section: A.5.b.1........... YES This package is acceptable for release using the Main Purge, Mini-Purge, Vent Path or Post-LOCA flowpaths. Discharge flowrate (cfm)................................... 4.39E+04 Discharge flowrate (cc/sec)................................ 2.07E+07 NG Release Rate (uCi/sec).................................. 7.48E+01 Percent of Release Rate Limit (%).......................... 7.48E-02 H-3 Release Rate (uCi/sec)................................. 8.50E+01 Percent of Release Rate Limit (%).......................... 8.50E-02 === LIMITS ANALYSIS ================================================ Performed by:_____R. P. Tech____________________ Date: _Today_____

RETDAS v3.6.3 <BRA> VSSI

GASEOUS PRE-RELEASE PERMIT REPORT ---------------------------------

Permit Number: 2006100

=== NUCLIDE DATA ======================================================= Undiluted Rel Rate Nuclide uCi/cc uCi/sec --------- --------- --------- XE-133 4.89E-05 7.48E+03 --------- --------- --------- F&AG 5.09E-05 7.48+03 H-3 1.82E-06 8.50E+01 --------- --------- --------- H-3 1.82E-06 8.50E+01 --------- --------- --------- Total 5.27E-05 1.60E+02


Page 14 of 14

ATTACHMENT 8 1/2RE-PR011J ATMOSPHERIC TRITIUM CALCULATION FORM

Page 1 of 1 A. Sample Information

Sample Location:_____1PR11J________ RT:________WH____________ Date On: _____today__________ Date Off: _______ today __________ Time On: _______0100________ Time Off: ________0215__________

B. Tritium Concentration Calculation

___4.10E-4____Ci/ml (150 ml)

( 200cc/min) ( 75_ min)

Tritium Concentration = ___4.1E-6_____Ci/cc C. Derived Air Concentration Calculation

Tritium Concentration

2 E-5 Ci/cc/DAC

DAC Fraction = ___2.05E-1______

Reviewed By: _____Rad Pro Sup________/___today___ Radiation Protection/Chemistry Date

task conditions: 1. you are the unit 1 nso. · sim-102 page 1 of 6 job performance measure task...

Documents